Table of Contents: Maxwell 2D

Transcription

1 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. More Top About Help Table of : Maxwell 2D Using the Help System Maxwell 2D Expand Solver Expand Hotkeys Drawing Define Model Menu Draw Model Expand File Menu Expand Edit Menu Expand Reshape Menu Boolean Menu Arrange Menu Object Menu Constraint Menu Model Menu Window Menu Expand Expand Expand Expand Help Menu Expand Couple Model Group Objects Expand Material Manager Expand Setup Boundaries/Sources Expand Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Magnetostatic Sources Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Eddy Current Sources DC Conduction Boundary Conditions DC Conduction Sources Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

2 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Top About Help Table of : Maxwell 2D AC Conduction Boundary Conditions AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Eddy Axial Sources Transient Boundary Conditions Transient Sources Edit Menu (Boundary Manager) Assign Menu Expand Functional Boundaries and Sources Setup Executive Parameters Expand Setup Solution Options Expand Manual Mesh Refinement Expand EMpulse Expand Setting up a Parametric Solution Solve Expand Post Process File Menu Global Menu Window Menu Show Menu Post Menu Calc Menu Expand Expand Ex pand Expand Introduction to Parametric Analysis Parametrics Post Processing Edit Menu Variables Menu Data Menu Plot Menu Technical Notes Expand Expand Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

3 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Table of : Maxwell 2D Using the Help System The Topics List The Button Commands Links in the Text Document Title Active Regions on Graphics Selecting Text and Graphics The Menu Bar Help Window Functions Page Number Screen Size (Percentage) Screen Size (Step) Page Scroll Scroll Bar Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

4 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Table of : Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Executive Commands Menu Solution Monitoring Display Area Changing the View of the Geometric Model Changing the View of Transient Solutions Zooming In Zooming Out Viewing the Entire Plot Displaying Plot Coordinates Formatting Transient Plot Axes Formatting Transient Plot Graphs Batch Processing Licensing and Non-Graphical Interfaces Batch Mode for Workstations (UNIX) Batch Log File Batch Script File Batch Mode for Personal Computers (Microsoft Windows) Batch Log File Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

5 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Table of : Maxwell 2D Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

6 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Top About Help Table of : Maxwell 2D Draw Model Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Menu Bar Drawing Region Project Windows Subwindows Subwindow Coordinate Systems Subwindows Versus Project Windows Active Windows Status Bar Message Bar Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Selecting Points With the Keyboard Units Object Names and Colors Viewing a Model Zooming and Panning in Subwindows Displaying Objects as Wire Frames or Shaded Solids Reading, Importing, and Saving Models Things to Consider Keep it Simple Level of Detail Treat the Background as an Object Sizing the Drawing Region Consider Boundaries Objects within Objects Partial Overlapping Not Allowed Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

7 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Table of : Maxwell 2D File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open Things to Consider Read Only Mode Opening Maxwell 2D Files version 4.33 (or earlier) File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Print/Entire Window File/Print/Subwindow File/Print/Rectangle Print Setup Within the Windows File/Exit Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

8 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. More Top About Help Table of : Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Duplicate/Along Line Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc Edit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Select/By Area Edit/Select/By Name Edit/Select/All Items Edit/Select/Open Objects Edit/Select/Closed Objects Edit/Select/Model Objects Edit/Select/NonModel Objects Edit/Deselect All Edit/Deselect All/Current Project Edit/Deselect All/All Projects Edit/Attributes Edit/Attributes/By Clicking Object Attributes Color Name Model Object Show Hatches Show Orientation Text Attributes Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

9 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Table of : Maxwell 2D Text Color Alignment Slant Edit/Attributes/Recolor Edit/Attributes/Rename Edit/Visibility Edit/Visibility/Hide Selection Edit/Visibility/By Item Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

10 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Top Table of : Maxwell 2D Object Menu Object Commands Objects Open Objects Closed Objects Simple Closed Objects Complex Closed Objects Entering Points from the Keyboard Picking Points in Several Subwindows Overlapping Objects Self-Intersecting Objects Modeling Thin Objects Importing Complex Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Scaling Text Generating Screen Captures Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Circle/2 Point Object/Circle/3 Point Object/Spiral Object/Spiral/Rectangular Square Corners Rounded Corners Mitered Corners Object/Spiral/Circular About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

11 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Table of : Maxwell 2D Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

12 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Table of : Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window Commands Windows Selecting the Active Project Window Moving and Resizing Windows Using the Mouse Entering Points With the Keyboard Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Tile/Subwindows Window/Tile/Projects Window/Tile/All Window/Cascade Window/Cascade/Subwindows Window/Cascade/Projects Window/Cascade/All Window/Change View Window/Change View/Zoom In Window/Change View/Zoom Out Window/Change View/Fit All Window/Change View/Fit Selection Window/Change View/Fit Drawing Window/Coordinate System Window/Coordinate System/Shift Window/Coordinate System/Rotate Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge Window/Coordinate System/Reset Window/Grid Default Grid Settings Inappropriate Grid Spacing Invisible Grid Points Window/Fill Solids Window/Wire Frame Copyright Ansoft Corporation

13 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Table of : Maxwell 2D Help Menu Help Menu Commands Help/About Help Help/On Context Help/On Module Help/On Maxwell 2D Help/ Help/ Help/Shortcuts Help/Shortcuts/Hotkeys Help/Shortcuts/Tool Bar Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

14 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Table of : Maxwell 2D Group Objects Grouping Objects Ungrouping Objects Selecting Objects Deselecting Objects Exiting Group Objects Effects of Grouping Assigning Materials Assigning Boundaries or Sources Setting up Executive Parameters Computing Matrices Computing Forces and Torques Current Distribution in Grouped Objects Current Distribution in Magnetostatic Simulations Current Distribution in Eddy Current Simulations Things to Consider Adjacent Conductors Parallel Sources and Grouped Objects Objects that Appear Differently in Different Cross Sections Grouping Ground Conductors Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

15 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. More Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Table of : Maxwell 2D Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database Global Material Database Local Material Database Inheritance Functional and Vector Material Properties View Window Changing the View of the Geometric Model Zoom In Zoom Out Fit All Fit Drawing Fill Solids Wire Frame Window Commands Window/Measure Window/Grid Window/SnapTo Mode Adding Materials to the Database Deriving New Materials Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Object Orientation Display Excluded Objects Excluding Objects Including Objects Automatically Excluded Objects (DC Conduction) Changing Material Attributes Copyright Ansoft Corporation

16 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. More Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Table of : Maxwell 2D Deleting Materials Deleting Derived Materials Underiving and Rederiving Materials Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Radial Vector Functions Tangential Vector Functions Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Anisotropic Permittivity Tensor Anisotropic Conductivity Tensor (AC Conduction and Eddy Axial) Anisotropic Permeability Tensor (Eddy Axial Only) Anisotropic Imaginary Relative Permeability Tensor Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Anisotropic Permeability Tensor Anisotropic Imaginary Relative Permeability Tensor (Eddy Current Only) Anisotropic Permittivity Tensor (Eddy Current Only) Anisotropic Conductivity Tensor (Eddy Current Only) Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Functionally Defined, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Materials Entering a BH-Curve Copyright Ansoft Corporation

17 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Table of : Maxwell 2D Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Points to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Permanent Magnets In Air Demagnetization In Device Demagnetization Other Device Considerations Functional Material Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material Properties Magnetostatic Properties Electrostatic Properties Functions Modifying a Function Deleting a Function Transient Function Variables Vector Functions Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

18 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Table of : Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Modifying Boundaries and Sources Deleting Boundaries and Sources Exiting Setup Boundaries/Sources Boundaries and Sources Boundary Conditions Sources Required Electromagnetic Sources References for Electric or Magnetic Potential Functional Boundaries and Sources Modeling External Fields Using Symmetry Boundaries and Sources in Axisymmetric Models Outside Boundaries Value Boundaries in Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Problems Axisymmetric External Fields Symmetry Boundaries Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

19 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Table of : Maxwell 2D Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Charges on Conductors (Floating Conductors) Charges on Dielectrics Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Winding Setup Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Copyright Ansoft Corporation

20 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Top About Help Table of : Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Available Parameters Force Viewing the Force Solution Core Loss Computing Core Loss Matrix Specifying a Return Path for Current Specifying Signal and Ground Lines Viewing the Matrix Solution Torque Viewing the Torque Solution Flux Lines Viewing Information about Flux Lines Viewing the Flux Linkage Solution Current Flow Viewing the Current Flow Solution Post Processor Macros Executing Macros Defining Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Removing Matrix Entries Tailoring a Parametric Problem Define Model Setup Materials Setup Boundaries/Sources Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

21 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Table of : Maxwell 2D Setup Solution Options Meshing Need for a Fine Mesh General Procedure Starting Mesh Initial Mesh Current Mesh Manual Mesh Solver Residual Solver Choice Frequency Solve For Fields and Parameters Transient Solution Options Transient Models Adaptive Analysis Percent Refinement Per Pass Stopping Criterion Number of Requested Passes Percent Error Suggested Values Use Control Program Activating a Control Program Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

22 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Top About Help Table of : Maxwell 2D Manual Mesh Refinement Meshmaker Commands Tool Bar General Procedure Mesh Refinement Undoing a Refinement Mesh Menu Mesh/Seed Mesh/Seed/Surface Mesh/Seed/Object Mesh/Seed/Skin Mesh/Seed/QuadTree Mesh/Seed/Delete Mesh/Seed/SaveSeed Mesh Seeding for Parametric Sweeps Deleting Mesh Seeding Operations Mesh/Make Triangle Aspect Ratios Mesh/Line Match Point Placement Mesh/Delete Mesh/Display Mesh/Information Refine Menu Refine/Point Refine/Area Aborting an Area Refinement Refine/Object Object Information Refine Area and Refine Number Aborting an Object Refinement Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

23 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Table of : Maxwell 2D EMpulse Transient Excitation Transient Motion Motion Attributes Units of Motion Motion Setup General Procedure Mechanical Setup Functional Mechanical Values Deleting Symbols Functional Parameter Values Source Variables Winding Variables Solid Conductor Variables Mechanical Transient Variables Magnetization and Value Boundary Variables Modifying the Motion Setup Rotational Motion Translational Motion View Window Changing the View of the Geometric Model Zoom In Zoom Out Fit All Fit Drawing Fill Solids Wire Frame Window Commands Window/Measure Window/Grid Window/SnapTo Mode Modifying the Motion Status Setup Exiting the Motion Setup Copyright Ansoft Corporation

24 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. More Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Table of : Maxwell 2D Solve Generating Solutions Completing the Solution Process Monitoring the Solution Process Aborting the Solution Process Stopping and Restarting the Solution Process Refreshing the Plot Viewing the Geometric Model Viewing Executive Parameter Solutions Solutions/Matrix Viewing a Matrix Distributed Maxwell Lumped Maxwell Distributed SPICE Lumped SPICE Coupling Coefficient Operations Export Set Units Matrix Norm Solutions/Force/Torque Force Torque Solutions/Flux Lines Solutions/Flux Linkage Modifying Turns and Depth Operations Export Set Units Solutions/Current Flow Solutions/Core Loss Solutions/Number Registers Solutions/Transient Data Copyright Ansoft Corporation

25 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Top About Help Table of : Maxwell 2D Show Coords Settings Viewing Convergence Data Number of Passes Convergence Criteria Frequency Convergence Data Convergence Display Viewing Profile Data Command/Info Real Time and CPU Time Memory Size Number of Elements Solving a Problem with Variables Solve/Nominal Problem Solve/Variables Solution Process Aborting a Solution Errors in Parametric Solutions Displaying Solution Information Variables Model Nominal Geometry Parametric Geometry Solutions Nominal Solutions Parametric Solutions Convergence Nominal Convergence Parametric Convergence Profile General Profile Statistics Parametric Profile Statistics Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

26 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Top Table of : Maxwell 2D Global Menu Global Commands Global Settings Displaying Objects Mouse Behavior Units Zoom, Fill, and Set Executing Commands Global/Display Object Lists Display Object(s) Fill View Displaying Objects Adjusting the View Global/Recolor Recolor Object(s) New Color(s) Changing the Color of Selected Objects Global/Refresh Global/Defaults Units Grids 2D Grid Division Mouse Grid Spacing Mouse Object Snap Grid Snap Keyboard Entry Setting Defaults About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

27 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Top Table of : Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window Commands Windows and Subwindows Post Processor Windows Active Subwindow Manipulating Windows Field of View Resizing and Repositioning Windows Window/Setup Window/Setup/Settings Theta and Phi Show Axis Show Grid Show Octant Only Show Key Show Section Key Window/Setup/Full Screen Window/Setup/Quad Screen Window/Setup/Quad All Window/Setup/On-Off Window/Zoom Window/UnZoom Window/Shift Window/Magnify Window/Refresh Window/Measure Level of Precision About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

28 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. More Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Table of : Maxwell 2D Post Menu Post Commands Plotting Solutions Line Segments Plotting Common Field Quantities Plotting Derived Field Quantities Plotting Derived Quantities Along a Line Analyzing Saturation Levels in Nonlinear Materials Aborting Plots Post/Plot Values Electrostatic Field Quantities AC and DC Conduction Field Quantities Magnetostatic, Transient, and Eddy Current Field Quantities Eddy Axial Field Quantities Type of Plot Arrow Plot Shaded Plot Contour Plot Graph (Line Plots) Adjusting a Line Graph s Display Zoom In Zoom Out Fit All Show Coordinates Save As Location of Plot Plane Line Window Color Better Hardcopy Phase Post/Line Copyright Ansoft Corporation

29 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Top Table of : Maxwell 2D General Procedure Post/Line/Define Defining Line Segments Straight Line Segments Arcs Object Edges Modifying Previously Defined Line Segments Displaying Line Segments Deleting Line Segments Post/Line/Entry Post/Line/Display Post/Line/Plot Post/Line/Value Post/Plane General Procedure Scale to Window or Scale to Problem Post/Plane/Contour Post/Plane/Contour Display Post/Plane/Shade Post/Plane/Arrow Post/Plane/Arrow Region Post/Plane/Arrow Display Post/Plane/Max-Min Post/Plane/Value Post/BH-Examine Things to Consider Post/BH Plot Plot Options Viewing Nonlinear Permanent Magnet Curves About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

30 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. More Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Table of : Maxwell 2D Calc Menu Calc Commands Calculators Number Calculator Line Calculator Plane Calculator Plotting Plotting Over a Plane Plotting Along a Line Direct Plotting Reading and Writing Registers Calculator Commands Displaying Other Calculators Calc/Plane Material Loading Field Data Magnetostatic and Transient Field Quantities Electrostatic Field Quantities Eddy Current Field Quantities DC Conduction Field Quantities AC Conduction Field Quantities Eddy Axial Field Quantities Register Operations Scalar Operations Vector Operations Transient Operations General Operations Phase Plotting the of the Top Plane Register Calc/Plane/Export Calc/Plane/Decompose Calc/Number Register Operations Copyright Ansoft Corporation

31 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Table of : Maxwell 2D Scalar Operations Vector Operations General Operations Phase Calc/Line Creating Line Registers Register Operations Scalar Operations Vector Operations General Operations Phase Displaying the Field in the Top Line Register Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

32 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Table of : Maxwell 2D Introduction to Parametric Analysis Nominal and Parametric Models Nominal Model Parametric Model Accessing the Parametrics Analysis Module General Procedure Create the Model Set Up Solutions Field and Nominal Solutions Setup the Parametric Solution Generate Solutions Post Processing Batch Processing Batch Mode for Workstations (UNIX) Errors in Parametric Solutions Batch Mode for Personal Computers Batch Processing for Windows Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

33 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. More Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Table of : Maxwell 2D Technical Notes Modules and Solvers Electrostatic Field Simulation Theory Capacitance Capacitance in Terms of Charges and Voltages Capacitance in Terms of Currents and Time Varying Voltages Computing Capacitance Virtual Forces (Electrostatic) Virtual Torques (Electrostatic) Flux Linkage (Electrostatic) Magnetostatic Field Simulation Theory Inductance Inductance in Terms of Flux Linkage and Currents Inductance in Terms of Voltages and Time Varying Currents Computing an Inductance Matrix Virtual Forces (Magnetostatic) Virtual Torques (Magnetostatic) Flux Linkage (Magnetostatic) Eddy Current Field Simulation Theory Components of Current Density Integrating the Current Density Assumptions Deriving the Eddy Current Equation Maxwell s Equations Relationship of Magnetic and Electric Field Relationship of Current and Current Density Eddy Currents and Skin Depth Impedance Matrix Computing an Impedance Matrix Inductance Resistance Copyright Ansoft Corporation

34 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. More Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Table of : Maxwell 2D Inductance and Resistance in Impedance Computations Virtual Forces (Eddy Current) Virtual Torques (Eddy Current) Current Flow (Eddy Current) Nonlinear Eddy Current Field Simulation Theory Sinusoidal B Sinusoidal H Permeability DC Conduction Field Simulation Theory Steady-state Conditions Relevant Time Constant Conductance Current Flow (DC Conduction) AC Conduction Field Simulation Theory Assumptions Admittance Current Flow Eddy Axial Field Simulation Theory Electromagnetic Sources Assumptions Deriving the Eddy Axial Field Equation Obtaining Maxwell s Equations in Terms of H Obtaining Currents Current Flow (Eddy Axial) Axisymmetric Field Simulation Transient Simulation Assumptions Time-Dependent Magnetic Field Simulation Stranded Conductors Solid Conductors Copyright Ansoft Corporation

35 How to use the table of contents: To see the documentation for a topic, select it from the list. To see a more detailed listing of a topic, select the Expand button beside it. To learn more about the online help system, select About Help. Table of : Maxwell 2D Solid Conductors with Current Sources Solid Conductors with Voltage Sources Translational Motion Rotational Motion Phasor Notation Real and Imaginary Components Top About Help Maxwell Online Help System Copyright Ansoft Corporation

36 Using the Help System The Topics List The Button Commands Links in the Text Document Title Active Regions on Graphics Selecting Text and Graphics The Menu Bar Help Window Functions Maxwell 2D Online Help System Using the Help System Welcome to the Maxwell Online Help System. The following sections discuss the interface of the online help system, and give helpful pointers on using each feature of the system. The Topics List The topics list shows topics that are available from the current document. It also highlights which topics are currently being viewed. As you move through the help system, the list will change to display the most detailed list of topics possible. > To go to the section describing a topic in the list: Click on the topic in the list. As you go further into detail, you may lose track of where you are in the information tree. The first topic in the list will typically have a higher order list of topics, so by repeatedly clicking on the first item you can travel up the tree. You can also use the table of contents to navigate through the manual. The Button Commands Forward & Backward These buttons move you forward and backward by one page in the current document. Every time you click on a hypertext command to jump to a new location, the history of where you ve been is updated. This button takes you back one hypertext jump. Takes you directly to the table of contents for the current document. Links in the Text Links in the text are always blue. You can follow a hypertext link in the text by clicking on it with the mouse button. The link will highlight as you click on it, and the command will be executed when you release the mouse button. If you move the mouse pointer off of the link before you release the button, the command will not be executed. Document Title The document title will help you to keep track of where you are in the help system. Maxwell Online Help System 1 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

37 Using the Help System The Topics List The Button Commands Links in the Text Document Title Active Regions on Graphics Selecting Text and Graphics The Menu Bar Help Window Functions Maxwell 2D Online Help System Active Regions on Graphics Often, a screen capture or other diagram will have active regions. These active regions execute hypertext commands when you click on them. The region will highlight when you click on it, and as you release the button the command will be executed. If you move the mouse pointer off of the link before you release the button, the command will not be executed. By holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse around, you can see where the active regions of a graphic are. Selecting Text and Graphics If you hold down the Control key on your keyboard, the cursor will change to allow you to select text and graphics. > To select document text: 1. Hold down the Control key and click the left mouse button where you wish to begin selecting text. 2. Drag the mouse to the end of the text you wish to select. If you select any text that contains anchored graphics frames, the graphics will become selected as well. The Menu Bar File Edit These commands perform various file operations. Open Open another document for viewing. Print Print the current document. Close Close the current document window. These commands are used on the document text and graphics. Copy Copy the selection to the paste buffer. Copy Special Copy various formats from the selection to the paste buffer, without copying the selection itself. Select All Select every object on the page, or all of the text in the document, depending on what is selected. Find Search the current document for a specific string, or other document feature. Maxwell Online Help System 2 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

38 Using the Help System The Topics List The Button Commands Links in the Text Document Title Active Regions on Graphics Selecting Text and Graphics The Menu Bar Help Window Functions Maxwell 2D Online Help System Navigation Zoom These commands affect which page of the document is displayed in the help window. None of the commands affect the hypertext history except for the command. Go To Page Go to a specific page in the current document. Next Page Go to the next page in the current document. Previous Page Go to the previous page in the current document. First Page Go to the first page in the current document. Last Page Go to the last page in the current document. Undo the last hypertext jump in the history. Document Windows This cascading menu lists all of the documents that are currently open in the viewer. These commands affect the view of the document, and its window. Zoom In Make the view of the current document more detailed. Zoom Out Make the view of the current document less detailed. Fit Page Fit the page size to the current size of the window. Fit Window Fit the size of the window to the current page size. Zoom to 100 Set the magnification to 100%, the default. Maxwell Online Help System 3 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

39 Using the Help System The Topics List The Button Commands Links in the Text Document Title Active Regions on Graphics Selecting Text and Graphics The Menu Bar Help Window Functions Maxwell 2D Online Help System Help Window Functions Once you have accessed the online documentation, you can change the display of the documentation window in the following ways: Page Number Screen Size (Percentage) Screen Size (Step) Page Scroll Scroll Bar Page Number Use this button to choose the page you wish to be on: > To choose a page: 1. Click on the Page Number button. 2. Enter the page you wish to go to. 3. Choose Go. You are taken to the page you specified. Screen Size (Percentage) This button allows you to choose the page you wish to be on. Choose this button to change the size of the documentation window by selecting a percentage size. Choose one of the Z buttons to shrink or expand the documentation window by one step. Choose these arrow page buttons to scroll the documentation up or down by one page. Use the scroll bar allows to scroll through the documentation faster than using the page scroll buttons. Use this button to specify the size of the documentation window. > To specify the size of the documentation window: 1. Click on and hold the Percentage button. A list of percentage sizes appears. 2. Choose the percentage size you refer for the documentation window. 3. Choose Fit Window to Page to fit a border to the documentation window. You can set the steps of the percentage by choosing Set at the bottom of the percentage list. Maxwell Online Help System 4 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

40 Using the Help System The Topics List The Button Commands Links in the Text Document Title Active Regions on Graphics Selecting Text and Graphics The Menu Bar Help Window Functions Maxwell 2D Online Help System Screen Size (Step) These buttons increase or decrease the size of the documentation window by steps. Each step represents a percentage of the normal (100%) size of the page. Use the Percentage button to view or change the steps. > To increase the size of the documentation window: Click on the large Z button. The page increases in size by one step. Use the Percentage button to resize the window to fit the expanded page. > To decrease the size of the documentation window: Click on the small z button. The page decreases in size by one step. Use the Percentage button to resize the window to fit the expanded page. Page Scroll Use these to scroll through the online documentation one page at a time. > To page through the online documentation: Click on the page arrow buttons. You are taken one page forward or backward in the documentation. Scroll Bar Use the scroll bar to scroll through the online documentation quickly. > To scroll through the current document: 1. Click and hold the scroll bar. 2. Move the scroll bar to the section you wish to view in the document. The online documentation displays the text you wish to see. Maxwell Online Help System 5 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

41 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D is an interactive software package for analyzing electric and magnetic fields in structures with uniform cross-sections or full rotational symmetry where the field patterns in the entire device can be analyzed by modeling the field patterns in its cross-section. More Depending on which simulator packages you selected, you can: Compute the following field quantities: Static electric fields, forces, torques, and capacitances due to voltage distributions, permanently polarized materials, and charges. Static magnetic fields, forces, torques, and inductances due to DC currents, static external magnetic fields, and permanent magnets. Fields can be simulated in structures that contain linear and nonlinear materials. Time-varying magnetic fields, forces, torques, and impedances due to AC currents and oscillating external magnetic fields. Time-varying axial electric fields, displacement currents, and conduction currents. Maxwell Online Help System 6 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

42 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction DC conduction currents, forces, torques, and conductances due to DC voltage distributions. AC conduction currents, forces, torques, and admittances due to AC voltage distributions. Thermal solutions. If transient motion capability was purchased, perform time-stepping analyses for the motion of objects in the model. If parametric analysis capability was purchased, perform variational analyses of designs by varying solution frequencies, model dimensions, material properties, excitations, and so forth. The software s generalized, finite-element based field solvers allow you to simulate electric and magnetic fields in any type of device from cross-sections of motors and transformers to integrated circuit packages. You must draw the structure and specify relevant material characteristics, boundary conditions describing field behavior, sources of charge, current or voltage, and quantities that you want to compute (such as forces and torques). The simulator generates field solutions and computes the requested quantities. You can view and analyze the fields in the device using the software s post-processing features. Maxwell Online Help System 7 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

43 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel The Maxwell Control Panel (shown below) acts as a front end to all Maxwell software products including Maxwell 2D. Through the Projects command, it enables you to create projects (which are used to store all the files relating to a specific structure that is being modeled) and access Maxwell 2D. It also handles functions that are common to all Maxwell software packages, such as setting screen colors, printing screen captures, and translating files. In addition, you can access the following software modules from the Maxwell Control Panel: The Project Manager, which accesses other Ansoft software packages that you may have purchased (such as Maxwell 3D) and allows you to create new projects. The Translation Manager. This allows you to convert different model types into new file formats. The Print Manager. This defines the printer settings. (UNIX only.) The Process Manager. This allows you to set a time at which to solve your project. The Utilities Panel which accesses: The 2D Modeler. This allows you to create 2D geometric models representing cross-sections of structures. These 2D models can then be read directly into the Maxwell 2D. The 2D Modeler is also available in Maxwell 2D. The Color Manager. This is used to define the default colors in the software. PlotData. This allows you to generate plots of equations and experimental data. The Expression Evaluator. This allows you to evaluate algebraic expressions. The Material Manager. This allows you to define new materials to use in the model. Maxwell Online Help System 8 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

44 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Maxwell 2D is sold as a stand-alone product, and is also distributed with Maxwell 3D. Though they perform similar functions, the two packages are used to model different types of structures. Use Maxwell 2D to analyze electric and magnetic fields in devices with uniform crosssections or full rotational symmetry where a structure s 3D field patterns can be accurately modeled by simulating the fields in its cross-section. Such structures can be analyzed more quickly and easily in Maxwell 2D than in Maxwell 3D. Use Maxwell 3D to analyze electric and magnetic fields in 3D structures that do not have uniform cross-sections or complete rotational symmetry. These types of structures require full three-dimensional field simulation, since the behavior of the electric or magnetic field in the entire device cannot be extrapolated from the behavior of the field in its cross-section. The following field quantities may be computed for Maxwell 3D models: DC magnetic fields including fields in structures that contain nonlinear materials. DC electric fields and voltage distributions. AC magnetic fields and eddy currents. Depending on which 3D field solver you selected, forces, torques, capacitance, inductance, and impedance may also be computed. Maxwell 2D geometry files can be saved in the file format used in the 3D modeler, or translated into 3D format via the Maxwell Control Panel Translators command. They can then be read into Maxwell 3D and used to create 3D models. In addition, BH-curves for nonlinear materials have the same format for both software packages. Maxwell Online Help System 9 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

45 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction Time-stepping Solutions If you purchased EMpulse, Maxwell 2D s time-stepping solver, you have the ability to perform motion analysis in the model. This module is an add-on package that allows you to move an object or group of objects either rotationally or translationally through the model without having to model each individual placement of the objects across several different models. When creating the 2D model, specify one or more of the following types of objects for motion: Stationary objects do not move in the analysis. Band objects are those in which the actual motion occurs. The mesh outside the band object remains constant throughout the analysis while the mesh is constantly regenerated within the band for each new position during the time-stepping sequence. No motion can take place outside a band object. Moving objects are those whose motion is defined as rotational or translational. Rotational objects rotate about a fixed point, while translational objects slide across the model within the band object. All moving objects must reside within a band object. During the transient solution, EMpulse slides or rotates the moving object and analyses the source and data values at each time step. Maxwell Online Help System 10 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

46 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module If you purchased the Maxwell 2D s Parametric Analysis module, you have the ability to perform variational analysis of your designs. This module is an add-on package that allows you to simulate design variations using a single Maxwell 2D model, instead of having to explicitly set up and solve a series of models. When creating a 2D model, you identify one or more of the following design parameters that are to be changed during the simulation: Geometric dimensions. Material properties. Boundary and source excitations. Solution frequency. The Parametric Analysis module then sets these design parameters to the values you specify, and computes a solution for each variation. You can then use the module s postprocessing functions to evaluate each variation on your basic design. Maxwell Online Help System 11 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

47 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction Accessing Maxwell 2D > After the Maxwell 2D software is installed as described in the Maxwell Installation Guide, start the software: 1. Open the Maxwell Control Panel. If you are running the software on a workstation, enter the following command at the UNIX prompt in an terminal window: maxwell & If you are running the software on a personal computer, double-click the mouse on the Maxwell Control Panel icon. 2. Choose Projects from the control panel to open the Project Manager window: More 3. Specify your project. For an existing project, move to the directory that contains your Maxwell 2D project and highlight the desired project. Alternatively, choose New to create a new project. Maxwell Online Help System 12 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

48 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction 4. Choose Open. The Maxwell 2D Executive Commands window appears: Note: In general, running any software when you are logged in as root can be dangerous. As Evi Nemeth, Garth Snyder, and Scott Seebass put in their book UNIX System Administration Handbook: Using the root login is like driving an expensive sports car; it gets you where you need to go quickly, but an accident will result in a big repair bill. You should use the root login with great reverence and caution, and never take it out for a spin at a time when you wouldn t trust yourself to operate an automobile or other heavy machinery. Unless you have a specific reason to do so, avoid running the field simulator if you are logged in as root. Maxwell Online Help System 13 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

49 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction General Procedure The general procedure summarized below can be used to create a model of a 2D structure for which you wish to compute electric or magnetic fields. Select solver and drawing type Draw geometric model and (optionally) identify grouped objects Assign material properties Assign boundary conditions and sources Compute other quantities during solution? No Yes Request that force, torque, capacitance, inductance, admittance, impedance, flux linkage, conductance or current flow be computed during the solution process. Set up solution criteria and (optionally) refine the mesh More Generate solution Inspect parameter solutions; view solution information; display plots of fields and manipulate basic field quantities > Follow this general procedure to create and solve models of 2D structures: 1. Select the type of electric or magnetic field solver that you wish to use. Click Maxwell Online Help System 14 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

50 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Batch Processing More Maxwell 2D Introduction on the button next to Solver to view a menu of available field solvers, then select the desired solver. Depending on the Maxwell 2D package that you ve purchased, different electric or magnetic field solvers may be available. If you choose the Thermal solver, a new command becomes active in the Draw Model menu. 2. Select the type of model to be created. Choose Drawing. A menu appears. Choose XY Plane to create a cartesian model where the 2D model represents the xy cross-section of a structure that extends infinitely long in the z-direction. Choose RZ Plane to create an axisymmetric model where the 2D model represents a cross-section that s revolved around an axis of symmetry. 3. Create the geometric model of the structure. Choose Define Model, and from the menu that appears: Choose Draw Model to create (or modify) the individual objects that make up the 2D cross section of the device for which fields are to be computed. If you selected the Thermal solver, you may choose Couple Model to define the thermal model. Optionally, choose Group Objects to identify objects in your model that are electrically identical. 4. Assign materials to objects in the structure. Choose Setup Materials to specify the material attributes of objects (such as relative permittivity, relative permeability, and so forth). Note: If you purchased the Maxwell 2D parametric analysis package, be aware that some executive commands are accessed differently. 5. Define the desired sources (electromagnetic excitations) and boundary conditions for the model. Choose Setup Boundaries/Sources to describe the behavior of the electric or magnetic field at object interfaces and the edges of the problem region. 6. Compute other quantities of interest during the solution process, such as forces, torques, matrices, or flux linkage. Choose Setup Executive Parameters, and from the menu that appears: Choose Matrix to compute a capacitance, inductance, impedance, admittance or conductance matrix for conductors in the structure. The type of matrix that can be requested depends on the solver you selected. Choose Force to compute the force on selected objects due to the electric or Maxwell Online Help System 15 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

51 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction magnetic field in the structure. Choose Torque to compute the torque on selected objects due to the electric or magnetic field in the structure. Choose Flux Linkage to compute a value for the flux linkage across a line (or lines) you specify. Choose Current Flow to compute the current flow across a line (or lines) you specify. 7. Enter refinement criteria for the various field solvers and to specify whether an adaptive analysis should be performed. Choose Setup Solution Options to enter this information (in most cases, accept the defaults.) To compute electromagnetic fields over a two dimensional space, the Maxwell 2D first creates a finite element mesh that divides the structure into thousands of smaller regions. The field in each sub-region (element) can then be represented with a separate polynomial. In an adaptive analysis, the field simulator automatically refines the field solution in regions where the error is highest. Optionally, you can refine the model s finite element mesh manually to increase the density of the mesh in areas of interest (such as air gaps). This makes the field solution in these areas more accurate. 8. If you have purchased EMpulse, you can define the motion parameters of the objects in the model. Choose Setup Solutions/Motion Setup to describe the motion parameters. 9. Compute the desired field solution and any requested parameters (force, torque, and so forth). Choose Solve to generate the solutions. 10. View the results. After the solutions are computed, do the following: Choose Post Process to display contour, shaded, and arrow plots of the electromagnetic field patterns and to manipulate the corresponding field solutions. If you run a transient solution, you can also choose this to display any motion results. Mathematical operations allow you to compute any quantity of interest that can be derived from the basic electromagnetic fields. Choose Solutions at the top of the Executive Commands window to view the final results from any force, torque, flux linkage, current flow, or matrix computation. In general, these commands must be chosen in the sequence listed. For example, the Setup Materials command is operable only after the Define Model/Draw Model command has been used to draw the structure s geometry. Commands that cannot be accessed are greyed out. Maxwell Online Help System 16 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

52 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Executive Commands Menu Solution Monitoring Display Area Changing the View of the Geometric Model Changing the View of Transient Solutions Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction Executive Commands Window The main areas on the Maxwell 2D Executive Commands window are as follow: Executive Commands menu. Solution Monitoring area. Display area. The Executive Commands menu is shown below with a check mark beside each command that has already been completed. Executive Commands menu Completed Commands Display area (geometric model) Executive Commands Menu Solution monitoring area This area contains the executive commands for Maxwell 2D. There is a general procedure that gives a brief description of each command. Each command has at least one chapter of this online guide devoted to it. Maxwell Online Help System 17 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

53 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Executive Commands Menu Solution Monitoring Display Area Changing the View of the Geometric Model Changing the View of Transient Solutions Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction Solution Monitoring During Maxwell 2D s solution process, system messages are displayed in the area labeled Solution Monitoring. Display Area The display area initially shows the geometric model. After a field or parameter solution has been generated, it can also display information associated with the solution. Four buttons appear at the top of the display area: Variables (Parametrics package only.) Displays the parametric solutions. Model Displays the geometric model of the 2D structure. Solutions Displays the final results of any force, torque, matrix, current flow, or flux linkage computation requested via the Setup Executive Parameters command. Convergence Displays criteria, such as total system energy, power loss, and energy error, that allow you to verify whether a field solution has converged. Convergence information can be displayed graphically or in a table. Profile Displays a profile of CPU and memory usage associated with each solution process. Maxwell Online Help System 18 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

54 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Executive Commands Menu Solution Monitoring Display Area Changing the View of the Geometric Model Changing the View of Transient Solutions Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction Changing the View of the Geometric Model Use the commands that appear beneath the model to change your view of it. To zoom in on a section of the geometric model: 1. Choose Zoom In. 2. Select a point at one corner of the region to be zoomed in on. To do so, move the cursor to the desired point and click the left mouse button. 3. Click the left mouse button on the point in the diagonal corner of the desired region. The system then expands the portion of the structure in the selected region to fill the viewing window. This command works in the same way as the 2D Modeler Window/Change View/Zoom In command. To zoom out of a section of the geometric model: 1. Choose Zoom Out. 2. Select a point at one corner of the region that is to be zoomed out. To do so, move the cursor to the desired point and click the left mouse button. 3. Click the left mouse button on a point in the diagonal corner of the desired region. The system then redraws the screen and shrinks the model to fit in the selected region. This command works in the same way as the 2D Modeler Window/ Change View/Zoom Out command. Choose Fit All to view the entire geometric model in the display area. The Maxwell 2D automatically adjusts the field of view, making all objects as large as possible while keeping the entire structure visible. This command works in the same way as the 2D Modeler Window/Change View/Fit All command. Choose Fit Drawing to display the entire drawing region. The drawing region is defined using the command Model/Drawing Size. This command works in the same way as the 2D Modeler Window/Change View/Fit Drawing command. Choose Fill Solids to display closed geometric objects as filled-in solids. By default, only the outlines of object borders are displayed. Choosing Fill Solids for complex geometries allows you to better visualize the relationships between each object in the model. When you choose Fill Solids, its button toggles to Wire Frame. Choose Wire Frame to switch back to a wire frame view of the geometric model. These commands work in the same way as the 2D Modeler Window/Change View/Fill Solids and Window/Change View/Wire Frame commands. Maxwell Online Help System 19 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

55 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Executive Commands Menu Solution Monitoring Display Area Changing the View of the Geometric Model Changing the View of Transient Solutions Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction Changing the View of Transient Solutions Use the commands that appear beneath the transient solution plots to change your view of it. Zooming In > To zoom in on a section of the geometric model: 1. Choose View/Zoom In. 2. Select a point at one corner of the region to be zoomed in on. To do so, move the cursor to the desired point and click the left mouse button. 3. Click the left mouse button on the point in the diagonal corner of the desired region. The system then expands the plot of the structure in the selected region to fill the viewing window. Zooming Out > To zoom out of a section of the geometric model: 1. Choose View/Zoom Out. 2. Select a point at one corner of the region that is to be zoomed out. To do so, move the cursor to the desired point and click the left mouse button. 3. Click the left mouse button on a point in the diagonal corner of the desired region. The system then redraws the screen and shrinks the plot to fit in the selected region. Viewing the Entire Plot Choose View/Fit All to view the entire geometric plot in the display area. Maxwell 2D automatically adjusts the field of view, making all axes as large as possible while keeping the entire plot visible. Maxwell Online Help System 20 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

56 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Executive Commands Menu Solution Monitoring Display Area Changing the View of the Geometric Model Changing the View of Transient Solutions Batch Processing Maxwell 2D Introduction Displaying Plot Coordinates Once a plot has been displayed, choose Show Coords to display the coordinates of a selected point. > To view the x- and y-coordinates of points on the plot: 1. Plot the desired data. To get a closer view of a graph to more accurately determine its coordinates, use the View/Zoom In command to zoom into that part of the plot. 2. Choose Show Coords. 3. Move the mouse to the desired point on the plot. 4. Click the left mouse button. A window appears showing the coordinates of the selected point. The point is marked with a cross. 5. To view the coordinates of additional points, repeat steps 3 and Click the right mouse button to exit the command. Formatting Transient Plot Axes Choose Settings/Format Axes to define the plot axes of the transient solution. This command functions identically to PlotData s Plot/Format Axes command. Formatting Transient Plot Graphs Choose Settings/Format Graphs to define the display of the transient solution plots. This command functions identically to PlotData s Plot/Format Graphs command. Maxwell Online Help System 21 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

57 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Batch Processing Licensing and Non- Graphical Interfaces Batch Mode for Workstations (UNIX) Batch Log File Batch Script File Batch Mode for Personal Computers (Microsoft Windows) Batch Log File Maxwell 2D Introduction Batch Processing As an alternative to running Maxwell 2D through the Maxwell Control Panel, use the software s batch processing features to generate field solutions for your 2D models. You will still need to follow the general procedures described below for each model in order for batch mode to work properly: Select the type of field to be computed. Create the geometric model. Define material characteristics. Set up boundaries. Request forces, torques, and other quantities of interest. Enter the desired solution parameters. Batch mode operates differently on workstations and Windows personal computers. You can also use batch mode when you are doing Parametric Analysis of a 2D structure. For a complete list of batch processing flags, consult the License Manager on the Non-Graphical Interface. Licensing and Non-Graphical Interfaces If you have not installed the Graphical User Interface (GUI) license for Maxwell 2D, you may still generate solutions using the batch mode from the command line. To generate a solution non-graphically, add the -ng flag just before the -batch flag in the command. This will allow you to generate a solution without the need for checking out a GUI license. Maxwell Online Help System 22 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

58 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Batch Processing Licensing and Non-Graphical Interfaces Batch Mode for Workstations (UNIX) Batch Log File Batch Script File Batch Mode for Personal Computers (Microsoft Windows) Batch Log File Maxwell 2D Introduction Batch Mode for Workstations (UNIX) To run the software in batch mode on a workstation, enter the following at the UNIX prompt: m2dfs -batch projectname where projectname is the name and directory path of the Maxwell 2D project that you wish to solve. Note that adding the.pjt extension to the project name is optional the software automatically looks for the directory projectname.pjt when solving a project in batch mode. Batch Log File When you first run a batch job, the system creates a file named batch.log. This file will be created in your home directory. Log entries for subsequent batch jobs are appended to the end of this file. The batch.log file lists information about each batch job, including: The time that the batch job starts. The name and directory path of the project that's being solved. Whether or not the solution is completed successfully. Any error messages that are generated during the solution. If your batch job does not successfully solve the requested problems, examine this file to see what caused the job to fail. Batch Script File To run multiple batch jobs, it is recommended that you create a UNIX script file. For instance, to generate solutions in batch mode for the projects solen and connect (both in the directory ~/2dpjt), create the following script file using any UNIX text editor: m2dfs -batch ~/2dpjt/solen; m2dfs -batch ~/2dpjt/connect; When run, this script file generates solutions for each batch job sequentially, which uses CPU time and memory more efficiently than running them simultaneously. Maxwell Online Help System 23 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

59 Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D and Maxwell Control Panel Maxwell 2D and Maxwell 3D Time-stepping Solutions Maxwell 2D Parametric Analysis Module Accessing Maxwell 2D General Procedure Executive Commands Window Batch Processing Licensing and Non-Graphical Interfaces Batch Mode for Workstations (UNIX) Batch Log File Batch Script File Batch Mode for Personal Computers (Microsoft Windows) Batch Log File Maxwell 2D Introduction Batch Mode for Personal Computers (Microsoft Windows) To generate a solution using the Windows command shell, enter the following at the command prompt: path\m2dfs -batch option projectname where: path is the drive and directory path where the Maxwell 2D executables are installed (for example, c:\win32app\maxwell). projectname is the drive, directory path and name of the Maxwell 2D project that you wish to solve. To generate solutions for multiple projects, create a batch file that can be run in the Windows command shell. Batch Log File When you first run a project in batch mode, the system creates a file named batch.log. If you have an account on your Windows machine, the variables HOMEDRIVE and HOME- PATH are set up, and the file will be stored in your home directory (you will need to set up these variables by hand in Windows). If the variables are not set up, the file will be stored in the Windows directory. A separate batch.log file is created for each project that s solved as a batch job. If you solve the project in batch mode again, new log entries are appended onto the end of this file. The batch.log file lists information about the batch job, including: The time that the batch job starts. The name and directory path of the project that's being solved. Whether or not the solution is completed successfully. Any error messages that are generated during the solution. If your batch job does not successfully solve the requested problems, examine this file to see what caused it to fail. Maxwell Online Help System 24 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

60 Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Maxwell 2D Solvers Solver Use the Solver command to select the field solver you want to use to simulate the electric or magnetic fields in the device being modeled. > To select a solver: 1. Choose Solver from the Executive Commands window. (The currently selected field solver is listed there.) A menu with the following choices appears: Electrostatic Magnetostatic Eddy Current DC Conduction Thermal AC Conduction Eddy Axial Transient Note: The specific solvers that are available depend on which Maxwell 2D package you purchased. Solvers for packages that you have not purchased or have not yet entered an authorization codeword for cannot be selected and are grayed out on the menu. See the Maxwell Installation Guide for instructions on entering codewords for the various solver packages. 2. Select the desired solver from the menu. The solver name appears next to Solver. Maxwell Online Help System 25 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

61 Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Maxwell 2D Solvers Modifying the Solver Type Occasionally, you may want to change the electric or magnetic field solver used to compute fields in a model. If you change the solver after specifying materials, defining sources and boundaries, setting up executive parameters, or computing a solution, the following message appears: If you change the type of the solver, all problem setups will become invalid and all solutions will be deleted. Do one of the following: Choose OK to change the solver type. Choose Cancel to cancel the change. Although the model retains material information and any boundary conditions or executive parameters that apply to the new solver type, all solutions are deleted and its setup becomes invalid. You must access Setup Materials, Setup Boundaries/Sources, and Setup Executive Parameters again to set up a valid problem with the new solver. Maxwell Online Help System 26 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

62 Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Maxwell 2D Solvers Maxwell 2D Software Packages The field solvers that are available to simulate the electric or magnetic fields in a structure depend on which Maxwell 2D package you purchased. Currently available packages are: Electric Fields DC Magnetics AC Magnetics EMpulse Thermal Complete (includes all solvers) Parametric Analysis (can come with any of the solver packages listed above) These packages are available for both the Windows and workstation versions of the software. The field solvers associated with each package are summarized below: Package Solvers Field Quantity Computed Electric Fields Electrostatic φ (DC electric potential) E, D AC Conduction φ(jωt) (AC electric potential) DC Conduction φ (DC electric potential) DC Magnetics Magnetostatic A Z or A φ (DC magnetic potential) AC Magnetics Eddy Current A Z (jωt) or A φ (jωt) (AC magnetic potential), φ(jωt) (AC electric potential) Derived Field Quantities E(jωt), D(jωt), J(jωt) E, J H, B H(jωt), B(jωt), J(jωt) Eddy Axial H Z (jωt) (AC magnetic field) E(jωt), D(jωt), J(jωt) EMpulse Transient A Z (t) H(t), B(t), J(t) Thermal Solver Thermal T (temperature) none. Complete All of the above All of the above All of the above Parametric Analysis Any of the above Any of the above Any of the above Maxwell Online Help System 27 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

63 Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Maxwell 2D Solvers Electric Fields The Electric Fields package allows you to simulate static electric fields, and steady-state (DC) and time-varying (AC) conduction currents. It includes the following field solvers: Electrostatic DC Conduction AC Conduction Electrostatic Field Solver The electrostatic field solver computes static electric fields arising from potential differences and charge distributions. Use it to model potential distributions, electric fields, stored energy, capacitance, forces, torques, and electric flux linkage. (For instance, the potential field around the capacitor shown below was computed using the electrostatic field solver.) In addition, any quantity that can be derived from the basic electric field quantities can be analyzed. File Global Window Show Post Calc Voltage e e e e e e e e e e e+00 Maxwell 2D Post Processor Ver Mouse Mode Object Yes Grid Yes Keyboard No Maximums x e+01 y e+01 Minimums x e+01 y e+01 Mouse Position u v Units mm Mouse Left MENU PICK Mouse Right More y x 3 Reading Points Reading Triangles Converting Data Done The electrostatic field solver assumes that no current is flowing in any material (that is, all charges are static). Depending on whether you are creating a cartesian (XY) or axisym- Maxwell Online Help System 28 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

64 Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Maxwell 2D Solvers metric (RZ) model, it also assumes that: In cartesian problems where the geometry represents an xy cross-section of a device that s infinitely long the electric field lies entirely in the xy-plane being modeled. There is no component of the electric field in the z-direction. In axisymmetric problems where the geometry represents a cross-section of a device that s swept around an axis of rotational symmetry the electric field is symmetric about the axis. The electric field in the RZ cross-section being modeled is exactly the same as the field in any other cross-section. There is no component of E in the φ-direction. This rotational symmetry reduces a three-dimensional problem to a two-dimensional one without making any assumptions about end effects. You are expected to specify material properties, and any charge densities, net charges, surface charges, or potentials on objects. The electrostatic field solver then computes the electric potential, φ, for the model. From the electric potential, it derives the electric field, E, and the electric flux density, D. Maxwell Online Help System 29 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

65 Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Maxwell 2D Solvers DC Conduction Field Solver The DC conduction field solver allows you to analyze conduction currents due to steadystate electric fields in conductors and lossy dielectrics. Use it to analyze current distributions, electric field distributions and potential differences, conductances, and ohmic losses in lossy materials. For instance, the current flow in the structure below was computed using the DC conduction field solver. In addition, any quantity that can be derived from the basic electric field quantities can be analyzed. The DC conduction field solver assumes that the current flow in a conducting material has already reached steady-state condition. Depending on whether you are creating a cartesian (XY) or axisymmetric (RZ) model, it also assumes that: In cartesian problems, the current flows entirely within the xy-plane being modeled. There is no z-component of current. In axisymmetric problems, current flow is symmetric to the axis of rotational symmetry. Current flow in the rz cross-section being modeled is exactly the same as the current flow in any other rz cross-section of the structure. There is no φ-component of current. You are expected to specify material properties and the electric potential at one or more object interfaces or boundaries in the model. The DC conduction field solver then computes the electric potential, φ, for the model. From the electric potential, it derives the electric field, E, and the current density, J. Maxwell Online Help System 30 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

66 Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Maxwell 2D Solvers Thermal Field Solver The thermal field solver allows you to generate a temperature solution for the model based on the electromagnetic fields running through the system. Use it to analyze the temperature distribution of a model. This is particularly useful in determining which objects in a model are more susceptible to thermal effects. Maxwell Online Help System 31 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

67 Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Maxwell 2D Solvers AC Conduction Field Solver The AC conduction field solver allows you to analyze conduction currents due to timevarying electric fields in conductors and lossy dielectrics. Use it to analyze current distributions, electric field distributions and potential differences, admittances, lossy materials, and stored energy. For instance, the admittance matrix associated with the structure shown below can be computed using the AC conduction field solver. In addition, any quantity that can be derived from the basic electromagnetic quantities can be analyzed. The AC conduction field solver can only compute conduction currents for cartesian (XY) models. It assumes that all sources are sinusoids oscillating at the same frequency. Optionally, you may specify different phase angles for different sources. You are expected to specify material properties and the electric potential at one or more object interfaces or boundaries in the model. The AC conduction field solver then computes the electric potential, φ(t), for the model. From the electric potential, it derives the electric field, E(t), the electric flux density, D(t), and the current density, J(t). More Maxwell Online Help System 32 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

68 Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Maxwell 2D Solvers DC Magnetic Fields The DC Magnetic Fields package allows you to analyze static magnetic fields in structures that contain both linear and nonlinear magnetic materials. It consists of the Magnetostatic field solver, which is described below. Magnetostatic Field Solver The magnetostatic field solver lets you compute static magnetic fields arising from DC currents and other sources like permanent magnets and external magnetic fields. Magnetic fields in both linear and nonlinear materials (that is, materials whose relative permeability is given by a B vs. H curve) can be simulated. Use it to view lines of magnetic flux and compute quantities like inductance, stored energy, forces, and torques. For instance, the magnetostatic field solver was used to simulate the magnetic flux and compute torque for the motor shown below. In addition, any quantity that can be derived from the basic magnetic field quantities can be analyzed. Flux Lines e e e e e e e e e e e-03 2D Post Processor Ver Mouse Mode Object Yes Grid Yes Keyboard No Maximums x e+00 y e+00 Minimums x e+00 y e+00 Mouse Position u v Units inches Mouse Left MENU PICK Mouse Right y x Depending on whether you are creating a cartesian (XY) or axisymmetric (RZ) model, the magnetostatic field solver assumes that: In cartesian problems, all current flows in the z-direction, perpendicular to the crosssection being modeled. The magnetic field lies entirely in the xy-plane, with no z- component. 3 Maxwell Online Help System 33 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

69 Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Maxwell 2D Solvers In axisymmetric problems, all current flows in the φ-direction around the device s axis of rotational symmetry, perpendicular to the cross-section being modeled. The magnetic field is rotationally symmetric to this axis, reducing a three-dimensional problem to a two-dimensional one. There is no φ-component of the magnetic field. You are expected to specify material properties (including BH-curves for non-linear materials), current densities, total currents or surface currents, and other magnetic sources such as permanent magnets and external fields. The magnetostatic field solver then computes the magnetic vector potential, A Z (cartesian models) or A φ (axisymmetric models). The magnetic field, H, and the magnetic flux density, B, are derived from the magnetic vector potential. More Maxwell Online Help System 34 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

70 Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Maxwell 2D Solvers AC Magnetic Fields The AC Magnetic Fields package allows you to simulate the effect of time-varying currents and magnetic fields in structures. It includes the following field solvers: Eddy Current Eddy Axial Eddy Current Field Solver The eddy current field solver allows you to simulate the effects of time-varying currents in parallel-conductor structures. Use it to model eddy currents, skin effects, impedances, ohmic losses, forces and torques, and magnetic flux. In the example illustrated below, for instance, the eddy current solver was used to compute induced eddy currents in the cylinder due to a time-varying magnetic field. In addition, any quantity that can be derived from the basic magnetic field quantities can be analyzed. Flux Lines e e e e e e e e e e e+00 Maxwell 2D Post Processor Ver Mouse Mode Object Yes Grid Yes Keyboard No Maximums x e+02 y e+01 Minimums x e+00 y e+01 Mouse Position u v Units mm Mouse Left MENU PICK Mouse Right The eddy current field solver assumes that all currents are sinusoids oscillating at the same frequency. These time-varying currents produce a time-varying magnetic field in the plane perpendicular to the conductors in which currents flow. In turn, this magnetic field induces eddy currents in the source conductors and in any other conductors parallel to them. Maxwell Online Help System 35 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

71 Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Maxwell 2D Solvers In cartesian problems, all current flows in the z-direction, perpendicular to the crosssection being modeled. The magnetic field lies entirely in the xy-plane, with no z- component. In axisymmetric problems, all current flows in the φ-direction around the device s axis of rotational symmetry, perpendicular to the cross-section being modeled. The magnetic field is rotationally symmetric to this axis, reducing a three-dimensional problem to a two-dimensional one. There is no φ-component of the magnetic field. You are expected to specify material properties, current densities, total currents or surface currents, and other magnetic sources such as external fields. Optionally, you may specify different phase angles for different sources. The eddy current field solver then computes the magnetic vector potential, A Z (t) (cartesian models) or A φ (t) (axisymmetric models). The magnetic field, H(t), the magnetic flux density, B(t), and the current density, J(t), are derived from these basic field quantities. The current density can be further broken down into three components: The source current density, J s (t), due to differences in electric potential. The induced eddy current density, J e (t), due to time-varying magnetic fields. The displacement current density, J d (t), due to time-varying electric fields. More Maxwell Online Help System 36 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

72 Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Maxwell 2D Solvers Eddy Axial Field Solver The eddy axial field solver allows you to analyze eddy currents in devices subject to timevarying magnetic fields. Use it to analyze the effect of eddy currents on ohmic power loss, stored energy and flux distribution. For example, the power losses and eddy current distribution due to the crack in the solenoid shown below were computed using the eddy axial field solver. In addition, any quantity that can be derived from the basic magnetic field quantities can be analyzed. H(z) e e e e e e e e e e e+01 Reading Points Reading Triangles Converting Data Done The eddy axial current solver only computes the effects of time-varying fields in cartesian (XY) models. It assumes that all field quantities are sinusoids oscillating at the same frequency. All current flows in the xy plane being modeled there is no z-component of current. There are no source currents generated by an applied potential. The magnetic field has a z-component only, and is normal to the cross-section being modeled. You specify the material properties of all objects in the model; however, the only sources are established by specifying values of the magnetic field, H Z (t), at boundaries. The eddy axial field solver then computes the magnetic field in the structure. From the magnetic field, it derives the electric field, E(t), the electric flux density, D(t), and the current density, J(t). The current density can be further broken down into two components: Maxwell 2D Post Processor Ver Mouse Mode Object Yes Grid Yes Keyboard No Maximums x e+01 y e+01 Minimums x e+01 y e+01 Mouse Position u v Units mm Mouse Left MENU PICK Mouse Right Maxwell Online Help System 37 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

73 Solver Modifying the Solver Type Maxwell 2D Software Packages Electric Fields Electrostatic Field Solver DC Conduction Field Solver Thermal Field Solver AC Conduction Field Solver DC Magnetic Fields Magnetostatic Field Solver AC Magnetic Fields Eddy Current Field Solver Eddy Axial Field Solver Transient Solver Complete Parametric Analysis Maxwell 2D Solvers The eddy current density, J e (t), due to time-varying magnetic fields. The displacement current density, J d (t), due to time-varying electric fields. There are no source currents in the problem. Transient Solver The transient solver, EMpulse, allows you to analyze the solutions at each time step of a transient solution. Use this solver to determine the force and torque on the models that move with rotational or translational motion. Objects can only display one type of motion. You can also use this solver to determine the fields which result from a non-sinusoidal time-varying voltage or current excitation. The transient solver generates solutions for the power loss, speed of the moving objects, forces on translational objects, torque on rotating objects, and the displacement angle as a function of time. Additionally, if windings are involved in the model, the source values and flux linkage data for each winding are computed as well. For voltage sources, the back electromotive force (emf) and the resultant current are calculated. All generated solutions can be analyzed and plotted in the Post Processor and in Plot- Data. Complete The complete Maxwell 2D package includes all solvers in the Electric Fields, DC Magnetics, AC Magnetics, and EMpulse packages. Parametric Analysis The Parametric Analysis package can be purchased with any of the field solver packages listed in this chapter. It enables you to perform variational analysis on Maxwell 2D models. Using it, you can vary different design parameters such as the dimensions of the geometry, material properties, excitations or frequency and solve for fields and quantities such as force, torque, or capacitance for each variant on the original model. After generating a solution for a parametric model, you can then use the module s post-processing functions to analyze the results. Maxwell Online Help System 38 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

74 Hotkeys List of Hotkeys 2D Modeler Hotkeys 2D Boundary Manager Hotkeys 2D Meshmaker Hotkeys Parametric Table Hotkeys Parametrics Post Processor Hotkeys Maxwell 2D Hotkeys Hotkeys Some commands in Maxwell 2D may be accessed through hotkeys keystrokes that allow you to bypass the menu system and directly execute commands. They are generally designated and chosen as follows: Modifier + key BS Key Note: Hold down the modifier(s) such as Shift or Ctrl and press the key(s). Press the Back Space key. Press the key. All hotkeys should be entered in lower case. Hotkeys are not accessible if any of the command menus are displayed. Hotkeys are listed on menus after the commands which they execute. For example, the Window menu in 2D Modeler displays the following hotkeys: Grid Fill Solids G Ctrl+F > To use the hotkey to shade the wireframe objects: 1. Make sure all command menus are closed. If one of the command menus is open, click the right mouse button outside of the menu to close it. 2. Press the Control and F keys at the same time. The wireframe object is now shaded. You may view a list of all the hotkeys for Maxwell 2D. Maxwell Online Help System 39 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

75 Hotkeys List of Hotkeys 2D Modeler Hotkeys 2D Boundary Manager Hotkeys 2D Meshmaker Hotkeys Parametric Table Hotkeys Parametrics Post Processor Hotkeys Maxwell 2D Hotkeys List of Hotkeys The list of hotkeys, divided by module. 2D Modeler Hotkeys The following is a list of hotkeys for the 2D Modeler: Hotkey Ctrl + N Function File/New. Opens a new window. New windows will close the windows of any previous models. More Ctrl + O Ctrl + W Ctrl + S Ctrl + Q Ctrl + Z Ctrl + X Ctrl + C Ctrl + V Del Back Space File/Open. Reads in an existing geometric model or field solution. Opening a new window will close any currently open windows. File/Close. Closes the current model or solution, deleting the window it is displayed in. File/Save. Writes out a model to a set of disk files. File/Exit. Exits the current module and returns to the Executive Commands window. Edit/Undo. Reverses the effect of the last command. Edit/Cut. Deletes the selected items, placing them in the paste buffer. Edit/Copy. Copies the selected items to the paste buffer. Edit/Paste. Copies the contents of the paste buffer to the active project. Edit/Clear. Deletes the selected items but does not place them in the paste buffer. Edit/Deselect All. Deselects all currently selected objects. Maxwell Online Help System 40 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

76 Hotkeys List of Hotkeys 2D Modeler Hotkeys 2D Boundary Manager Hotkeys 2D Meshmaker Hotkeys Parametric Table Hotkeys Parametrics Post Processor Hotkeys Maxwell 2D Hotkeys F4 F5 F1 Hotkey Function Window/Tile/All. Moves and resizes windows to display them all on the screen at the same time. Window/Cascade/All. Stacks ( cascades ) windows, starting at the upper left corner of the project window. Help/On Context. Provides help on the items you click on. Maxwell Online Help System 41 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

77 Hotkeys List of Hotkeys 2D Modeler Hotkeys 2D Boundary Manager Hotkeys 2D Meshmaker Hotkeys Parametric Table Hotkeys Parametrics Post Processor Hotkeys Maxwell 2D Hotkeys 2D Boundary Manager Hotkeys The following is a list of hotkeys for the 2D Boundary Manager: Hotkey Ctrl + S Ctrl + Q Ctrl + Z Del Back Space S F4 F5 Function File/Save. Writes out a model to a set of disk files. File/Exit. Exits the current module and returns to the Executive Commands window. Edit/Undo. Reverses the effect of the last command. Edit/Clear. Resets a surface to its default boundary conditions. Edit/Deselect All. Deselects all currently selected objects. Model/SnapTo Mode. Defines the snap of the viewing window. Window/Tile. Moves and resizes windows to display them all on the screen at the same time. Window/Cascade. Stacks ( cascades ) windows, starting at the upper left corner of the project window. = Window/Change View/Zoom In. Zooms in on the model. - Window/Change View/Zoom Out. Zooms away from the model. F Ctrl + D G Ctrl + F F1 Window/Change View/Fit All. Fits the entire model in the viewing window, including the background. Window/Change View/Fit Drawing. FIts only the model in the viewing window. Window/Grid. Defines the grid settings in the viewing window. Window/Fill Solids and Window/Wire Frame. Toggles the display of the objects with either a wireframe outline or solid color. Help/On Context. Provides help on the items you click on. Maxwell Online Help System 42 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

78 Hotkeys List of Hotkeys 2D Modeler Hotkeys 2D Boundary Manager Hotkeys 2D Meshmaker Hotkeys Parametric Table Hotkeys Parametrics Post Processor Hotkeys Maxwell 2D Hotkeys 2D Meshmaker Hotkeys The following is a list of hotkeys for the 2D Meshmaker: Hotkey Ctrl + O Ctrl + W Ctrl + S Ctrl + Q S F4 F5 Function File/Open. Reads in an existing geometric model or field solution. Opening a new window will close any currently open windows. File/Close. Closes the current model or solution, deleting the window it is displayed in. File/Save. Writes out a model to a set of disk files. File/Exit. Exits the current module and returns to the Executive Commands window. Model/SnapTo Mode. Defines the snap of the viewing window. Window/Tile/All. Moves and resizes windows to display them all on the screen at the same time. Window/Cascade/All. Stacks ( cascades ) windows, starting at the upper left corner of the project window. = Window/Change View/Zoom In. Zooms in on the model. - Window/Change View/Zoom Out. Zooms away from the model. F Ctrl + D G Ctrl + F F1 Window/Change View/Fit All. Fits the entire model in the viewing window, including the background. Window/Change View/Fit Drawing. FIts only the model in the viewing window. Window/Grid. Defines the grid settings in the viewing window. Window/Fill Solids and Window/Wire Frame. Toggles the display of the objects with either a wireframe outline or solid color. Help/On Context. Provides help on the items you click on. Maxwell Online Help System 43 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

79 Hotkeys List of Hotkeys 2D Modeler Hotkeys 2D Boundary Manager Hotkeys 2D Meshmaker Hotkeys Parametric Table Hotkeys Parametrics Post Processor Hotkeys Maxwell 2D Hotkeys Parametric Table Hotkeys The following is a list of hotkeys for the parametric table: Hotkey Ctrl + N Ctrl + O Function File/New. Opens a new table. New tables will close the windows of any previous ones. File/Open. Reads in an existing parametric table. Opening a new table will close any currently open ones. More Ctrl + W Ctrl + S Ctrl + Q Ctrl + X Ctrl + C Ctrl + V Back Space Ctrl + I Ctrl +D Ctrl + V File/Close. Closes the current parametric table, deleting the window it is displayed in. File/Save. Writes out a parametric table to a set of disk files. File/Exit. Exits the module and returns to the Executive Commands window. Edit/Cut. Deletes the selected items, placing them in the paste buffer. Edit/Copy. Copies the selected items to the paste buffer. Edit/Paste. Copies the contents of the paste buffer to the active project. Edit/Deselect All. Deselects all currently selected items. Edit/Insert Row. Inserts rows into the parametric table. Edit/Delete Row. Deletes rows from the parametric table. Variables/View. Lists the variables defined in the table. Maxwell Online Help System 44 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

80 Hotkeys List of Hotkeys 2D Modeler Hotkeys 2D Boundary Manager Hotkeys 2D Meshmaker Hotkeys Parametric Table Hotkeys Parametrics Post Processor Hotkeys Maxwell 2D Hotkeys F4 F5 F1 Hotkey Function Window/Tile/All. Moves and resizes windows to display them all on the screen at the same time. Window/Cascade/All. Stacks ( cascades ) windows, starting at the upper left corner of the project window. Help/On Context. Provides help on the items you click on. Maxwell Online Help System 45 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

81 Hotkeys List of Hotkeys 2D Modeler Hotkeys 2D Boundary Manager Hotkeys 2D Meshmaker Hotkeys Parametric Table Hotkeys Parametrics Post Processor Hotkeys Maxwell 2D Hotkeys Parametrics Post Processor Hotkeys The following is a list of hotkeys for the Parametrics Post Processor: Hotkey Ctrl + N Ctrl + O Function File/New. Opens a new table. New tables will close the windows of any previous ones. File/Open. Reads in an existing parametric table. Opening a new table will close any currently open ones. More Ctrl + W Ctrl + S Ctrl + Q Ctrl + X Ctrl + C Ctrl + V Del Back Space Ctrl + I Ctrl +D File/Close. Closes the current parametric table, deleting the window it is displayed in. File/Save. Writes out a parametric table to a set of disk files. File/Exit. Exits the module and returns to the Executive Commands window. Edit/Cut. Deletes the selected items, placing them in the paste buffer. Edit/Copy. Copies the selected items to the paste buffer. Edit/Paste. Copies the contents of the paste buffer to the active project. Edit/Clear. Deletes the selected items but does not place them in the paste buffer. Edit/Deselect All. Deselects all currently selected items. Edit/Insert Row. Inserts rows into the parametric table. Edit/Delete Row. Deletes rows from the parametric table. Maxwell Online Help System 46 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

82 Hotkeys List of Hotkeys 2D Modeler Hotkeys 2D Boundary Manager Hotkeys 2D Meshmaker Hotkeys Parametric Table Hotkeys Parametrics Post Processor Hotkeys Maxwell 2D Hotkeys Hotkey Ctrl + V Ctrl + P Variables/View. Lists the variables defined in the table. Plot/New. Draws a new plot from the data given in the data table. = Plot/Zoom In. Zooms in on an area of the geometry, magnifying the view. Ctrl + T Function Stops an animation while it is playing. - Plot/Zoom Out. Zooms out of an area of the geometry, shrinking the view. F Ctrl+F F4 F5 Plot/Fit All. Changes the view to display all objects in the geometric model. Plot/Format/Graphs. Specifies the color, line thickness, and line style of a previously plotted line. Also determines the type of markers displayed at solution data points, and whether the graph is visible on the plot. Window/Tile/All. Moves and resizes windows to display them all on the screen at the same time. Window/Cascade/All. Stacks ( cascades ) windows, starting at the upper left corner of the project window. Maxwell Online Help System 47 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

83 Drawing Differences Between Cartesian and Axisymmetric Models Maxwell 2D Drawing Command Drawing Choose Drawing from the Executive Commands menu to select the type of geometry used for your problem. Depending on which field solver you chose for your problem, you can select either a cartesian or axisymmetric model as shown below: Geometric Model Cartesian (XY Plane) Y Axisymmetric (RZ Plane) Z Z X θ R A cartesian (XY) model represents a cross-section of a device that extends in the z- direction. Visualize the model as extending perpendicular to the plane being modeled. An axisymmetric (RZ) model represents a cross-section of a device that is revolved 360 around an axis of symmetry (the z-axis). Visualize the geometric model as being revolved around the z-axis. > To select the type of geometric model for your problem: 1. Click the mouse on the button next to Drawing. A menu appears. 2. Choose the desired model type: Note: XY Plane RZ Plane Creates a cartesian (XY) model. Creates an axisymmetric (RZ) model. Cartesian (XY) models are supported for all field solvers. However, you cannot create an axisymmetric (RZ) model if you select the AC Conduction or Eddy Axial field solvers. Cartesian models can be converted to axisymmetric models (and vice versa); however, all solutions, materials, boundaries, and parameter setups will be deleted. Maxwell Online Help System 48 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

84 Drawing Differences Between Cartesian and Axisymmetric Models Maxwell 2D Drawing Command Differences Between Cartesian and Axisymmetric Models In general, cartesian and axisymmetric models are set up and solved in the same way. However, be aware of the following: Because the z-axis is used as the axis of symmetry, axisymmetric geometric models cannot have r-coordinates lower than zero. Depending on which solver you selected, some material properties are not available for axisymmetric models. Some boundary conditions and sources operate in a slightly different manner for cartesian and axisymmetric models. Some executive parameters are not available for axisymmetric models. Cartesian and axisymmetric models use different coordinate systems cartesian (x,y,z) and cylindrical (r,θ,z), respectively which describe entirely different types of geometries. Because gradients, divergences and curls are calculated differently in each coordinate system, different versions of each field solver must be used to compute electric and magnetic fields for the two types of models. These calculations are handled implicitly by the field solvers, and are transparent to you. Solution results are independent of the coordinate system used in the model. For instance, virtual force has the same physical meaning and is given in the same units for cartesian and axisymmetric models. Similarly, field quantities such as A, B, D, and E represent the same electromagnetic phenomena whether they are computed for a cartesian or axisymmetric model. Maxwell Online Help System 49 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

85 Define Model Menu Draw Model Couple Model Group Objects Maxwell 2D Define Model Menu Define Model Menu After deciding whether to create a cartesian or axisymmetric model you are ready to create the model. Do so using the Define Model commands: Draw Model Couple Model Group Objects Draw the geometric model. Thermal only. Performs a one-way coupling with a solved eddy current or thermal problem for the current thermal problem. Identify objects in the model that are electrically identical. Draw Model Choose Draw Model from the Define Model menu to access the 2D Modeler. The 2D Modeler is used to create or modify the geometric model of a structure a required step in creating a model in Maxwell 2D. Couple Model If you have generated an eddy current or thermal solution in another project, choose Couple Model from the Define Model menu to perform a one-way coupling of the models by taking the power output of the solved model and importing it into the current project. Group Objects After you have drawn the geometric model, choose Group Objects from the Define Model menu to group geometric objects that are actually one electrical object. For instance, two terminations of a conductor that are drawn as separate objects in the cross section can be grouped to represent one physical conductor. The Group Objects command is not a required command for setting up a model in Maxwell 2D. Maxwell Online Help System 50 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

86 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Draw Model Choose Draw Model from the Define Model command of the Executive Commands menu to access the Maxwell 2D Modeler. Use this module to create or modify the geometric model of a structure. 2D Modeler When you choose Draw Model, the 2D Modeler window appears: Maxwell Online Help System 51 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

87 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry If you are modifying the geometry of a model for which a solution has been generated or material properties and boundary conditions have been assigned, the system displays the following message: If you make changes to the geometry and save those changes, all mesh files and solution data will be deleted and will have to be recomputed. Pick view only if no changes are to be saved, Modify if changes are to be saved or Cancel to cancel this operation. Your options are as follows: To change the geometry, choose Modify. To display the geometry without modifying it, choose View Only. The 2D Modeler screen then appears in a view only mode and allows the use of commands for viewing the geometry only. To return to the Executive Commands menu, choose Cancel. Maxwell Online Help System 52 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

88 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler 2D Modeler Commands The commands in the 2D Modeler have the following functions: File Reads other geometries into the 2D Modeler from disk files, saves the geometry being created in a disk file, opens and closes project windows, exits the 2D Modeler. Edit Cuts, pastes, selects, displays, and copies objects and text. Reshape Changes the shape of geometric objects. Boolean Unites overlapping objects, subtracts one object from another, intersects overlapping objects. Arrange Moves, rotates, and mirrors objects and text. Object Sketches the objects that make up the geometric model and creates text labels. Closed objects, such as circles and rectangles, can be created as well as open shapes, such as lines, arcs, and splines. Constraint (Parametric Analysis module only.) Adds, modifies, and deletes variables that allow you to resize objects in a model. Model Selects the drawing units that are used in a model, measures distances between points, specifies the mouse snap-to behavior, and sets the default attributes for subwindows. Window Selects the active project window, creates new subwindows, manipulates project windows and subwindows, changes the grids and views of structures in subwindows, and displays objects as filled-in solids. Help Provides help for the Maxwell 2D Modeler. Maxwell Online Help System 53 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

89 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Tool Bar The tool bar is the row of icons that appears above the 2D Modeler window. Icons give you easy access to the most frequently used commands, as shown below: Click on one of the previous icons to access the online documentation on the command it represents. > To access or view information on the commands in the tool bar: To execute a command, click on the appropriate button. To display a brief description of the command in the message bar, move the cursor to the desired icon and hold down the left mouse button. Move the cursor off the icon before releasing the mouse button to avoid executing the command. Maxwell Online Help System 54 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

90 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Menu Bar Drawing Region Project Windows Subwindows Subwindow Coordinate Systems Subwindows Versus Project Windows Active Windows Status Bar Message Bar Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Screen Layout The 2D Modeler is an application that supports multiple project windows and other window features. Menu Bar The menu bar appears at the top of the 2D Modeler window. Each item in the menu bar has a menu of commands associated with it. To display a menu, simply place the cursor on the desired command and click the left mouse button. For example, to display the list of Edit commands choose Edit. Drawing Region The drawing region is the grid-covered area in which you draw objects. This region initially represents a 100 millimeters by 70 millimeters drawing space. The Object commands allow you to create the objects that make up a geometric model. The Model commands allow you to manipulate the size of the drawing region, the unit of length used in specifying distances, the behavior of the mouse and cursor in selecting points from the grid, and other such parameters. Project Windows Project windows can display different geometric models. Each project window can be moved and resized using its window frame. Project windows can contain multiple subwindows. Choose File/Open to open a new project window. Maxwell Online Help System 55 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

91 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Menu Bar Drawing Region Project Windows Subwindows Subwindow Coordinate Systems Subwindows Versus Project Windows Active Windows Status Bar Message Bar Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Subwindows The 2D Modeler supports subwindows that can be used to display different views of the drawing region. For example, you can zoom in on a detailed portion of a structure in one subwindow and leave an unzoomed view of the full structure in a second subwindow. Also, you can use different grids (cartesian and polar) in different subwindows when creating objects. Use the Window commands to create and manipulate subwindows. Subwindow Coordinate Systems Each subwindow s coordinate system can be independently set. By default, subwindows use a cartesian (rectangular) coordinate system in which u and v represent the local coordinates of a point. The local uv-key is displayed in the lower-left corner of each subwindow. Use the Window/Coordinate System commands to shift or rotate each local coordinate system. Subwindows Versus Project Windows Subwindows are different from project windows. Project windows contain different geometric models. Each project window can contain multiple subwindows that allow different views of that project window s geometric model. Active Windows Only one project window and one subwindow can be active at any one time. Click the left mouse button on a project window or subwindow to make it the active one. Maxwell Online Help System 56 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

92 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Menu Bar Drawing Region Project Windows Subwindows Subwindow Coordinate Systems Subwindows Versus Project Windows Active Windows Status Bar Message Bar Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Status Bar The status bar appears at the bottom of the 2D Modeler screen. It contains fields that display the coordinates of the mouse and allow you to enter object coordinates: The status bar displays information in the following fields: The fields representing the position of the cursor depend on the coordinate system of the subwindow that the cursor is in: If a cartesian (rectangular) grid is displayed in the subwindow where the cursor is located, the fields U and V appear in the status bar. If a polar (radial) grid is displayed in the subwindow where the cursor is located, the fields R and Theta appear in the status bar. Because different coordinate systems can be used locally in each subwindow, these fields specify the local coordinates of whatever subwindow the cursor is in. These fields can also be used to enter coordinates of points directly from the keyboard. UNITS displays the current unit of length in which the geometry is being entered. By default, it is millimeters (mm), and mm is displayed on the status bar. The SNAPTO mode settings indicate the snap-to-point behavior of the mouse as points are being picked on the screen. For example, when SNAPTO: grid vertex is set (the default), the 2D Modeler grabs the grid or object vertex point closest to the mouse click. Maxwell Online Help System 57 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

93 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Menu Bar Drawing Region Project Windows Subwindows Subwindow Coordinate Systems Subwindows Versus Project Windows Active Windows Status Bar Message Bar Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Message Bar The message bar appears at the bottom of the window frame. Text describing the mouse button functions for the selected command appears here. For example, the following text is displayed in the message bar after Window/Change View/Zoom In is selected: MOUSE LEFT: Enter zoom-in area MOUSE RIGHT: Abort command After selecting or deselecting objects and text, the message bar displays the number of items that are currently selected. After changing the view with the Window/Change View commands, it also displays the current magnification level of the view in the active subwindow. Maxwell Online Help System 58 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

94 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Drawing Plane for the Model As explained in the section Drawing, there are two types of geometric models available: In a cartesian (XY) model, the 2D geometry represents the cross-section of a device that extends perpendicular to the modeling plane. In this model, the z coordinate is constant. In an axisymmetric (RZ) model, the 2D geometry represents the cross-section of a device that is rotated 360 about an axis of symmetry (the z-axis). Maxwell Online Help System 59 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

95 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Selecting Points With the Keyboard Units Object Names and Colors Viewing a Model Reading, Importing, and Saving Models Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler General Procedure There is no strict procedure to follow in creating a geometric model. The following steps, however, serve as general guidelines. > From the 2D Modeler, create the model as follows: 1. Choose Model/Drawing Size to specify the size of the drawing region. The drawing size for every project window is modified. Therefore, this command need only be performed once. 2. Use Model/Drawing Units to designate the units for the problem. 3. Use the Window commands to adjust the view of the drawing region as follows: Choose Window/New to create additional subwindows in which to display different views or parts of the trace layer. Choose Window/Tile and Window/Cascade to layout the windows in a convenient way. Also, use the resizable borders of subwindows to resize and reposition them. Use the Window/Coordinate System commands to shift or rotate the local coordinate system used in the active window. 4. Use the Object commands to create objects. When drawing the structure, build it as a collection of 2D objects. Treat each conductor or material in the structure as a separate object. 5. If necessary, use the Edit, Reshape, and Arrange commands to modify the geometry that you have created. Note: You can also use the Constraint commands if you have purchased the Parametrics Analysis option with Maxwell 2D. 6. Choose File/Save to periodically save the geometry to a disk file. 7. Choose File/Exit to complete your drawing session. Maxwell Online Help System 60 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

96 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Selecting Points With the Keyboard Units Object Names and Colors Viewing a Model Reading, Importing, and Saving Models Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Selecting Points With the Keyboard When drawing objects, you are expected to select points from the screen using the mouse and cursor. As an alternative to selecting points with the mouse, you can use the keyboard to enter points in the U and V fields located in the status bar at the bottom of the screen. Use keyboard entry to: Enter coordinates and angles with greater precision than can be achieved using the mouse. Select points that are between grid points or mouse snaps without having to change the mouse behavior. > To enter points using the keyboard: 1. Move the mouse to the U field in the status bar and click the left mouse button. 2. Enter the u-coordinate of the point. 3. Move the mouse to the V field in the status bar and click the left mouse button. (Alternatively, press the Tab key.) 4. Enter the v-coordinate of the point. 5. Click on the Enter button that appears in the status bar or press Return. The desired point is then selected. Additional entry fields appear in the status bar as necessary. For example, an Angle field appears when you choose Window/Coordinate System/Rotate. Occasionally, other fields may appear in the status bar instead of U and V. For instance, if a polar grid is displayed in the subwindow where the cursor is located, the fields R and Theta appear in the status bar instead of U and V. Use the same procedure to enter values in these fields. Units Choose the Model/Drawing Units command to define the modeling units. You may use either of the following metric or english units as the type of modeling units: Metric English km, meters, cm, mm, microns, nm yards, feet, inches, mils Regardless of the selected modeling unit, all solutions are given in SI units. Maxwell Online Help System 61 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

97 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Selecting Points With the Keyboard Units Object Names and Colors Viewing a Model Reading, Importing, and Saving Models Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Object Names and Colors Note: After you have created a closed 2D object, the following window appears: > To assign a new name and color to an object: 1. Enter the new object name in the Name field. By default, new objects are assigned the name objectn (where n is sequential). Note: Open objects are automatically assigned a name and color. To assign a specific name or color to an open object, use the Edit/Attributes/Recolor and Edit/Attributes/Rename commands. The name background is reserved for use by the system and cannot be assigned to any object in the geometric model. The background object consists of the parts of the drawing region that aren t occupied by closed objects. 2. Choose a new object color. a. Click the left mouse button on the color block next to the Color field. A palette of colors appears. b. Click the left mouse button on the new color. 3. Choose OK to complete the command. The new object is then assigned a name and a color. To change the name or color, use the Edit/Attributes/Recolor and Edit/Attributes/Rename commands. Maxwell Online Help System 62 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

98 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Selecting Points With the Keyboard Units Object Names and Colors Viewing a Model Reading, Importing, and Saving Models Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Viewing a Model You can change how objects are displayed by using Window/Change View, Window/Fill Solids, and Window/Wire Frame. Zooming and Panning in Subwindows Although the same set of objects are displayed in all subwindows for a project, you can display only a part of the geometry in a subwindow. For example, one subwindow can show a zoomed view of one portion of a structure while another subwindow shows the entire structure. Use Window/Change View/Zoom In and Window/Change View/Zoom Out to change the view in the active subwindow. Once you zoom in on a portion of a subwindow, horizontal and vertical scroll bars appear along the bottom and right side of the subwindow. They allow you to pan the magnified structure left, right, up, and down. The horizontal scroll bar appears in a subwindow only when the entire structure is not visible along the local U-axis, and the vertical scroll bar appears in a subwindow only when the entire structure is not visible along the V-axis. > To change your view using the scroll bars: Select one of the arrow buttons that appear at the ends of the scroll bar. Use the thumb scroll by: 1. Positioning the cursor over the off-colored bar, or thumb scroll, that appears in the scroll bar. 2. Dragging the thumb scroll up, down, left, or right in the scroll bar to the portion of the data that you want to display. For instance, to pan down a geometric model, drag the thumb scroll in the vertical scroll bar down, or click the mouse button on the down arrow button. Maxwell Online Help System 63 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

99 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Selecting Points With the Keyboard Units Object Names and Colors Viewing a Model Reading, Importing, and Saving Models Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Displaying Objects as Wire Frames or Shaded Solids Closed objects are normally displayed as transparent, wire frame objects through which you can see the underlying grid. To display objects in the active window as opaque, shaded solids, choose Window/Fill Solids. Doing so causes the 2D Modeler to fill in the objects with the colors of their borders. Choose Window/Fill Solids and Window/Wire Frame to toggle between wire frame and opaque displays. The system displays only one of the two commands at a time. For example, if shaded models are being displayed, the system displays Window/Wire Frame so that you can toggle back to a wire frame display. Reading, Importing, and Saving Models As you are creating a geometric model, you may want to copy objects from an existing structure into the model that you are currently creating. Choose File/Open to open the file containing the existing geometric model in a new project window. You may also want to import a model from another project and then edit the model to create a new 2D model. Choose File/Import to import the file containing the desired geometric model into the current project window. To save the objects you add as you work, and to save the final geometric model, choose File/Save. Note: Save your model periodically. It is not saved automatically! Frequently saving your geometric model can prevent you from losing part or all of your work if a system crash occurs while you are editing a model. Maxwell Online Help System 64 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

100 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Things to Consider Keep it Simple Level of Detail Treat the Background as an Object Sizing the Drawing Region Consider Boundaries Objects within Objects Partial Overlapping Not Allowed Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Things to Consider When creating the geometry representing the cross section of a structure, keep the following guidelines in mind. Keep it Simple Keep the geometries as simple as possible. The more complex a geometric model is, the more complex the mesh (which is used in generating the solution) has to be resulting in greater requirements for memory and processing power. It is always possible to add detail to the model later. Therefore, always start with as simple a model as possible. Level of Detail Be careful not to create geometries in which large dimensions and small dimensions differ by more than three orders of magnitude. For example, do not create an object with one side larger than 2 inches and another side smaller than inches. Likewise, do not place two objects with sides that are approximately 5 millimeters in length any closer than millimeters to one another. Maxwell 2D may not be able to create a mesh and therefore cannot generate solutions for geometries in which dimensions vary by more than three orders of magnitude. Treat the Background as an Object An object named background is automatically created by the system. This object occupies any portion of the drawing region that is not occupied by objects that you have created. Although it cannot be displayed while the geometric model is being created, material characteristics and boundary conditions can be assigned to it just as they can for any other object in the geometric model.once you import the model into the Maxwell 2D. For example, you can assign the material attributes of air to the background object. Note: The name background is reserved for use by the system. It cannot be assigned to any other object in the geometric model other than the background region. Maxwell Online Help System 65 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

101 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Things to Consider Keep it Simple Level of Detail Treat the Background as an Object Sizing the Drawing Region Consider Boundaries Objects within Objects Partial Overlapping Not Allowed Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Sizing the Drawing Region The drawing region is the area in which you can create the 2D model. To specify the size of the drawing region, use the Model/Drawing Size command. By default, the drawing region for all project regions is 100 units by 70 units high. To conserve computing resources, it is generally a good idea to explicitly define the size of the region in which you are interested. If you know that the solution is approximately contained within a region other than the default, use this command to change the drawing region. Consider Boundaries Although you do not set boundary conditions while creating the geometric model, you must plan for the boundaries when defining the size of the drawing region. For example, in cases where you are modeling the device or structure as being far away from any outside influence, be sure to size the drawing region so that its outer boundaries are far enough away from objects. Far enough, of course, is relative. In general, a boundary is far enough away if the energy density stored in the field near the boundary is negligible. In all cases, consciously deciding on the size of the drawing region can conserve computing resources. Objects within Objects In cases where one object is entirely contained inside another object, the material assigned to the outer object stops at the boundary of the inner object. The inner object represents a void or hole in an object that s filled with another material. Maxwell Online Help System 66 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

102 Draw Model 2D Modeler Modifying the Geometry 2D Modeler Commands Tool Bar Screen Layout Drawing Plane for the Model General Procedure Things to Consider Keep it Simple Level of Detail Treat the Background as an Object Sizing the Drawing Region Consider Boundaries Objects within Objects Partial Overlapping Not Allowed Maxwell 2D Maxwell 2D Modeler Partial Overlapping Not Allowed Objects that partially overlap that is, that occupy the same region of space without one object being contained entirely within the other or self-intersect cannot be used in the final geometric model. The Maxwell 2D software packages cannot generate an accurate solution for a geometric model that contains such objects it has no way of knowing which material characteristics apply to the overlapping region. Examples of both are shown below. The 2D Modeler displays a warning message if you create overlapping or self-intersecting objects. If you read a file into the 2D Modeler the system checks for self-intersecting and overlapping objects when you exit. For example, if you have overlapping objects in your model when you leave the 2D Modeler, the following message appears: Main project still has overlapping objects. If the model contains overlapping objects when you leave the 2D Modeler, the remaining commands on the Executive Commands menu are disabled, and you cannot continue to set up the model. At this point, you should return to the 2D Modeler and do one of the following: Delete the overlapping objects. Identify them as non-model objects using Edit/Attributes/By Clicking. Use the Boolean commands to unite, intersect, or subtract the overlapping objects to create a single object. Maxwell Online Help System 67 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

103 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu File Menu Use the File commands to perform the following tasks: Create new geometric models. Open existing model files or solutions. Close models. Save models in disk files. Delete changes made since the last time a model was saved. Exit from the current module. When you choose File from the menu bar, a menu similar to the following one appears: The menu commands will vary depending on the module you are operating in. Maxwell Online Help System 68 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

104 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu File Commands The function of each File command is as follows: New Open Import Close Save Save As Revert Print Setup Print Exit Opens a project window in which a new model may be created. Reads in an existing geometric model or solution file. Opened models appear in new project windows so that more than one model may be opened at a time. Reads in geometric files. Also allows you to edit these files and save the changes. Closes the active window. Writes out a model, set of data, or solution to a set of disk files. Writes out a model, set of data, or solution under a different name or in a different file format. Reverts to a previously saved version of a model, deleting all changes made since the last time the model was saved. Defines printer settings for hardcopy output. Prints a window, or portion of a window to a postscript file or hardcopy. Exits the current module and returns you to the Executive Commands window. The File/Open, File/Save, File/Save As, and File/Revert commands do not affect files containing solution data or other information related to a model (such as its material properties, finite element mesh, and so forth). Your model is not automatically saved. Therefore, be sure to frequently save your work while creating or editing a project. This can prevent you from losing all of your changes if a problem occurs that causes your workstation or PC to crash. If you made changes since the last time the model was saved, you will be prompted to save when you close the project or exit the 2D Modeler. Maxwell Online Help System 69 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

105 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu File Extensions Different modules of Maxwell software save their files with different file extensions so that you and the software can tell which module created which file. For instance, gear.sm2 is a 2D Modeler file. Some commonly used file extensions and their associated software modules are listed below..sm2.obs.att.sld.sm3 The 2D Modeler from the Utilities panel The Maxwell 2D Parameter Extractor The Maxwell Planar Parameter Extractor Maxwell 2D, version 6.1 or later Maxwell Strata Ansoft Ensemble A 2D modeler file created in PlotData Maxwell 2D Field Simulator, version 4.33 or earlier Maxwell 2D Field Simulator, version 4.33 or earlier The Solid Modeler Maxwell 3D Field Simulator, version 4.1 or later Maxwell 3D version 6.0 or later. Ansoft HFSS, version 6.0 or later The Maxwell Q3D Extractor Maxwell Online Help System 70 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

106 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu File/New Choose File/New to create a new, unnamed window in which to create a geometric model. The model that is drawn in this window can be saved as a new project and is independent of any other model that may be loaded in the software. > To create a new project: Choose File/New. A new project window appears as shown below: By default, the title of the new model, shown in the title bar appears as Unnamedn, where n is the number of new models that have not yet been assigned a name. For example, the default name of the first new window opened would be Unnamed1. Note: Specify a name for the new project using the File/Save or File/Save As commands. Maxwell Online Help System 71 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

107 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu File/Open Choose File/Open to read in a geometric model or solution from a file. Objects can be copied from other models, into the current project, but other models cannot be edited or saved as part of the current project. Compressed files are automatically uncompressed when they are opened. > To read in a previously created file: 1. Choose File/Open. A file browser appears. 2. Use the browser to find the file you wish to open. By default, files with the correct file extensions for the software you are using appear in the window. 3. Select on the desired file: On the workstation, these files appear in the Files list box. On the PC, these files appear next to the Directories box. The selected file automatically appears in the Select model file field. 4. If you are using the 2D Modeler from the Utilities panel, do one of the following: Leave read only deselected if you plan to edit the geometric model being read in. Select read only if you only want to view the model being read in. 5. Choose OK to complete the command. The opened file appears in the active window. Maxwell Online Help System 72 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

108 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open Things to Consider Read Only Mode Opening Maxwell 2D Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier) File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu Things to Consider The following factors should be kept in mind when opening files. Read Only Mode In the 2D Modeler from the Utilities panel, you can select read only to open a file in readonly mode. The words [read-only] appear next to the model file name in the title bar of the project window after the model is opened in this mode. In read-only mode, the system prevents you from saving any changes to the original file. However, you can use the File/Save As command to save the changes to a new file. Any 2D Modeler command except File/Save may be accessed. Opening Maxwell 2D Field Simulator Files version 4.33 (or earlier) In the 2D Modeler, the File/Open command is able to open geometry files created using version 4.33 (or earlier) of Maxwell 2D. This allows you to directly import these geometric models into the 2D Modeler, bypassing the Translators command on the Maxwell Control Panel. To open a file created with version 4.33 (or earlier) of Maxwell 2D, add an.obs or.att extension to the file name. The selected file will automatically be translated into the.sm2 file format used by the 2D Modeler. The original file will not be modified unless you choose to save the changes in.obs or.att format. Only 2D geometric models may be read into the 2D Modeler (whether in the Utilities panel or another Maxwell software package). No mesh, material, boundary, or solution information can be translated or read from the 2D files. More information is available on how translating a Maxwell 2D model (.obs extension) to a 2D model with extension (.sm2) affects its geometry. Maxwell Online Help System 73 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

109 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu File/Import Choose File/Import to directly read a geometric model into the current project window. The imported model replaces the existing model in the project window, and can be edited and saved like any other geometric model. Like File/Open, this command can sometimes be used to bypass the Translators command in the Maxwell Control Panel. Compressed files are automatically uncompressed when they are opened. > To import a geometry file: 1. Choose File/Import. 2. Use the file browser that appears to find the file you wish to open. 3. Click the left mouse button on the desired file: On the workstation, these files appear in the Files list box. On the PC, these files appear next to the Directories box. The selected file automatically appears in the Select model file field. 4. Choose OK. The window disappears and the file is imported. Maxwell Online Help System 74 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

110 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu File/Close Choose File/Close to close an open geometric model and its associated project window. > To close a model file: 1. Select the desired project window as the active window. 2. Choose File/Close. If the project has changed since the last time it was saved, you will be prompted whether or not to save it to a disk file. Afterwards, the project window in which the model is displayed disappears. Note: For Maxwell 2D software packages, this command only applies to project windows other than the main one. To close the main project, use the File/ Exit command. File/Save Choose File/Save to save a geometric model to a file. > To save a model: 1. Select the desired project window as the active window. 2. Choose File/Save. One of the following things happens: If the file has been saved before or you have specified a name for the project, the system saves the model to a disk file. If this is the first time the project is being saved and you have not yet specified a name for it, the menu shown under the description of the File/Save As command appears. Follow the directions for this command to save the unnamed model for the first time. Maxwell Online Help System 75 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

111 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu File/Save As Choose File/Save As to do the following: Save a geometric model or solution under a different name. Save a geometric model or solution in a file format different from the default. When you save the files in different file formats, you can bypass the Translators command on the Maxwell Control Panel. > To save a geometry file using the File/Save As command: 1. Select the desired project window as the active window. 2. Choose File/Save As. 3. Use the file browser that appears to find the directory where you wish to save the file. 4. Type the name of the file, using the correct file extension for the file type you wish to save the model as. 5. If the window has a Switch to saved field, do one of the following: Leave the field selected to display the new file name, and close the current file. In effect, this command copies and closes the project, then opens the copy of your project. Deselect Switch to saved to save the model under the new name without changing which file is displayed. In effect, the model is copied under the new project name, but the copied project is not opened. 6. Choose OK or press Return. The software saves the model using the name and file format you selected. Note: Be sure to save your models periodically; they are not saved automatically. Saving frequently can help to prevent you from losing your work if a problem occurs that causes your workstation to crash. Maxwell Online Help System 76 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

112 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu File/Revert Choose File/Revert to delete all changes made to the geometric model since you last used the File/Save or File/Save As commands. This has the same effect as closing the model without saving the changes and then re-opening it. The project reverts back to the way it was when it was last saved to a disk file. > To revert to a previously saved version of the model: 1. Choose File/Revert. The following message appears: Revert to last saved version of projectname? where projectname represents the name of the selected project. 2. To revert to the previous version of the model, select Yes. All changes made to the model since the last time it was saved are deleted. You cannot use the File/Revert command until you have saved the project at least once and have made changes since the last time you saved it. Maxwell Online Help System 77 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

113 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu File/Print Setup Choose this command to define the printer settings, such as the printer you wish to send the output to and the form and orientation of the output. For workstations, this command functions identically to the Print command in the Maxwell Control Panel. > To define the printer settings on a Microsoft Windows system: 1. Choose File/Print Setup. The Print Setup window appears: 2. Select the Printer that you will send the output to. 3. Select the Form of the output document. 4. Select the Orientation of the output document. 5. Optionally, choose Network and select a new printer for the print jobs. 6. If the output is two-sided, select the type of output form you prefer. 7. Specify any Maxwell options. 8. Choose OK to accept the settings or Cancel to ignore the new settings. Maxwell Online Help System 78 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

114 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Print/Rectangle File/Print/Active View File/Print/Project Print Setup Within the Windows File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu File/Print Use the File/Print commands to do the following: Rectangle Active View Project File/Print/Rectangle > To print a rectangular area of a window: 1. Choose File/Print/Rectangle. The cursor symbol changes to Click on a corner of the region in the window to print. 3. Use the mouse to select the region in which to print. As you move the mouse, a box appears outlining the selected area. 4. Click on a corner that is diagonally opposite the one you just selected. The Print window appears. 5. Optionally, choose Setup to define printer settings. 6. Choose OK to print the active view window or Cancel to exit the window without printing. All objects that lie completely inside the selected region are printed. File/Print/Active View Choose this command to print only the active view window. > To print the model in the active view window: 1. Choose File/Print/Active View. The cursor changes to crosshairs. 2. Select the window you wish to print. The Print window appears. 3. Optionally, choose Setup to define printer settings. 4. Choose OK to print the active view window or Cancel to exit the window without printing. The specified subwindow is printed. Prints the selected area in a window. Prints the selected subwindow. Prints all the subwindows in a project. Maxwell Online Help System 79 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

115 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Print/Rectangle File/Print/Active View File/Print/Project Print Setup Within the Windows File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu File/Print/Project Choose this command to print all windows in the active project. > To print the entire window: 1. Choose File/Print/Project. A window similar to the following one appears: 2. Select the Print Quality of the job from the pull-down menu. 3. Optionally, choose Setup to define printer settings. 4. Optionally, select Print to File to send the job to a postscript file. 5. Choose OK to print the project or Cancel to dismiss the window without printing. Maxwell Online Help System 80 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

116 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Print/Rectangle File/Print/Active View File/Print/Project Print Setup Within the Windows File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu Print Setup Within the Windows On a PC, when you choose Setup from within one of the printing windows, the following window appears, listing the current active printer, job status, type of image to print and any additional information pertinent to the print job: > To define the print settings from within a printing window: 1. Select the Name of the printer to send the output to. 2. Optionally, choose Properties and do the following: From the Page Setup tab, select default settings for the Paper Size, Paper Source, Copy Count, Orientation, and Color Appearance of the print job. From the Advanced tab, select the type of field to alter from the list and select a new default setting. Choose OK to accept the settings and return to the Print Setup window. 3. Select the Paper Size from the pull-down menu. 4. Select the Paper Source from the pull-down menu. 5. Select the Orientation as with Portrait or Landscape. 6. Optionally, choose Network and select the name of the printer to send to from the list. Choose OK to accept the settings and return to the Print Setup window. 7. Choose OK to accept the settings and begin printing, or Cancel to cancel the print job. Maxwell Online Help System 81 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

117 File Menu File Commands File Extensions File/New File/Open File/Import File/Close File/Save File/Save As File/Revert File/Print Setup File/Print File/Exit Maxwell 2D File Menu File/Exit Choose File/Exit to exit a module. > To exit a module: 1. Choose File/Exit. The following message appears for each open project with unsaved changes: Save changes to projectname before closing? where projectname represents the name of the selected project. 2. Do one of the following: Choose Cancel to stay in the module and not save the changes. Choose Yes to save the changes for the project before exiting. Choose No to exit without saving the changes. If several projects are open, you are cycled through all of them before you exit the module. Maxwell Online Help System 82 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

118 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit Menu Use the Edit commands to: Cut, copy, and paste objects and text. Select objects and text to be edited. Undo the last command. Deselect items. Delete and undelete items. Duplicate objects and text along a line or an arc, or mirror them about a line. Change the attributes of objects and text. Display or hide objects. When you choose Edit from the menu bar, a menu similar to the following one appears: Depending on the module you are in, not all of these commands will appear. Maxwell Online Help System 83 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

119 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit Commands The following commands appear in the Edit menu: Undo Clear Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Clear Duplicate Select Deselect All Reverses the effect of the last Clear command. Reverses the effect of the last command Cancels the effect of the last Undo command. Deletes the selected items, placing them in the paste buffer a part of the computer s memory where they may be temporarily stored. Copies the selected items to the paste buffer. Copies the contents of the paste buffer to the active project. Deletes the selected items but does not place them in the paste buffer. Duplicates the selected items along a straight line or arc of a circle, or by mirroring them about a line. Selects items to be edited. Deselects all selected objects in the current project or in all open projects. Attributes Changes the color, text, and naming attributes of an item. Visibility Displays or hides 2D objects. Show All Displays all hidden objects. Insert Row Parametric table only. Inserts rows of data from the parametric table. Delete Row Parametric table only. Deletes rows of data from the parametric table. Duplicate Row Parametric table only. Duplicates the selected rows. External Circuit Transient problems only. Edits the circuits for externally connected windings. Maxwell Online Help System 84 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

120 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Undo Clear Choose Edit/Undo Clear to reverse the effect of the Edit/Clear command. All items in the active project window that were deleted using the most recent Edit/Clear command are restored and displayed in their original locations. All restored items remain selected until you deselect them. Edit/Undo Clear only restores items deleted by the latest Edit/Clear command; it cannot restore items deleted in previous Edit/Clear commands. It also cannot restore items after other items have been cut, copied, or pasted, or new objects have been drawn. Edit/Undo Choose Edit/Undo to reverse the effect of the last command. Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Choose Edit/Redo to re-perform the last action cancelled with the Edit/Undo command. Choose Edit/Cut to remove objects and text from the active project window and place them in the paste buffer. > To cut items from the active project window: 1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Edit/Cut. The items are deleted from the screen and put into the paste buffer. Items that have been cut may be pasted back into the active window using Edit/Paste. The items currently stored in the paste buffer are replaced by the next items that are cut or copied into the buffer. Maxwell Online Help System 85 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

121 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Copy Choose Edit/Copy to copy the selected objects and text into the paste buffer. The selected items are not deleted. > To copy items into the paste buffer: 1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Edit/Copy. The items are copied into the paste buffer. Items that have been copied may be pasted into the active window using Edit/Paste. The items currently stored in the paste buffer are replaced by the next items that are cut or copied. Maxwell Online Help System 86 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

122 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Paste Choose Edit/Paste to copy the contents of the paste buffer to the active window. The objects and text in the paste buffer may be pasted back into the same window, or into a different subwindow or project window. An item in the paste buffer can be pasted any number of times via the Edit/Paste command. Edit/Paste only pastes items placed in the paste buffer by the latest Edit/Cut or Edit/ Copy command. Each time the command Edit/Cut or Edit/Copy is chosen, the buffer is overwritten with new items. > To paste an item or group of items: 1. Use one of the following commands to place the desired items in the paste buffer: Edit/Cut Edit/Copy 2. Select the project window into which the items are to be pasted as the active window. 3. Choose Edit/Paste. A rectangle outlining the location of the items from the paste buffer appears on the screen to show you their location. 4. Move the rectangle where you want the items to be located and click the left mouse button. Alternatively, use the keyboard to enter the point where the pasted items will be centered. The pasted items are then displayed in the desired location. All pasted items remain selected so you can clear them if you want to undo the effect of the Edit/Paste command. Edit/Clear Choose Edit/Clear to delete all selected items. The deleted items are not stored in the paste buffer. > To clear items: 1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Edit/Clear. The selected items are deleted from the screen. Edit/Undo Clear restores the latest set of items deleted with Edit/Clear. However, items cleared previously are lost. Maxwell Online Help System 87 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

123 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Duplicate Use the Edit/Duplicate commands to make copies of objects in the active window. These commands combine the functions of the Edit/Copy and Edit/Paste commands, copying the selected items and pasting them the number of times you specify. They are: Along Line Along Arc Mirror Duplicate Before duplicating an item, you must first select it by clicking on it or by using one of the commands on the Edit/Select menu. The Edit/Duplicate commands can only be used to copy items within a project. To copy items to another project, use Edit/Cut and Edit/Paste. Edit/Duplicate/Along Line Duplicates the selected item along a straight line. Duplicates the selected item along an arc of a circle. Duplicates the selected item and mirrors it about a line. Choose Edit/Duplicate/Along Line to copy the selected objects and text along a straight line. The line along which the items are duplicated can be vertical, horizontal, or lie at an angle. > To duplicate items along a line: 1. Select items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Edit/Duplicate/Along Line. 3. Click the left mouse button on an anchor point for the items to be duplicated. This point is used to align the duplicated objects along the line. Any point in the drawing space can be selected; however, selecting an anchor point on an item s edge or within the item makes it easier to select the duplication line. 4. Move the mouse to move the anchor point to a new location. As you do, the object s outline moves with the mouse. 5. Click the left mouse button on the desired point. Alternatively, use the keyboard to enter the point s coordinates. 6. Enter the number of copies to be made in the Total Number field. The number of copies that you specify includes the original copied object. 7. Choose OK or press Return. The system then copies the items, spacing them along the line according to the point you selected. Maxwell Online Help System 88 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

124 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc Choose Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc to copy the selected objects and text along a circular arc. > To duplicate items along an arc: 1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc. 3. To select the center of the arc on which the duplicates are to be located, move the cursor to the desired point and click the left mouse button. Alternatively, use the keyboard to enter the point s coordinates. A window appears with the following fields: Angle Total Number 4. Enter the angle between each duplicate in the Angle field. A positive angle causes the items to be copied in the counter-clockwise direction. A negative angle causes the item to be copied in the clockwise direction. 5. Enter the number of copies to be made in the Total Number field. The number of copies that you specify includes the original copied object. 6. Choose OK or press Return. The system copies the selected items, spacing each duplicate along the arc at the angle you specified. In the following figure, a rectangle was copied five times, each copy at an angle of 30 degrees. Note that the copies of the original object are selected. Maxwell Online Help System 89 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

125 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate Choose Edit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate to mirror and copy the selected objects and text about a line. This command is similar to the Arrange/Mirror command, except that it copies the selected items instead of moving them. > To mirror and duplicate items about a line: 1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Edit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate. 3. Move the mouse to the first point in the line and click the left mouse button. Alternatively, use the keyboard to enter the point s coordinates. 4. Move the mouse to the second point in the line and click the left mouse button. (Again, as an alternative, enter the point from the keyboard.) A mirror-image copy of the selected items then appears on the screen. Characters in a duplicated line of text are not mirrored. Instead, the text is copied about the line you entered. Maxwell Online Help System 90 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

126 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Select Use the Edit/Select commands to select items to be edited. You can also select (and deselect) items simply by clicking the left mouse button on them. The number of selected items is displayed in the message bar at the bottom of the 2D Modeler window. The commands on the Edit/Select menu are listed below. By Area By Name From List All Items Open Objects Closed Objects Model Objects NonModel Objects Selects all items in a rectangular area. Selects the geometric objects that you name. Selects items from a list. Selects all items in the project window. Selects all open objects. Selects all closed objects. Selects all objects that are identified as model objects, objects that are to be included in the final geometric model. Selects all objects that are not identified as model objects, objects that will not be included in the final geometric model. You must select an item or group of items with one of the Edit/Select commands before entering the commands in the following table. Selecting identifies the objects and text on which those commands act. The following commands require a selection: Edit Menu Reshape Menu Arrange Menu Cut Scale Selection Move Copy Clear Deselect All Duplicate Attributes Visibility/Hide Selection Rotate Mirror Maxwell Online Help System 91 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

127 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Select/By Area Choose Edit/Select/By Area to select all objects and text in a rectangular area. The items must lie entirely within the rectangle to be selected. > To select all items in a rectangular area: 1. Choose Edit/Select/By Area. 2. Move the mouse to a corner of the desired rectangle and click the left mouse button. Alternatively, use the keyboard to enter the point s coordinates. 3. Move the mouse to the corner that is diagonally opposite the one you just picked. As you move the mouse, the system draws a box outlining the selected area. 4. Click the left mouse button to select the other diagonal corner of the area. (Again, as an alternative, enter the point from the keyboard.) All items that lie completely inside the rectangle are highlighted, indicating that they have been selected. Edit/Select/By Name Choose Edit/Select/By Name to select a geometric object by name. > To select objects by name: 1. Choose Edit/Select/By Name. A pop-up window appears with the following field: Enter item name/regular expression 2. Enter the name of the object to be selected in the field, using wildcards when appropriate. For example, entering line* selects objects line_1, line_2, line_3, and so on. 3. Choose OK to confirm the selection or Cancel to abort this command. The desired objects are highlighted, indicating that they have been selected. Edit/Select/From List Choose Edit/Select/From List to select the objects from a list of object. > To select from a list: 1. Choose Edit/Select/From List. The Select Object window appears. 2. Select the names of the objects from the list. 3. Choose OK. The objects are selected in the modeling window. Maxwell Online Help System 92 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

128 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Select/All Items Choose Edit/Select/All Items to select all objects and text in the model. > To select all items in the geometric model: Choose Edit/Select/All Items. All items in the active project window are highlighted, indicating that they have been selected. Edit/Select/Open Objects Choose Edit/Select/Open Objects to select all open geometric objects to edit. Open geometric objects, or line objects, are those whose edges do not meet to form a closed shape. > To select all open objects: Choose Edit/Select/Open Objects. All open objects are highlighted, indicating that they have been selected. Edit/Select/Closed Objects Choose Edit/Select/Closed Objects to select all closed geometric objects to edit. Closed objects are those whose edges meet to form closed shapes. > To select all closed objects: Choose Edit/Select/Closed Objects. All closed objects are highlighted, indicating that they have been selected. Edit/Select/Model Objects Choose Edit/Select/Model Objects to select all model objects. Model objects are identified using Edit/Attributes/By Clicking as part of the final geometric model that is used in generating a solution. > To select all model objects: Choose Edit/Select/Model Objects. All model objects are highlighted, indicating that they have been selected. Maxwell Online Help System 93 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

129 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Select/NonModel Objects Choose Edit/Select/NonModel Objects to select all non-model objects. Non-model objects are those that are not identified as part of the final geometric model that is used in generating a solution. Note: > To select all non-model objects: Choose Edit/Select/NonModel Objects. All non-model objects are highlighted, indicating that they have been selected. Edit/Deselect All You can define an object as a non-model object using the Edit/Attributes/ By Clicking command. Use the Edit/Deselect All commands to deselect any items that are currently selected. The following commands are available: Current Project All Projects Deselects all selected objects in the current project. Deselects all selected objects in all projects. Edit/Deselect All/Current Project > To deselect all selected items in the current project: Choose Edit/Deselect All/Current Project. All items that were selected in the current project are now unselected, and are no longer highlighted. To deselect individual items, click the left mouse button on them. Edit/Deselect All/All Projects > To deselect all selected items in all projects: Choose Edit/Deselect All/All Projects. All items that were selected in any project are now unselected, and are no longer highlighted. Maxwell Online Help System 94 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

130 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Attributes Use the Edit/Attributes commands to change the attributes of an item. The following commands are available: By Clicking Recolor Rename These attributes are set on an item-by-item basis. Edit/Attributes/By Clicking Change various object and text attributes, including names, crosshatching, color, text alignment, and so forth. Change the color of the selected items. Change the names of selected geometric objects. Choose Edit/Attributes/By Clicking to modify object and text attributes one item at a time. The following attributes may be changed: The name of a geometric object. Whether cross-hatches display on an object. Whether an object is used in the model from which a solution is generated. The color of a geometric object or text block. The text that s displayed in a text block. Text alignment about the insertion point. The angle at which text characters are slanted. > To change the attributes of an object or block of text in the active window: 1. Choose Edit/Attributes/By Clicking. The cursor changes to an upward-pointing arrow. 2. Click the left mouse button on the desired item. If you selected an object, the Object Attributes window appears. If you selected text, the Text Attributes window appears. 3. Change the desired object or text attributes. 4. Choose OK or press Return to change the item s attributes or Cancel to leave an item s attributes unchanged. 5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to change the attributes of other items. 6. Click the right mouse button to exit the command. Maxwell Online Help System 95 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

131 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Object Attributes When you select an object using Edit/Attributes/By Clicking, the following window appears: The following object attributes may be modified. Color This specifies the object s color. > To change the color: 1. Click on the box next to the Color field. A palette of colors appears. 2. Choose the desired color. For more information on defining which colors can be used in objects and text, refer to the document describing the Color Manager. Maxwell Online Help System 96 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

132 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Name This specifies the name of the object. > To change the name: 1. Click the left mouse button on the Name field. 2. Enter the new name for the object. Object names can be up to 15 characters long. They may only include alphanumeric characters (a-z, A-Z, and 0-9) and underscores ( _ ). You cannot assign the same name to more than one object. Model Object This determines whether the object is used in the final geometric model that is, whether material properties and ports are defined and a mesh generated for the object. By default, all objects are model objects. No materials or ports can be specified for non-model objects. These objects are saved with the rest of the geometry and remain a part of the geometric model; however, they are not used in generating a solution. > To toggle between model and non-model status for an object: Select Model Object. When this is selected the object is defined as a model object. When it is deselected, the object is defined as a non-model object. Maxwell Online Help System 97 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

133 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Show Hatches This determines whether hatches display on the object, as shown in the geometric objects illustrated below. Hatches mark the following points on an object: Vertex points. These points, which appear as square hatches, mark corner points on closed line objects or end points on open objects. Spline control points. These points, which appear as circular hatches, act as handles that allow you to change the shape of the spline curve. Segments in curved shapes. These points appear as small, straight hatches. By default, hatches are turned off. Displaying hatches is useful when you move an object s vertices or control points, insert vertices, delete edges, and so forth. It makes the vertex, control, and segment points on the object visible, allowing you to easily manipulate the object s geometry. > To toggle hatching on and off: Select Show Hatches. Show Orientation This determines whether the orientation of the object is displayed on the object. The initial orientation for every object is in the positive U direction. The orientation is indicated by an arrow pointing from the center of the object. By default, the orientation is not displayed. > To toggle the orientation on and off: Select Show Orientation. Maxwell Online Help System 98 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

134 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Text Attributes When you select text using Edit/Attributes/By Clicking, the following window appears. The following text attributes may be modified. Text This specifies the actual text that appears on the screen. > To change the text: 1. Click the left mouse button on the field Text. 2. Enter the new text. A line of text can be up to 50 characters long. Color This specifies the color of the text. > To change text color: 1. Click on the square next to the field Color. A palette of colors appears. 2. Choose the desired color. For more information on defining which colors can be used in objects and text, refer the document describing the Color Manager. Maxwell Online Help System 99 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

135 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Alignment This allows you to change the way in which text is aligned about the insertion point. > To change text alignment: 1. Select Alignment. The following options appear: left center right Text is lined up to the right of the insertion point. Text is centered on the insertion point (the default). Text is lined up to the left of the insertion point. 2. Choose the desired alignment. Slant This specifies the angle at which the characters in a line of text are slanted. Slanting the text produces the same effect as italics. > To change text slant: 1. Click the left mouse button in the Slant field. 2. Enter the desired slant angle. The angle must be between 45 and -45. The default slant is zero. Maxwell Online Help System 100 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

136 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Attributes/Recolor Choose Edit/Attributes/Recolor to change the color of the selected objects and text. You may select any color that s defined as part of the user color palette in the Color Manager. > To change the color of the selected items: 1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Edit/Attributes/Recolor. A pop-up window appears, displaying the current default drawing color in a square next to the field Color. 3. Click on the colored square. A palette of colors appears. 4. Choose the desired color. 5. Choose OK. The object and text colors are changed to match the one you selected. Maxwell Online Help System 101 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

137 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Attributes/Rename Choose Edit/Attributes/Rename to change the names of the selected geometric objects. > To rename the selected objects: 1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Edit/Attributes/Rename. The following window appears, listing the names of all selected objects in alphabetic and numeric order: 3. Select the object name you want to change. It automatically appears in the field below object list. 4. Enter the new name for the object. Object names may be up to 15 characters long. Note: Object names may only include alphanumeric characters (a-z, A-Z, and 0-9) and underscores ( _ ). You cannot assign the same name to more than one object. 5. Choose Rename. The object is renamed and the new name appears in the list box in the window. 6. To change the names of the other selected objects, repeat steps 3 through Choose OK. The window closes. Maxwell Online Help System 102 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

138 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Visibility Use the Edit/Visibility commands to hide or display items: Hide Selection Hide selected objects and text. By Item Specify, object by object, whether to display objects. Edit/Visibility/Hide Selection Choose Edit/Visibility/Hide Selection to hide selected objects and text. Hidden objects that are defined as model objects are included in the final geometric model, but are not visible. > To hide a selected item: 1. Select the objects and text to be hidden, either by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Edit/Visibility/Hide Selection. The selected objects and text are hidden. To redisplay them, use either the Edit/Visibility/By Item or Edit/Show All command. Maxwell Online Help System 103 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

139 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Visibility/By Item Choose Edit/Visibility/By Item to either hide or display items. > To hide or display items: 1. Choose Edit/Visibility/By Item. The following window appears: All object names and text appear in the box, and are set to either Yes or No. 2. To change the visibility status of an object, click the left mouse button on it to highlight it. Do one of the following: To hide an object, set it to No. To display an object, set it to Yes. 3. Choose OK when you are finished changing the settings. The objects are then hidden or displayed accordingly. To redisplay all objects, choose Edit/Show All. Maxwell Online Help System 104 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

140 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/Show All Choose Edit/Show All to display all objects and text that have been made invisible with one of the Edit/Visibility commands. All items created for the current project appear in the window. Edit/Insert Row Parametric table only. Choose Edit/Insert Row to add a row to the table. If you have no cells selected, this command adds a row to the bottom of the table. If you have one or more cells selected, this command adds a table row above the current selection. The cells in the inserted rows take their values from the nominal problem. Edit/Delete Row Parametric table only. Choose Edit/Delete Row to delete the selected rows from the table. > To do this: 1. Select the rows you wish to delete. To select an entire row at once, click on its setup heading at the left edge of the table. 2. Choose Edit/Delete Row. The selected cells are completely removed from the table. Edit/Duplicate Row Parametric table only. Choose Edit/Duplicate Row to duplicate rows in the parametric table. > To duplicate table rows: 1. Select the row to duplicate. 2. Choose Edit/Duplicate Row. The row appears above the selected one. Maxwell Online Help System 105 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

141 Edit Menu Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Undo Edit/Redo Edit/Cut Edit/Copy Edit/Paste Edit/Clear Edit/Duplicate Edit/Select Edit/Deselect All Edit/Attributes Edit/Visibility Edit/Show All Edit/Insert Row Edit/Delete Row Edit/Duplicate Row Edit/External Circuit Maxwell 2D Edit Menu Edit/External Circuit Transient solver only. External Circuit Connection Choose Edit/External Circuit to define an external circuit connection in the 2D model. Edit External Connection > To edit an external circuit: 1. Choose Edit/External Circuit. The Edit External Circuit window appears: 2. Select the externally connected winding to edit from the Winding list. Each winding is listed with any associated inductors in the circuit. You must have a defined winding and an external connection boundary assigned to your model. 3. Select Create new circuit to create a new circuit from the selected winding, or Edit existing circuit to modify the selected winding. 4. Choose Launch Schematic Capture to edit the winding with Ansoft s Schematic Capture utility. Once you have finished completing the circuit model, choose File/ Exit from Schematic Capture to return to this window. Refer to Schematic Capture s online documentation for more details on this utility. 5. Choose OK to complete the command. Maxwell Online Help System 106 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

142 Reshape Menu Reshape Commands Reshape/Scale Selection Reshape/Vertex Reshape/Vertex/Move Reshape/Vertex/Align Reshape/Vertex/Insert Reshape/Edge Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments Reshape/Edge/Delete Object Stitching Maxwell 2D Reshape Menu Reshape Menu Use the Reshape commands to change the shape of geometric objects by: Changing their scale. Moving, aligning, or inserting vertex points. Deleting an edge of an object. Changing the number of arc segments in a curved edge. When you choose Reshape from the menu bar, the following menu appears: Maxwell Online Help System 107 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

143 Reshape Menu Reshape Commands Reshape/Scale Selection Reshape/Vertex Reshape/Vertex/Move Reshape/Vertex/Align Reshape/Vertex/Insert Reshape/Edge Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments Reshape/Edge/Delete Object Stitching Maxwell 2D Reshape Menu Reshape Commands The function of each Reshape command is as follows: Scale Selection Changes the scale of a geometric object or text. Vertex Moves, aligns, and inserts object vertices or the control points of splines. Performs the following operations on object vertices or the control points of splines: Move Moves a vertex point or spline control point. Align Aligns two vertices (or control points) according to their local or global coordinates. Insert Inserts a vertex point on an edge of an object. Edge Changes the number of segments or edges in a selected object. Performs the following functions on object edges: Number of Changes the number of arc segments in a curved Segments edge. Delete Removes an edge of an object. Note: Before using the Reshape commands to modify objects, display the vertices and control points of the desired objects using Edit/Attributes/By Clicking. You may also use this command to display hatches over vertices and control points, which makes moving, adding, or deleting vertices and control points easier. Maxwell Online Help System 108 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

144 Reshape Menu Reshape Commands Reshape/Scale Selection Reshape/Vertex Reshape/Vertex/Move Reshape/Vertex/Align Reshape/Vertex/Insert Reshape/Edge Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments Reshape/Edge/Delete Object Stitching Maxwell 2D Reshape Menu Reshape/Scale Selection Choose Reshape/Scale Selection to change the scale of an object s dimensions or the size of the characters in a block of text. The following figure shows an object before and after scaling. Notice that the object is positioned differently depending on which anchor point you selected when scaling it: Anchor Pt. Scale x 0.5 Anchor Pt. Original Scale x 2 > To rescale the dimensions of an object or a line of text: 1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by using one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Reshape/Scale Selection. 3. Move the mouse to the desired point and click the left mouse button. (Alternatively, select the points with the keyboard.) A pop-up window appears, showing the Scale Factor field. 4. Enter the desired scale factor. 5. Choose OK or press Return. Selected items are then rescaled about the anchor point. For example, if you specify 2 as a scale factor for a geometric object, object vertices are moved so that the distance between them and the anchor point is doubled, making the object twice as large. On the other hand, if you specify 0.5 as the scale factor, object vertices are moved so that the distance between them and the anchor point is halved, making the object half as large. Maxwell Online Help System 109 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

145 Reshape Menu Reshape Commands Reshape/Scale Selection Reshape/Vertex Reshape/Vertex/Move Reshape/Vertex/Align Reshape/Vertex/Insert Reshape/Edge Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments Reshape/Edge/Delete Object Stitching Maxwell 2D Reshape Menu Reshape/Vertex The Reshape/Vertex commands are: Move Align Insert Vertex points mark the corners or end points of objects. Spline control points, the points that you entered when drawing the spline, act as handles for reshaping the spline. To display hatches on object vertex or control points, choose Edit/Attributes/By Clicking. Reshape/Vertex/Move Moves a vertex point or spline control point. Aligns two vertices or control points according to their coordinates. Inserts a vertex point on the edge of an object. Choose Reshape/Vertex/Move to move a vertex or control point, changing the shape of an object. > To move a vertex or control point: 1. Choose Reshape/Vertex/Move. 2. Click the left mouse button on the desired vertex or control point. 3. Move the mouse to the new vertex point and click the left mouse button. (Alternatively, select the points with the keyboard.) The object is redrawn with the vertex in the new location. 4. To move additional vertices, repeat steps 2 and To exit the Reshape/Vertex/Move command, click the right mouse button. Maxwell Online Help System 110 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

146 Reshape Menu Reshape Commands Reshape/Scale Selection Reshape/Vertex Reshape/Vertex/Move Reshape/Vertex/Align Reshape/Vertex/Insert Reshape/Edge Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments Reshape/Edge/Delete Object Stitching Maxwell 2D Reshape Menu Reshape/Vertex/Align Choose Reshape/Vertex/Align to align two vertices or control points so that one or both coordinates of the first point are changed to match those of the second point. A vertex or control point may be aligned with another point in the same object, or with a point in a different object. For example, to make the object on the right look like the object on the left, align the v-coordinate of Point B with the v-coordinate of Point A. Point B Point A More You would not obtain the same results if you attempted to align the global y-coordinate of Point B with the global y-coordinate of Point A. > To align two vertices or control points: 1. Choose Reshape/Vertex/Align. 2. Select the vertex to which the first point is to be aligned. This vertex can be on the same object or on another object. The following window appears: 3. To select how the vertices are to be aligned: Choose U to force the first vertex to have the same u-coordinate as the second. Maxwell Online Help System 111 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

147 Reshape Menu Reshape Commands Reshape/Scale Selection Reshape/Vertex Reshape/Vertex/Move Reshape/Vertex/Align Reshape/Vertex/Insert Reshape/Edge Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments Reshape/Edge/Delete Object Stitching Maxwell 2D Reshape Menu Choose V to force the first vertex to have the same v-coordinate as the second. Choose both U and V to force the vertices to have the same u- and v-coordinates. To align the vertex points according to their local R and θ coordinates substitute R and Theta for U and V in the above instructions. If specifying R and Theta coordinates, first use the command Window/Grid to display a polar grid. To align the vertex points according to their global abscissa and ordinate substitute Abscissa and Ordinate for U and V in the above instructions. 4. Choose OK or press Return. The object is redrawn with the vertex in the new location. 5. To align additional vertices on the same object or on other objects, repeat steps 2 through Click the right mouse button to exit the command. Note: If you align the vertices of open object so that it forms a closed object a new object to be created. The names and colors of such objects are automatically assigned; pop-up windows for naming the new objects do not appear. To change the names and colors of these objects, use the Edit/Attributes commands. Maxwell Online Help System 112 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

148 Reshape Menu Reshape Commands Reshape/Scale Selection Reshape/Vertex Reshape/Vertex/Move Reshape/Vertex/Align Reshape/Vertex/Insert Reshape/Edge Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments Reshape/Edge/Delete Object Stitching Maxwell 2D Reshape Menu Reshape/Vertex/Insert Choose Reshape/Vertex/Insert to insert a vertex point on the edge of a geometric object. Vertex points can be inserted on any type of object, whether curved or angular. > To insert a vertex point on an edge of an object: 1. Choose Edit/Attributes/By Clicking to display hatches on the vertices of the desired object. If you do not display hatches, you may be inserting vertices without knowing it. 2. Choose Reshape/Vertex/Insert. 3. Do one of the following to insert a vertex point: To insert a vertex point at the intersection of overlapping lines, click the left mouse button on the intersection. Note: You cannot insert a vertex point at the intersection of two lines if one or both are splines. To insert a vertex point on an edge of an object, click the left mouse button on the edge. 4. To insert another vertex, repeat step Click the right mouse button to exit the command. Maxwell Online Help System 113 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

149 Reshape Menu Reshape Commands Reshape/Scale Selection Reshape/Vertex Reshape/Vertex/Move Reshape/Vertex/Align Reshape/Vertex/Insert Reshape/Edge Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments Reshape/Edge/Delete Object Stitching Maxwell 2D Reshape Menu Reshape/Edge Use the Reshape/Edge commands to: Number of Segments Delete The following figure illustrates the effect of these commands on geometric objects: Original Objects 36 Segments Changes the number of arc segments in curved edges of objects such as circles, splines, and so forth. Removes an edge of an object. 9 Segments Modified Objects Deleted Edge More Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments Choose Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments to: Change the number of segments in a curved edge of an object. Change the angle between segments in circles and arcs. The 2D Modeler uses a series of line segments to represent curved shapes. When you create a curved object, it prompts you to enter the number of line segments used to approximate the curve. For circles and arcs, it also prompts you to enter the angle (in degrees) between each segment of the curve. Changing the number of segments or the angle between each segment allows you to adjust the appearance and shape of curved objects as follows: Increasing the number of segments or decreasing the angle between each segment produces smoother curves, but makes the model more complex. Decreasing the number of segments or increasing the angle between each segment produces angular shapes that do not look very much like curves, but can reduce the complexity of the geometric model. Maxwell Online Help System 114 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

150 Reshape Menu Reshape Commands Reshape/Scale Selection Reshape/Vertex Reshape/Vertex/Move Reshape/Vertex/Align Reshape/Vertex/Insert Reshape/Edge Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments Reshape/Edge/Delete Object Stitching Maxwell 2D Reshape Menu > To change the number of arc segments in a curved object: 1. Choose Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments. 2. Click the left mouse button on the desired curved object or edge. Clicking on a geometric object with straight edges has no effect. A window appears, displaying the following fields: Number of segments Angular Increment Shows the current number of arc segments. For circles and circular arcs, shows the angle (in degrees) between each arc segment. 3. Enter the new number of segments or the new angle between each segment. In general, you should specify a new value for only one of these fields. Changing the angle between each segment automatically changes the number of segments in the curve (and vice versa). 4. Choose OK or press Return. The curve is redrawn. 5. To change the number of segments in another curved edge, repeat steps 2 through Click the right mouse button to exit the command. Maxwell Online Help System 115 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

151 Reshape Menu Reshape Commands Reshape/Scale Selection Reshape/Vertex Reshape/Vertex/Move Reshape/Vertex/Align Reshape/Vertex/Insert Reshape/Edge Reshape/Edge/Number of Segments Reshape/Edge/Delete Object Stitching Maxwell 2D Reshape Menu Reshape/Edge/Delete Choose Reshape/Edge/Delete to delete an edge of a geometric object. Note: Circles, splines, and arcs are only considered to have one edge. If you delete what appears to be one segment of a curved edge, the entire curve, spline, or arc is deleted. > To delete an edge: 1. Choose Reshape/Edge/Delete. 2. Click the left mouse button on the desired edge. The edge is deleted. 3. To delete other edges on the same object or other objects, repeat step Click the right mouse button to exit the command. Object Stitching Be careful when deleting the edges of adjacent objects. If deleting an edge results in the free vertices of adjacent objects being joined, the two objects are stitched together as one. Maxwell Online Help System 116 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

152 Boolean Menu Boolean Commands Boolean/Union Boolean/Subtract Boolean/Intersect Boolean/Simplify Maxwell 2D Boolean Menu Boolean Menu Use the Boolean commands to: Unite overlapping objects. Subtract one object from another. Multiple objects may be subtracted. Intersect overlapping objects. The area shared by the overlapping objects becomes the new object. Remove extra vertices on the objects created from a boolean operation. When you choose Boolean from the menu bar, the following menu appears: Maxwell Online Help System 117 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

153 Boolean Menu Boolean Commands Boolean/Union Boolean/Subtract Boolean/Intersect Boolean/Simplify Maxwell 2D Boolean Menu Boolean Commands The function of each Boolean command is as follows: Union Subtract Intersect Simplify Unites two or more overlapping objects. Subtracts one or more objects from another object or objects. Creates a new object from the intersecting region of two or more overlapping objects. Removes any extra vertices on edges of objects created through a boolean operation. All Boolean commands apply only to the active project window. Maxwell Online Help System 118 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

154 Boolean Menu Boolean Commands Boolean/Union Boolean/Subtract Boolean/Intersect Boolean/Simplify Maxwell 2D Boolean Menu Boolean/Union Choose Boolean/Union to unite two or more overlapping objects. The following graphic demonstrates the simplest case of a union. Two overlapping objects are united to form one object. > To unite overlapping objects: 1. Select the overlapping objects that you wish to unite by clicking on them or using the Edit/Select commands. When selecting objects, keep the following in mind: The more objects you union, the longer the operation takes. Open objects may not be united. 2. Choose Boolean/Union. The selected overlapping objects combine to form one object. The combined objects are not deleted; they are defined as non-model objects and hidden from view. 3. In the window that appears, select the color and enter the name of the object. Note: 4. Choose OK. If you have multiple objects that were created from the boolean operation, toggle Select on or off to select or deselect the object. If you are entering your own names, this allows you to view the object you are naming. Objects remain selected after you choose OK. Maxwell Online Help System 119 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

155 Boolean Menu Boolean Commands Boolean/Union Boolean/Subtract Boolean/Intersect Boolean/Simplify Maxwell 2D Boolean Menu Boolean/Subtract Choose Boolean/Subtract to subtract an object (or objects) from another object (or objects). The following graphic demonstrates the simplest case of a subtraction. An object is subtracted from a base object to form a new object. Base Object Overlapping Region Object to Subtract > To subtract overlapping objects: 1. Choose Boolean/Subtract. The following window appears: More 2. Select the one of the following selection modes: By Item By Area By Name Maxwell Online Help System 120 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

156 Boolean Menu Boolean Commands Boolean/Union Boolean/Subtract Boolean/Intersect Boolean/Simplify Maxwell 2D Boolean Menu Note: 3. Choose Select Base Objects to select the base object or objects you wish to subtract objects from. After you choose Select Base Objects, the Subtract Objects window disappears and you may select the objects using the selection mode chosen in the previous step. When selecting objects, note the following: The more objects you subtract, the longer the operation takes. Open objects may not be subtracted. When you have finished selecting the base objects, click the right mouse button anywhere in the project window to return to the Subtract Objects window. A check mark indicates that base objects have been selected. 4. Choose Select Objects to Subtract to select the objects you wish to subtract from the base objects. When you finish selecting the objects to subtract, click the right mouse button anywhere in the project window to return to the Subtract Objects window. A check mark indicates that objects to subtract have been selected. Note: 5. Choose Perform Subtraction to subtract the selected objects from the base objects. A new object is created which looks like the base object minus the shared overlap. The objects subtracted are not deleted, they are defined as non-model objects and hidden from view. 6. In the window that appears, select the color and enter the name of the object. Note: 7. Choose OK. Use the Change View commands Zoom In, Zoom Out, and Fit All to modify the view of the geometry and make selecting objects easier. If you wish to change the base objects or objects to subtract, use one of the Clear buttons to deselect the objects. You may then reselect the base objects or objects to subtract. If you have multiple objects that were created from the boolean operation, toggle Select on or off to select or deselect the object. If you are entering your own names, this allows you to view the object you are naming. Objects remain selected after you choose OK. Maxwell Online Help System 121 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

157 Boolean Menu Boolean Commands Boolean/Union Boolean/Subtract Boolean/Intersect Boolean/Simplify Maxwell 2D Boolean Menu Boolean/Intersect Choose Boolean/Intersect to create a new object from the intersecting region of two or more overlapping objects. The following graphic demonstrates the simplest case of an intersect. Two overlapping objects are intersected to form one object. Intersecting Region > To intersect overlapping objects: 1. Select the overlapping objects that you wish to intersect by clicking on them or using the Edit/Select commands. When selecting objects, keep the following in mind: The more objects you intersect, the longer the operation takes. Open objects may not be intersected. 2. Choose Boolean/Intersect. The area shared by the overlapping objects becomes a new object. The overlapping objects are not deleted, they are defined as nonmodel objects and hidden from view. A window appears. 3. Choose the color and enter the name of the object. Note: 4. Choose OK. If you have multiple objects that were created from the boolean operation, toggle Select on or off to select or deselect the object. If you are entering your own names, this allows you to view the object you are naming. Objects remain selected after you choose OK. Maxwell Online Help System 122 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

158 Boolean Menu Boolean Commands Boolean/Union Boolean/Subtract Boolean/Intersect Boolean/Simplify Maxwell 2D Boolean Menu Boolean/Simplify Choose Boolean/Simplify to remove extraneous vertices that remain along an edge after you perform a boolean operation. When you perform a boolean operation, the object created may have a vertex on an edge, as the following graphic demonstrates. Vertices on edges. A vertex on an edge divides the edge into multiple line segments. Maxwell Online Help System 123 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

159 Arrange Menu Arrange Commands Arrange/Move Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard By Entering Offsets Arrange/Rotate Arrange/Mirror Maxwell 2D Arrange Menu Arrange Menu Use the Arrange commands to do the following: Move objects and text. Rotate objects and text. Mirror objects and text about a line. When you choose Arrange from the menu bar, the following menu appears: Arrange Commands The function of each Arrange command is as follows: Move Moves the selected items by the distance you specify. Rotate Rotates the selected items about a center point by the angle you specify. Mirror Mirrors the selected items about a line. The Arrange commands only move, rotate, or mirror objects. They cannot be used to copy objects. If you wish to move, rotate, or mirror a copy of an object, use the Edit/Duplicate commands. Note: The Arrange commands are accessible only if the objects on which they can operate have been selected. Maxwell Online Help System 124 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

160 Arrange Menu Arrange Commands Arrange/Move Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard By Entering Offsets Arrange/Rotate Arrange/Mirror Maxwell 2D Arrange Menu Arrange/Move Choose Arrange/Move to move the selected objects or text. The items can be moved in one of the following ways: By picking and moving the items with the mouse. By entering the cartesian or polar coordinates where the items are to be moved. By entering the new location of the items as offsets from their current location. The exact method you use depends on the way your geometric model is set up and your personal preference. Using the Mouse > To move the selected items using the mouse: 1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by picking them with one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Arrange/Move. 3. Select a point to serve as a base (anchor) point. Click the left mouse button on the point you wish to be the anchor point. 4. Click the left mouse button on the target point. All selected items are moved the distance determined by the offset between the base point and target point. To move copies of the objects instead of the originals, choose Edit/ Duplicate/Along Line. Maxwell Online Help System 125 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

161 Arrange Menu Arrange Commands Arrange/Move Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard By Entering Offsets Arrange/Rotate Arrange/Mirror Maxwell 2D Arrange Menu Using the Keyboard > To move the selected items using the keyboard: 1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or by picking them with one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Arrange/Move. 3. Enter the coordinates of the base (anchor) point in the U and V or R and Theta fields. By default, these fields show the coordinates of the center point of the selected items. 4. Select a target point by entering its coordinates with the keyboard. All selected items are moved the distance determined by the offset between the base point and target point. To move copies of the objects instead of the originals, use the Edit/ Duplicate/Along Line command. By Entering Offsets Fields for du and dv also appear in the status bar. (Polar grids display dr and Angle fields.) These fields allow you to move the object using offsets from the current point. > To move the selected items by entering offsets: 1. Select the desired items by clicking on them or with one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Arrange/Move. 3. In the du field, enter the distance in the u direction that the items are to be moved. If a polar grid is displayed, enter the R distance in the dr field. 4. In the dv (or Angle) field, enter the distance in the v direction that the items are to be moved. 5. Choose Enter or press Return. The objects are moved the specified distance. Maxwell Online Help System 126 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

162 Arrange Menu Arrange Commands Arrange/Move Using the Mouse Using the Keyboard By Entering Offsets Arrange/Rotate Arrange/Mirror Maxwell 2D Arrange Menu Arrange/Rotate Choose Arrange/Rotate to rotate the selected objects or text in the counter-clockwise direction about a center point. > To rotate items about a center point: 1. Select the desired items by either clicking on them or by picking them with one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Arrange/Rotate. 3. Move the cursor to the point about which the item is to be rotated and click the left mouse button. The Rotate Selection window appears, which allows you to enter the angle of rotation for the selected objects. 4. Enter the angle of rotation in the Angle field. 5. Choose OK or press Return. The selected item (or group of items) is then rotated counter-clockwise about the pivot point by the specified angle. To rotate copies of objects, use the Edit/Duplicate/Along Arc command. Arrange/Mirror Choose Arrange/Mirror command to mirror selected objects or text about a line. > To mirror items about a line: 1. Select the desired items by either clicking on them or by picking them with one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Arrange/Mirror. 3. Click the left mouse button on the first point in the mirror line. 4. Click the left mouse button on the second point in the mirror line. The selected items are then mirrored about the line you entered. Note: Mirrored text is not reversed; rather, it is moved to the other side of the mirror line. To copy objects across a mirror line, use the Edit/Duplicate/Mirror Duplicate command. Maxwell Online Help System 127 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

163 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Object Menu Use the Object commands to do the following: Draw open objects such as arcs and lines. Draw closed objects such as circles, rectangles, and other polygons. Add text to a model. When you choose Object from the 2D Modeler menu bar, the following menu appears: Maxwell Online Help System 128 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

164 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Object Commands The function of each Object command is as follows: Polyline Arc Spline Text Rectangle Circle Spiral Draws a multiple-segment line, the ends of which can be joined to form a closed object. Draws a clockwise or counter-clockwise arc. Clockwise Draws a clockwise arc. Counter-Clockwise Draws a counter-clockwise arc. Draws an open or closed spline curve. Adds text to a geometric model so that objects and regions in the model are labeled. Draws a rectangle. Draws a circle by specifying the following: 2 Point The center and radius of the circle. 3 Point Three points on the circumference of the circle. Draws a spiral by specifying the following: Rectangular Draws a rectangular spiral. Circle Draws a circular spiral. All Object commands apply only to the active project window. Objects can be drawn in any subwindow belonging to the active project, however. Maxwell Online Help System 129 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

165 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Open Objects Closed Objects Entering Points from the Keyboard Picking Points in Several Subwindows Overlapping Objects Self-Intersecting Objects Modeling Thin Objects Importing Complex Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Objects All geometric models that you create are simply a collection of objects. The final geometric model must have no overlapping objects (unless one object is entirely within another). Open Objects Open Objects Closed Objects Open objects are polylines, arcs, and splines, or any combination thereof that have not yet been closed to form the boundary of an object. Create them using these commands: Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Generally, open objects are used as temporary objects from which to create complex closed objects. Maxwell Online Help System 130 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

166 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Open Objects Closed Objects Entering Points from the Keyboard Picking Points in Several Subwindows Overlapping Objects Self-Intersecting Objects Modeling Thin Objects Importing Complex Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Closed Objects Closed objects are objects with boundaries that enclose a region. All closed objects are automatically saved as part of the geometric model after you choose File/Save. Simple Closed Objects Simple closed objects such as rectangles and circles are created with the following commands: Object/Rectangle Object/Circle/2 Point Object/Circle/3 Point Each of the above commands results in a simple closed object. In addition, the Object/ Polyline and Object/Spline commands can be used to create more complicated closed objects. Complex Closed Objects A complex closed object is one created by joining open objects to enclose an area. For example, to turn an open object into a closed object, choose Object/Polyline and create a polyline that connects the end points of the open object. Entering Points from the Keyboard In the sections that describe the commands of the Object menu, it is assumed that you will use the mouse to select points. However, if you need to enter coordinates with greater precision than the mouse provides, or to choose points between grid and mouse snaps, you can enter coordinates directly from the keyboard. Maxwell Online Help System 131 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

167 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Open Objects Closed Objects Entering Points from the Keyboard Picking Points in Several Subwindows Overlapping Objects Self-Intersecting Objects Modeling Thin Objects Importing Complex Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Picking Points in Several Subwindows You can select points for objects from different subwindows. The software uses the local coordinate system in each subwindow to place the points. When using Object/Rectangle, keep in mind that as you move the mouse between subwindows, the rectangle s alignment changes to match that of the local coordinate system. For example, objects A and B were both created using the Object/Rectangle command. However, object B is rotated because its second point was picked from the subwindow with the rotated grid. Maxwell Online Help System 132 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

168 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Open Objects Closed Objects Entering Points from the Keyboard Picking Points in Several Subwindows Overlapping Objects Self-Intersecting Objects Modeling Thin Objects Importing Complex Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Overlapping Objects Objects cannot partially overlap. The software checks for overlapping objects when each object is created. If overlapping objects are present, the following message appears: Warning: Overlapping objects created. The software checks for overlapping objects again when you exit. If your final model contains overlapping objects, you will be unable to use it in any Maxwell 2D software package. To reposition overlapping objects, use the Arrange and Edit commands. Alternatively, choose Edit/Attributes/By Clicking and declare the overlapping objects as non-model objects that will not be used in a solution. To unite, subtract, or intersect the overlapping objects, use the Boolean commands. In cases where one object is entirely contained inside another object, the material assigned to the outer object stops at the boundary of the inner object. Assign material characteristics to the two objects using the normal procedure. Self-Intersecting Objects If you cross over a line or arc segment while using the Object/Polyline, Object/Spline, or Object/Arc commands (or a combination thereof), the message appears, warning you that you have created a self-intersecting object. To the software, a self-intersecting object is an object that has been twisted or folded over onto itself the system cannot determine what surface represents the inside surface of the object. If you attempt to solve using a geometric model that contains self-intersecting objects in a Maxwell 2D software package, the system cannot converge on an accurate solution. To modify self-intersecting objects, use the Reshape commands. Alternatively, use the Edit/Attributes/By Clicking command to declare the self-intersecting objects as nonmodel objects that will not be used in a solution. Maxwell Online Help System 133 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

169 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Open Objects Closed Objects Entering Points from the Keyboard Picking Points in Several Subwindows Overlapping Objects Self-Intersecting Objects Modeling Thin Objects Importing Complex Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Modeling Thin Objects If an object is extremely thin, such as a ground conductor, modeling it using its actual dimensions might not be appropriate. In a Maxwell 2D software package, the electromagnetic field solution for the model may not converge if objects with very tiny dimensions (as compared to the other objects in the model) are included in the geometry. Therefore, model thin ground planes using a zero-area closed object. Such traces can be modeled by using the Object/Polyline command to create a line that folds back onto itself. Importing Complex Objects You can import complex objects, such as ellipses, that you cannot otherwise create in the software from PlotData. > To import or open a.sm2 file created in PlotData: 1. Choose File/Import or File/Open to import or open the.sm2 file. 2. If you are opening or importing an open object, use any of the Object commands listed in the Open Objects section to create closed 2D objects. 3. If you wish to modify the 2D objects, use the following commands to edit them: Use the Edit commands to cut, paste, select, display, and copy objects. Use the Reshape commands to scale and change the shape of geometric objects. Use the Arrange commands to move, rotate, and mirror objects. Use the Boolean commands to unite, intersect, or subtract objects. Maxwell Online Help System 134 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

170 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Object/Polyline Choose Object/Polyline to draw an object with one or more straight segments. This command can be used to draw closed or open objects. It can also be used to connect the ends of an open object, turning it into a closed object. > To draw a polyline: 1. Choose Object/Polyline. 2. Move the mouse to the first point in the line and click the left mouse button to enter the point. The du and dv fields appear below the status bar allowing you to enter the U and V offset of the next point in the polyline using the keyboard, rather than the mouse. 3. Choose the next point in the line, using either the keyboard or mouse. Notice that the system draws a line that follows the cursor. 4. Repeat step 3 for each point to be entered. Note: If you make a mistake while picking points for the polyline, click the right mouse button to delete the last point that was entered. 5. To complete the line and exit the Object/Polyline command, double-click the left mouse button on the final point in the line. If the line segment forms a closed object, the software prompts you to specify a name and a color for the object. To turn an open object into a closed object, create a new polyline that connects the end points of the open object. Note: To specify a name and color for an open object, use the Edit/Attributes commands. Maxwell Online Help System 135 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

171 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Object/Arc Use the Object/Arc commands to draw a circular arc: Clockwise Draws an arc in the clockwise direction. Counter-Clockwise Draws an arc in the counter-clockwise direction. The two types of arcs are shown below. Start Point Start Point Center End Point Center End Point More Counter-Clockwise Arc Clockwise Arc Notice the difference in the arcs, even though they have similar center points, start points, and end points. > To create an arc: 1. Choose one of the following commands: Object/Arc/Clockwise Object/Arc/Counter-Clockwise 2. Choose the center of the arc using the keyboard or the mouse. The du and dv fields appear, allowing you to use the keyboard to specify the arc s starting point. 3. Choose the arc s start point. The du and dv fields are reset, allowing you to use the keyboard to enter the arc s endpoint. 4. Choose the arc s end point. The following window appears: 5. Do one of the following: Maxwell Online Help System 136 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

172 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Enter a value for the number of segments. Because all curves are represented by a series of line segments, you need to specify the desired number of segments. For instance, specifying a value of 15 for a 90 arc creates an approximation to the arc consisting of 15 line segments with each line segment comprising 6 of the arc. The value of 6 automatically appears in the field Angular Increment. Alternatively, specify the angular increment. Doing so automatically adjusts the Number of segments. Generally, accept the default values for these fields. Using too few segments can result in an arc that is not very smooth, and using too many segments can unnecessarily complicate a geometry. 6. Choose OK or press Return. The arc is then drawn in the clockwise or counter-clockwise direction. Maxwell Online Help System 137 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

173 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Object/Spline Choose Object/Spline to draw a curved line. You can use this command to: Draw closed or open objects. Connect the ends of an open object, turning it into a closed object. > To draw a spline: 1. Choose Object/Spline. 2. Move the mouse to the first point in the spline and click the left mouse button to enter the point. The du and dv fields appear below the status bar allowing you to enter the U and V offset of the next point in the polyline using the keyboard, rather than the mouse. 3. Choose the next point in the line, using either the keyboard or mouse. Notice that the system draws a line that follows the cursor. 4. Repeat step 3 for each point to be entered. 5. Double-click the left mouse button on the final point in the line. The following window appears: 6. Enter a value for the number of segments. Because all curves are represented by a series of line segments, you need to specify the desired number of segments. For instance, specify a value of 20 to approximate the spline as a polyline with 20 line segments. 7. Choose OK or press Return. If the curved line forms a closed object, the software prompts you to specify a name and a color for the object. To turn an open object into a closed object with this command, create a spline that connects the end points of the open object. Note: To specify a name and color for an open object, use the Edit/Attributes commands. Maxwell Online Help System 138 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

174 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Scaling Text Generating Screen Captures Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Object/Text Choose Object/Text to add text to a geometric model. Such text, which is saved with the geometric model, is generally used for labels that can be included in screen captures. > To add text to the model: 1. Choose Object/Text. The following window appears. 2. Enter the desired label or comment in the Text field. Text can be any length; however, be aware that a long line of text will not automatically wrap to a second line if the text extends outside the drawing space. 3. Specify how to align the text about the insertion point. The current alignment choice appears next to the field Alignment. To change the text alignment: a. Click the left mouse button on the alignment. Doing so displays the following options: left The first character of the string is flush left at the insertion point. center The string is centered on the insertion point. This is the default. right The last character of the string is flush right at the insertion point. b. Choose the desired alignment from the menu. 4. Choose OK or press Return. 5. Click the left mouse button on the point where you want to place the text. The text appears in the desired location using the alignment you specified. Maxwell Online Help System 139 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

175 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Scaling Text Generating Screen Captures Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Scaling Text To change the default text size, use Model/Defaults/Text Size. All text that is subsequently added to the model will use the size that you specify. To change the size of text that is currently displayed in the model, use the Reshape/Scale Selection command to change the scale of the text. Generating Screen Captures Text is generally used to label objects and annotate a geometric model for a screen capture. Refer to the document describing the Print Manager for instructions on how to print a hardcopy of a screen brought up in the Maxwell software. Maxwell Online Help System 140 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

176 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Object/Rectangle Choose Object/Rectangle to draw a rectangle by selecting two diagonally opposite corners. > To create a rectangle: 1. Choose Object/Rectangle. The cursor changes to crosshairs. 2. Choose the first diagonal corner. Do one of the following: Click the left mouse button on the point. Enter coordinates of the point using the keyboard. When you choose the first diagonal, the du and dv fields appear below the status bar, allowing you to enter the offset distance to the second diagonal of the rectangle. 3. Choose the second diagonal corner using either the mouse or the keyboard. A window appears with fields for entering the name and color of the object. 4. Specify the name and color of the rectangle. 5. Choose OK. Note: If you are picking the rectangle s corners from subwindows with different uvaxes orientations, the rectangle will be aligned with the uv-axes in the subwindow from which the second corner was picked. Maxwell Online Help System 141 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

177 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Circle/2 Point Object/Circle/3 Point Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Object/Circle Use the Object/Circle commands to draw a circle: 2 Point Draws a circle by specifying the center and radius. 3 Point Draws a circle by specifying three points on the circumference. Object/Circle/2 Point Choose Object/Circle/2 Point to draw a circle by specifying its center point and radius. > To draw a two-point circle: 1. Choose Object/Circle/2 Point. New fields appear below the status bar. 2. Choose the center of the circle using either the mouse or keyboard. 3. Choose a point on the circle s circumference or enter the radius of the circle in the Rad field. If you are using the mouse, when the mouse moves, the modeler sketches a line from the center point to show the circle s radius. Once the radius has been defined, the following window appears: More 4. Do one of the following: Enter a value for the number of segments. Because all curves are represented by a series of line segments, you need to specify the desired number of segments. For instance, specify a value of 20 to approximate the circle as a polygon with 20 line segments, with each line segment comprising 18 of the circle. Changing the Number of segments automatically adjusts the Angular increment. The minimum number of segments that you can enter is eight. Specify the angular increment. Changing the Angular increment automatically adjusts the Number of segments. The maximum Angular increment that you can enter is 45. As shown in the following figure, there is a trade-off between circles approximated with too few and too many segments. If too few segments are specified, the result is a shape that doesn t look much like a circle. If too many segments are specified, Maxwell Online Help System 142 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

178 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Circle/2 Point Object/Circle/3 Point Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu the model becomes more complicated than necessary, resulting in increased computing requirements. Therefore, in most cases accept the default Segments Segments 24 Segments 5. Choose OK or press Return to complete the command. A window appears with fields for entering the name and color of the object. 6. Specify the name and color of the object. 7. Choose OK. Maxwell Online Help System 143 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

179 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Circle/2 Point Object/Circle/3 Point Object/Spiral Maxwell 2D Object Menu Object/Circle/3 Point Choose Object/Circle/3 Point to draw a circle by selecting three points on its circumference. > To draw a three-point circle: 1. Choose Object/Circle/3 Point. 2. Move the mouse to the first point on the circle s circumference and click the left mouse button. After you do, an x appears on the screen, marking the point s location. The du and dv fields also appear, allowing you to use the keyboard to define the second point on the circumference of the circle. 3. Choose the second point on the circle s circumference. After you do, an x appears on the screen, marking the point s location. The du and dv fields are reset, allowing you to use the keyboard to enter the coordinates of the third circumference point 4. Move the mouse to the third and final point on the circle s circumference and click the left mouse button. After you do, a window with the following fields appears: Number of segments Angular increment 5. Enter either the desired number of segments or the angular increment in the same way as described for the Object/Circle/2 Point command. The minimum number of segments that you can enter to approximate a circle is eight. 6. Choose OK or press the Return key to complete the command. The New Object window appears with fields for entering the name and color of the object. 7. Enter the name of the new circle. 8. Choose the color of the new circle. 9. Choose OK. The window closes. Maxwell Online Help System 144 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

180 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Object/Spiral/Rectangular Square Corners Rounded Corners Mitered Corners Object/Spiral/Circular Maxwell 2D Object Menu Object/Spiral Use the Object/Spiral commands to draw two types of spirals: Rectangular Circular Object/Spiral/Rectangular Draws a rectangular spiral. Draws a circular spiral. Choose Object/Spiral/Rectangular to draw a rectangular spiral. > To draw a rectangular spiral: 1. Choose Object/Spiral/Rectangular. The following window appears: More 2. Select the direction in which to generate the spiral Clockwise or Counter- Maxwell Online Help System 145 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

181 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Object/Spiral/Rectangular Square Corners Rounded Corners Mitered Corners Object/Spiral/Circular Maxwell 2D Object Menu Clockwise. 3. Enter the angle at which to begin drawing the spiral in the Start Angle field. The angle the spiral begins at is relative to the v-axis originating from the center point (which you specify later). You may enter any number, including decimals. 4. Enter the number of turns for the spiral in the Number of Turns field. You may enter any number, including decimals, greater than Enter the width of the trace in the Trace Width field. 6. Enter the distance between each turn of the trace in the Trace Spacing field. 7. Enter the length of the spiral in the Overall Length field. This does not refer to the actual length of the spiral, but to the length of the rectangular area the spiral occupies. This corresponds to the longest edge along the length of the spiral. 8. Enter the overall width of the spiral in the Overall Width field. 9. Select the corner type from the following: Square Corners Rounded Corners Mitered Corners Makes the corners pointed. Rounds the corners. Miters the corners at a 45 o angle from the edges. 10.Choose OK. A window appears prompting you to select the center point for the spiral. The spiral follows the mouse. This is a guide to help you place the spiral. 11. Select the center point. The rectangular spiral is drawn. Square Corners Select Square Corners to make the corners of the spiral 90 degrees. Maxwell Online Help System 146 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

182 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Object/Spiral/Rectangular Square Corners Rounded Corners Mitered Corners Object/Spiral/Circular Maxwell 2D Object Menu Rounded Corners Select Rounded Corners to round each corner of a rectangular spiral. The rounded corner is always made with a 90 degree arc. > To create a spiral with rounded corners: 1. From the Rectangular Spiral window, select Rounded Corners. The Corner Radius and Segments Per Arc fields become active. 2. Enter the radius at which to draw the arc in the Corner Radius field. The corner radius is measured from each edge of the spiral. The resulting arc is the quarter of the circle that joins the two perpendicular edges. To maintain a constant trace width, the corner radius must decrease as the trace spirals inward. The decrease is calculated from the ratio of the corner radius you enter and the shortest length on the edges touching the outermost corner radius. This radius-to-length ratio is then used to calculate the radius on each successive corner. This is shown below: Radius-to-length ratio: d rl = r c l c Spiral with rounded corners Corner Radius r c Shortest Edge l c l 1 r 1 = d rl x l 1 Note: If the radius ever decreases to the point where it becomes impossible to maintain the trace width and have a rounded edge, the inner corner of that turn will remain a square corner. 3. Enter the number of segments used to approximate the arc in the Segments Per Arc field. Maxwell Online Help System 147 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

183 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Object/Spiral/Rectangular Square Corners Rounded Corners Mitered Corners Object/Spiral/Circular Maxwell 2D Object Menu Mitered Corners Select Mitered Corners to miter each turn of a rectangular spiral. The miter is always made at a 45 degree angle from the edges of the spiral. > To create a spiral with mitered corners: 1. From the Rectangular Spiral window, select Mitered Corners. The Miter Percentage field becomes active. 2. In the Miter Percentage field, enter the percentage of the diagonal distance from the outermost corner of a turn to create the mitered corner. For example, to create a corner with a miter cut three quarters of the distance from the outermost corner, enter 75 as the percentage. Note: The Miter Percentage must be greater than 0 and less than 100. This figure represents a spiral with two turns and mitered corners. The miter percentage is set at 50. Mitered Corner Diagonal Distance Maxwell Online Help System 148 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

184 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Object/Spiral/Rectangular Square Corners Rounded Corners Mitered Corners Object/Spiral/Circular Maxwell 2D Object Menu Object/Spiral/Circular Choose Object/Spiral/Circular to draw a circular spiral. > To draw a circular spiral: 1. Choose Object/Spiral/Circular. The following window appears: More 2. Select the direction in which to generate the spiral Clockwise or Counter- Clockwise. 3. Enter the angle at which to begin drawing the spiral in the Start Angle field. The angle the spiral begins at is relative to the u-axis originating from the starting point (the outer-end). You may enter any number between 0 and 360, including decimals. 4. Enter the number of turns for the spiral in the Number of Turns field. You may enter any number, including decimals. 5. Enter the width of the trace in the Trace Width field. 6. Enter the distance between each turn of the trace in the Trace Spacing field. 7. Enter the overall radius of the spiral in the Outermost Radius field. This is similar to the Overall Length and Overall Width used in the Object/Spiral/Rectangular Maxwell Online Help System 149 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

185 Object Menu Object Commands Objects Object/Polyline Object/Arc Object/Spline Object/Text Object/Rectangle Object/Circle Object/Spiral Object/Spiral/Rectangular Square Corners Rounded Corners Mitered Corners Object/Spiral/Circular Maxwell 2D Object Menu command. 8. Enter the number of degrees that each line segment represents in the Degrees Per Segment field. In the 2D Modeler, arcs and circles are approximated by line segments. Therefore, you must specify the number of degrees that each line segment represents. For example, if you chose 90 as the Degrees Per Segment, it would generate a diamond-shaped spiral (only 4 line segments). You may enter a value greater than 0 or less than or equal to Choose OK. A window appears prompting you to select the center point for the spiral. The spiral follows the mouse. This is merely a guide to help you place the spiral. 10. Select the center point. The circular spiral is drawn. Maxwell Online Help System 150 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

186 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraint/Add Constraint/Modify Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Constraint Menu Use the Constraint commands (shown below) to do the following: Add constraints to a geometric model. Constraints can be varied during a parametric analysis to determine the effect that dimensional changes have on a design. They may be defined as constants or mathematical expressions relating the constraint s value to that of another constraint or a predefined variable. Modify variable constraints to change a geometry s dimensions. Different numeric values, math functions, or proportional relationships can be assigned to constraints. Delete constraints from a model. Activate (or enforce ) new constraint settings. When you choose Constraint from the 2D Modeler menu bar, the following menu appears: The Constraint commands are available in the 2D modeler, which may be accessed via Maxwell 2D and the Utilities panel. Maxwell Online Help System 151 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

187 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraint/Add Constraint/Modify Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Constraint Commands The function of each Constraint command is as follows: Add Allows you to add one or more constraints to your geometric model. Point-To-Point Distance Sets a constraint based on the distance between two points. Line-To-Line Angle Sets a constraint based on the angle between two straight lines. Arc Radius Sets a constraint based on the length of the radius of an arc. Rotation Sets a constraint based on the angle from a selected anchor point on an object to the local u-axis. Lock X Coordinate Adds an X-lock constraint Lock Y Coordinate Adds a Y-lock constraint. Modify Allows you to modify the values of constraints. By Clicking Lets you use the mouse to select constraints to be modified, one at a time. Edit Variables Lets you modify multiple constraints at one time using the Constraint Variables table. Also lets you define variables for use in functional constraints. Delete Deletes one or more constraints. By Clicking Deletes the constraints you select via the mouse. By Name Deletes a constraint by name. All Deletes all of the constraints. Enforce Activates new constraint or variable settings. Maxwell Online Help System 152 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

188 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraints and Parametric Sweeps Direction of Constraints Over-Constraining a Model Deleting Objects and Edges Moving Objects and Edges Naming Constraint Variables Constraint/Add Constraint/Modify Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Constraints Constraints allow you to easily and precisely vary the dimensions of your geometric design. By changing a dimension in a model for example, the distance between two objects or the angle between two intersecting lines you can test to see how that change will affect the results of the solution. You can use constraints as follows: To set a dimension to a specific value. To set a dimension to an expression relating it to a mathematical formula such as one relating it to the value of another constraint. For example, defining the constraint c2 as c2= 0.5*c1 sets c2 to always be one-half the value of the constraint c1. Constraints are particularly helpful when you want to change two or more dimensions in relation to each other, as shown here. In this example, all the constraints are defined in relation to the constraint c1. Constraint 2 (c2) is set to be equal to two-thirds of constraint c1 (or 0.667*c1); constraint 3(c3) is set to be equal to the sum of c1 and c2. To increase the size of the object, for example, you need only change c1. The other three constraints will change to maintain the established relationships. As a result, the object becomes longer but generally retains its original shape. Maxwell Online Help System 153 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

189 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraints and Parametric Sweeps Direction of Constraints Over-Constraining a Model Deleting Objects and Edges Moving Objects and Edges Naming Constraint Variables Constraint/Add Constraint/Modify Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Constraints and Parametric Sweeps During a parametric sweep, you can vary the values of selected geometric constraints and solve for fields, various executive parameters (force, torque, inductance, and so forth), and run post-processing macros at each value of the constraint. This type of analysis is primarily used in variational design, where the lengths of various dimensions are changed while other parts of the geometry are kept the same or change proportionally. It is also used in tolerance testing, where small variations in dimensions can have a large impact on the design. To vary constraints during a parametric sweep, simply add the desired constraints as solution variables when setting up the sweep. You can then enter the values that the constraints are to be set to during the solution. Direction of Constraints All constraints are marked with arrows labeled with the constraint s name. Be sure that you define a constraint in the direction that you wish the object, point, or edge to be moved. When in doubt, check the arrow marking the constraint s location. It indicates the direction in which the constraint operates. Maxwell Online Help System 154 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

190 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraints and Parametric Sweeps Direction of Constraints Over-Constraining a Model Deleting Objects and Edges Moving Objects and Edges Naming Constraint Variables Constraint/Add Constraint/Modify Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Over-Constraining a Model A geometric model becomes over-constrained when more than one constraint controls the location of a point, edge, or object. For example, the geometry on the left in the figure below is over-constrained. Two constraints, L1 and L2, control the location of object A. Neither of these constraints can be enforced, since changing the value of L1 changes the value of L2 (and vice-versa). A Over-constrained geometry L1 L2 L1 L2 B C B C The software displays an error message if you over-constrain a model. The constraint you were attempting to define is then deleted. Note that the geometry on the right in the figure above is not over-constrained. The constraint L2 defines the location of object C with respect to object A, as indicated by the direction of the arrow. Changing the value of L1 does not change the value of L2 in this case. Object C is moved to preserve this relationship. A Maxwell Online Help System 155 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

191 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraints and Parametric Sweeps Direction of Constraints Over-Constraining a Model Deleting Objects and Edges Moving Objects and Edges Naming Constraint Variables Constraint/Add Constraint/Modify Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Deleting Objects and Edges When you delete an object, all constraints that are defined for that object are also deleted including those defined between it and other objects. When you delete an edge of an object for which constraints are defined, one of the following occurs: Arc radius and line-to-line angle constraints are automatically deleted when the edge for which they are defined is deleted. Note that the 2D Modeler considers circles and arcs to have a single edge, even though they may appear to have multiple edges if they are approximated with a low number of segments. Point-to-point constraints are deleted if deleting the edge removes the vertex or spline control point where the constraint is defined. Rotational constraints are not deleted unless all edges of the object are deleted. The constraint simply uses the new geometric center of the object to define its rotation. Moving Objects and Edges When you move an object or an edge, the constraints that are defined for it retain their current values even though the location of the point, edge, or object for which the constraint was defined is now different. Enforcing constraints may undo the effects of the move, depending on how the constraints were defined. Naming Constraint Variables When you define a constraint variable, you are prompted for the variable name. The variable can be assigned any name. However, if two constraints are assigned the same name, they are treated as the same variable. For example, the square in the figure below has two edges with the same name, C1. As the variable C1 is increased during the parametric sweep, both of the edges named C1 increase. Original Object C1 Object with Constraints Enforced C1 C1 C1 Maxwell Online Help System 156 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

192 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraint/Add Constraint/Add/Point-To- Point Distance Constraint/Add/Line-To- Line Angle Constraint/Add/Arc Radius Constraint/Add/Rotation Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate Constraint/Modify Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce More Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Constraint/Add Use the Constraint/Add commands to add variable constraints for the following: Note: Point-To-Point Distance Line-To-Line Angle Arc Radius Rotation Constraint/Add/Point-To-Point Distance Sets a constraint based on the distance between two points. Sets a constraint based on the angle between two straight lines. Sets a constraint based on the length of the radius of an arc. Sets a constraint based on the angle from a selected anchor point on an object to the local u-axis. Before using the Constraint/Add commands to define constraints for a geometric model, be sure to display the vertices and control points of objects. To do this, use the command Edit/Attributes/By Clicking to draw hatches over them. This helps you to locate object vertices and spline control points easily, simplifying the task of adding constraints. Choose Constraint/Add/Point-To-Point Distance to set a constraint along the distance between two points. The points can be within the same object or on separate objects. You can then alter the constraint to change the distance or relate it to another constraint. Point-to-point constraints can only be defined for object vertices and spline control points. > Set a point-to-point distance constraint as follows: 1. Choose Constraint/Add/Point-To-Point Distance. The following appears in the message bar: MOUSE LEFT: Click on anchor point MOUSE RIGHT: Abort command 2. Click on the first point along the distance you wish to set up as a constraint. The message bar changes to read as follows: MOUSE LEFT: Click on target point MOUSE RIGHT: Abort command 3. Click on the target point. A pop-up window appears. 4. Accept the default name or enter a new one in the Name field. Maxwell Online Help System 157 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

193 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraint/Add Constraint/Add/Point-To- Point Distance Constraint/Add/Line-To- Line Angle Constraint/Add/Arc Radius Constraint/Add/Rotation Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate Constraint/Modify Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu 5. Enter the distance between the two points in the Expr field. Defaults to the current distance. 6. Select Enforce to cause the change to take effect immediately. Otherwise, the added constraint won t take effect until you activate it using the Constraint/ Enforce command. 7. When you are finished, click the right mouse button to exit the command. Note: Each constraint is represented by an arrow labeled with the contraint s name. To avoid a cluttered screen, keep the constraint names as short as possible. Effect of Point-to-Point Constraints on Object Dimensions The effect of enforcing a point-to-point constraint depends on whether you defined the constraint between points on two different objects or two points on the same object. If you defined the constraint between two points on different objects, the distance between them changes when you enforce the constraint as shown on the left in the figure below. However, the dimensions of the objects remain the same. If you defined the constraint between two points within the same object, the dimension along which the constraint is defined changes when you enforce the constraint. This changes the shape of the object, as shown on the right in the figure below. Original Object Locations Original Object Dimensions Location with Enforced Constraint Dimensions with Enforced Constraint Constraints Between Arbitrary Object Points To define point-to-point constraints between arbitrary points on objects, insert new vertices at the desired points using the Reshape/Vertex/Insert command. Maxwell Online Help System 158 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

194 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraint/Add Constraint/Add/Point-To- Point Distance Constraint/Add/Line-To- Line Angle Constraint/Add/Arc Radius Constraint/Add/Rotation Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate Constraint/Modify Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Constraint/Add/Line-To-Line Angle Choose Constraint/Add/Line-To-Line Angle to create a constraint for an angle between two straight lines. This constraint does not work with circles, arcs, or splines. > To create a line-to-line angle constraint: 1. Choose Constraint/Add/Line-To-Line Angle. The following appears in the message bar: MOUSE LEFT: Click on anchor line MOUSE RIGHT: Abort command 2. Click on the first line you wish to set up as a constraint. The message bar changes to read as follows: MOUSE LEFT: Click on target line MOUSE RIGHT: Abort command 3. Move the mouse to the second line and click on it. A pop-up window appears. 4. Accept the default name or enter a new one in the Name field. 5. Enter the angle between the two lines in the Expr field. Angles are given counterclockwise from the anchor line. 6. Select Enforce to cause the change to take effect immediately. Otherwise, the added constraint won t take effect until you activate it using the Constraint/ Enforce command. 7. When you are finished, click the right mouse button to exit the command. Maxwell Online Help System 159 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

195 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraint/Add Constraint/Add/Point-To- Point Distance Constraint/Add/Line-To- Line Angle Constraint/Add/Arc Radius Constraint/Add/Rotation Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate Constraint/Modify Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Constraint/Add/Arc Radius Choose Constraint/Add/Arc Radius to create a constraint equal to the radius of the chosen arc. This constraint only works on circles and arcs (both open arcs and arcs that are part of closed objects.) > To create an arc radius constraint: 1. Choose Constraint/Add/Arc Radius. The following appears in the message bar: MOUSE LEFT: Click on arc whose radius is to be constrained MOUSE RIGHT: Abort command 2. Click the mouse on the arc whose radius you wish to constrain. A window appears. 3. Accept the default name or enter a new one in the Name field. 4. Enter the radius of the circle or arc in the Expr field. Defaults to the current radius. 5. Select Enforce to cause the change to take effect immediately. Otherwise, the added constraint won t take effect until you activate it using the Constraint/ Enforce command. 6. When you are finished, click the right mouse button to exit the command. Maxwell Online Help System 160 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

196 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraint/Add Constraint/Add/Point-To- Point Distance Constraint/Add/Line-To- Line Angle Constraint/Add/Arc Radius Constraint/Add/Rotation Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate Constraint/Modify Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Constraint/Add/Rotation Choose Constraint/Add/Rotation to create a constraint on the angle between the anchor point and the center of the object you wish to rotate. Angles are given counterclockwise from the local u-axis. > To create a constraint on an angle of rotation: 1. Choose Constraint/Add/Rotation. The following appears in the message bar: MOUSE LEFT: Click on anchor point MOUSE RIGHT: Abort command 2. Click the left mouse button on the point around which you wish to rotate the object. You can select either a point that is outside of the object or on the object for the anchor point. Another message appears in the message bar: MOUSE LEFT: Click on target object MOUSE RIGHT: Abort command 3. Select the object you wish to rotate. A pop-up window appears. 4. Accept the default name or enter a new one in the Name field. 5. Enter the angle (in degrees) between the object s center point and the u-axis in the Expr field. 6. Select Enforce to cause the change to take effect immediately. Otherwise, the added constraint won t take effect until you activate it using the Constraint/ Enforce command. 7. When you are finished, click the right mouse button to exit the command. Maxwell Online Help System 161 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

197 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraint/Add Constraint/Add/Point-To- Point Distance Constraint/Add/Line-To- Line Angle Constraint/Add/Arc Radius Constraint/Add/Rotation Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate Constraint/Modify Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate Choose Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate to create a constraint on the x-coordinate of a vertex with respect to the drawing plane. > To create an x-lock constraint: 1. Choose Constraint/Add/Lock X Coordinate. The cursor changes to crosshairs. 2. Click on the point on which to lock the x-coordinate and define the constraint. The New Constraint window appears. 3. Enter the Name of the new constraint or accept the default. 4. Enter the expression for the constraint in the Expr field. Expressions can be functional, and can depend on other constraints. 5. Optionally, select Enforce to enforce the constraint on the coordinate. 6. Choose OK. The constraint on the x-coordinate is now defined. Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate Choose Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate to create a constraint on the y coordinate of a vertex with respect to the drawing plane. > To create an y-lock constraint: 1. Choose Constraint/Add/Lock Y Coordinate. The cursor changes to crosshairs. 2. Click on the point on which to lock the y-coordinate and define the constraint. The New Constraint window appears. 3. Enter the Name of the new constraint or accept the default. 4. Enter the expression for the constraint in the Expr field. Expressions can be functional, and can depend on other constraints. 5. Optionally, select Enforce to enforce the constraint on the coordinate. 6. Choose OK. The constraint on the y-coordinate is now defined. Maxwell Online Help System 162 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

198 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraint/Add Constraint/Modify Constraint/Modify/By Clicking Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables Defining Functional Constraints Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Constraint/Modify Use the Constraint/Modify commands to change existing constraints as follows: By Clicking Edit Variables Constraint/Modify/By Clicking Select constraints to be modified with the mouse. Lets you modify multiple constraints at one time using the Constraint Variables table. Also lets you define variables to be used in mathematical expressions. Choose Constraint/Modify/By Clicking to modify the constraints using the mouse. > To modify the constraints: 1. Choose Constraint/Modify/By Clicking. The following appears in the message bar: MOUSE LEFT: Pick constraint to be modified MOUSE RIGHT: Abort command 2. Select the constraint to modify. A window appears. 3. To change the name of the constraint, enter a new name in the Name field. 4. To change the value of the constraint, enter a new numeric value or math expression in the Expr field. 5. To immediately enact the constraint change, choose Enforce. Otherwise, the change does not take effect until you choose Constraint/Enforce. 6. Select OK. You can then select another constraint to modify, or click the right mouse to abort the command. Maxwell Online Help System 163 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

199 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraint/Add Constraint/Modify Constraint/Modify/By Clicking Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables Defining Functional Constraints Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables Choose Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables to: Modify multiple constraints at one time using the Constraint Variables table. Define variables to be used in mathematical relationships. > To modify a constraint or define variables: 1. Choose Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables. The following window appears. The table lists the name of each constraint, its current value, and the expression that defines the constraint. Below the table are two fields, one for the constraint name, and the other for the constraint expression. 2. Select the desired constraint from the table. 3. Enter the new name in the Name field. 4. Enter the new constraint value in the Expression field. For more information on the different expressions you can use to define constraints, choose Help. You can also define a constraint as a math expression. 5. Choose Update to enact the change. 6. Optionally, choose Delete to delete a constraint. 7. Choose Done when you are finished making changes. Maxwell Online Help System 164 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

200 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraint/Add Constraint/Modify Constraint/Modify/By Clicking Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables Defining Functional Constraints Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Defining Functional Constraints To define a constraint as a mathematical expression (such as the tangent of an angle), you must first define the variables to be used in the math expression. Existing constraints may be used as variables, and additional variables may be defined using the Constraint Variables window. > To define functional constraints: 1. Define the variables to be used in the function, if they are not already defined as constraints. (Constraints and variables are treated identically when setting up functions.) a. Enter the new variable s name in the Name field. b. Enter its value in the Expression field. Note: Variables that you define via the Constraint/Modify/Edit Variables command can be used to define the values of new constraints and constraints modified using Constraint/Modify/By Clicking. 2. Select the desired constraint. 3. Enter the math function as the constraint s value. For example, in the figure on the previous page, the constraint R1 is set to sin(t), where t is a variable set to 45 degrees. The constraint R2 is set to 5*R1. The variable t had to be created before defining the expression for the value of R1. The Constraint Variables window is similar to the Expression Evaluator in the Utilities Panel. Maxwell Online Help System 165 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

201 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraint/Add Constraint/Modify Constraint/Delete Constraint/Delete/By Clicking Constraint/Delete/By Name Constraint/Delete/All Constraint/Enforce Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Constraint/Delete Use the Constraint/Delete commands to delete constraints in the following ways: By Clicking By Name All Constraint/Delete/By Clicking Deletes the constraints you select via the mouse. Deletes a constraint by name. Deletes all of the constraints. Choose Constraint/Delete/By Clicking to delete constraints you select with the mouse. > To delete constraints by clicking: 1. Choose Constraint/Delete/By Clicking. 2. Select the constraint you wish to delete. It is immediately deleted. 3. When you are done, click the right mouse button to abort the command. Constraint/Delete/By Name Choose Constraint/Delete/By Name to delete constraints by name. > To delete constraints by name: 1. Choose Constraint/Delete/By Name. A window appears, asking you to enter the name of the constraint or expression to delete. 2. Enter the name of the constraint you wish to delete. To delete more than one constraint at a time, use wild cards to specify the part of the constraint name to be matched. 3. Choose OK. Constraint/Delete/All Choose Constraint/Delete/All to delete all the constraints you ve set for a model. > To delete all constraints on the model: 1. Choose Constraint/Delete/All. A window appears, asking you to confirm the deletion of the constraints. 2. Choose Yes to delete the constraints or No to cancel the deletion. Maxwell Online Help System 166 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

202 Constraint Menu Constraint Commands Constraints Constraint/Add Constraint/Modify Constraint/Delete Constraint/Enforce Errors in Enforcing Constraints Exiting With Unenforced Constraints Maxwell 2D Constraint Menu Constraint/Enforce Choose Constraint/Enforce to activate new constraints or changes in the constraints you have just set. You need to use this command if you did not choose the Enforce option when using the Constraint/Add and Constraint/Modify/By Clicking commands. The 2D Modeler does not automatically enforce constraints. Errors in Enforcing Constraints Occasionally, enforcing a constraint results in one of the following conditions: Objects that lie outside the problem space. Self-intersecting objects. Overlapping objects. The 2D modeler displays an error message if any of these problems occur. The constraint is not enforced, and the dimension being changed reverts back to its previous value. However, the constraint is still set to the value you specified. You must modify the constraint to prevent the error from happening the next time you enforce constraints. Exiting With Unenforced Constraints If you exit the 2D modeler without enforcing constraints, the Maxwell 2D uses the current dimensions of the geometric model when generating a finite element mesh. The constraint values are not lost, however, and can later be enforced when you return to the 2D Modeler. Maxwell Online Help System 167 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

203 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Maxwell 2D Model Menu Model Menu Use the Model commands to: Determine the distance and the angle between two points. Set the default units of measurement for the project. Specify the drawing size. Specify the snap-to behavior of the mouse. Specify the default object color, text size, and window settings for a project. When you choose Model from the menu bar, the following menu appears: Maxwell Online Help System 168 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

204 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Maxwell 2D Model Menu Model Commands The Model commands affect all subwindows within the active project window. The function of each Model command is as follows: Measure Displays the coordinates of any two points you select, and measures the distance, offsets, and angle between the two points. Object Attributes Drawing Units Drawing Size (Boundary Manager only.) Displays the name, color, and group name of the selected object. Also tells if the object is excluded from the model. Selects the unit of measurement to use in creating the geometric model. Defines the drawing size the size of the region in which the geometric model is drawn and in which a solution is displayed. Drawing Plane Allows you to choose either the XY or RZ drawing plane for creating a cartesian or axisymmetric model. SnapTo Mode Specifies the snap-to behavior for the mouse. Defaults Allows you to view and change default settings for the following options: Color Sets the default object and text color. Text Size Sets the default text size. Window Settings Displays the default subwindow settings such as grid type, the origin and orientation of the local coordinate system, and the distance between adjacent grid points. Default Color (Boundary Manager only.) Sets the default object color. Maxwell Online Help System 169 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

205 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Maxwell 2D Model Menu Model/Measure Choose Model/Measure to display the coordinates associated with any two points. The following figure shows the information that is displayed after two points are selected: > To display coordinate information: 1. Make the desired project window the active one. 2. Choose Model/Measure. The cursor changes to crosshairs. 3. Move the mouse to the first point and click the left mouse button. 4. Move the mouse to the second point and click the left mouse button. The Measurement window appears, displaying the desired information. 5. When you are finished viewing the measurements, choose OK or press the Return key. 6. Do one of the following: To continue selecting point pairs, repeat steps 3 through 5. Click the right mouse button to exit the command. Maxwell Online Help System 170 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

206 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Maxwell 2D Model Menu Measurements The following values appear in the window after you choose the second point. All values are given in the unit of length specified by the Model/Drawing Units command. These measurements are taken from the global xy-coordinate system, not the local coordinate system for the subwindow. The local coordinate system values appear in the status bar fields. 1st point 2nd point Offsets Distance Angle Model/Object Attributes Boundary Manager only. The x- and y-coordinates of the first point. The x- and y-coordinates of the second point. The difference between the x- and y-coordinates of the two points. The linear distance between the points (that is, the length of a line connecting the two points). The angle, in degrees, between a line connecting the two points and the global x-axis. Choose this command to display the name, color, and group name of the selected object. > To display an object s attributes: 1. Choose Model/Object Attributes. The cursor changes to an up-arrow. 2. Select the object whose attributes you wish to display. The Object Attributes window appears, listing the name, color, and group name (if any) of the 2D object, as well as whether or not the object is excluded from the model. Only objects that are excluded are denoted as such. Included objects show no denotation. 3. Choose Done to close the window. 4. Click the right mouse button to end the command. Maxwell Online Help System 171 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

207 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Maxwell 2D Model Menu Model/Drawing Units Choose Model/Drawing Units to select the unit of length for the model displayed in the active project window. > To set the unit of length for the model: 1. Make the desired project window the active one. 2. Choose Model/Drawing Units. A window appears, listing the available units of measurement. 3. Select the units for the model. 4. Specify how the change in units is to affect the geometric model. Choose Display in New Units (the default) to display the model s dimensions in the new units without changing their scale. For instance, choosing centimeters as the new unit causes a dimension of ten millimeters to be displayed as one centimeter. Choose Rescale to New Units to change the scale of the model so that all dimensions are converted to the new units. For instance, choosing centimeters as the new unit causes a dimension of ten millimeters to become ten centimeters. 5. Choose OK or press Return to complete the command. The dimensions of objects in the geometric model are now given in the units you selected. Enter all dimensions in the same units. Note: In Maxwell 2D, the unit of length has no effect on the units of electromagnetic quantities. They are always expressed in SI (MKS) units. For instance, even though a geometric model is entered in inches, its computed electric field is still expressed in volts/meter. Maxwell Online Help System 172 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

208 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Maxwell 2D Model Menu Model/Drawing Size Choose Model/Drawing Size to define the drawing region for all subwindows of the active project. The drawing region is the rectangular area, displayed as a grid, in which the geometric model is drawn. The Maxwell 2D does not attempt to compute a solution outside the drawing region. It is important to explicitly define a drawing region because the software computes electromagnetic field quantities throughout the entire drawing region. Defining a region that is the appropriate size conserves computing resources. The following figure shows the drawing region for a sample geometry. It has been sized to be about twenty-five percent larger than the entire geometric model: More > To define the drawing size for a project window: 1. Make the desired project window the active one. Maxwell Online Help System 173 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

209 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color More Maxwell 2D Model Menu 2. Choose Model/Drawing Size. The following window appears: 3. Specify the desired size of the drawing region in one of the following ways: Enter the coordinates marking the lower-left and upper-right corners of the drawing region as follows: Minima Maxima Specify coordinates of the lower-left corner of the drawing region: X Enter the x-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the drawing region. Y Enter the y-coordinate of the lower-left corner of the drawing region. Specify the coordinates of the upper right corner of the drawing region: X Enter the x-coordinate of the upper-right corner of the drawing region. Y Enter the y-coordinate of the upper-right corner of the drawing region. All x and y values are given in the units specified with the Model/Drawing Units command. Alternatively, enter a Padding Percent and choose Fit All. The drawing region is resized such that all objects fit inside the region with a given percent of padding. (Padding is simply blank space around the edge of the objects.) The x and y values are displayed in the Minima and Maxima fields. For example, specifying a padding of zero results in a rectangular drawing region Maxwell Online Help System 174 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

210 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Maxwell 2D Model Menu that is just large enough to hold all objects that are already drawn. A padding of ten percent results in a drawing region with sides that are ten percent larger than this. Note: > To round off x and y values after resizing the drawing area: Choose Round Off. This rounds off the x and y fields to produce reasonable dimensions for the drawing region. Since the drawing region size is also used to set default grid spacing, text size, and so forth, rounding off the dimensions also gives you appropriate defaults for these 2D Modeler parameters. 4. Leave Fit Drawing set by default so the entire drawing space is displayed in the window. 5. Leave Set grid spacing set by default so the suggested grid spacing is automatically set. 6. Choose OK or press Return. The drawing region in all subwindows is then resized. Things to Consider Scroll Bars If the drawing region is too large to fit in the viewing area of a particular subwindow, scroll bars automatically appear on the bottom and left side of the subwindow. Use them to scroll across the drawing region. Alternatively, use Window/Change View/Fit Drawing to rescale the viewing area of the subwindow to display the entire drawing region. Adjusting the View When you change the drawing size, the software automatically adjusts the view so that the entire drawing region can be viewed in the window. Maxwell Online Help System 175 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

211 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Maxwell 2D Model Menu Model/Drawing Plane Choose Model/Drawing Plane to view and change the drawing plane in which you create the model. Two types of geometric models are available: In a cartesian (XY) model, the 2D geometry represents the cross-section of a device that extends perpendicular to the modeling plane. In an axisymmetric (RZ) model, the 2D geometry represents the cross-section of a device that is rotated 360 about an axis of symmetry. The figure below shows the difference between each type of drawing. Choose XY Plane to create a cartesian geometry. Visualize the rectangle as extending perpendicular to the plane. Choose RZ Plane to create an axisymmetric geometry. Visualize the rectangle as being revolved around an axis of symmetry, z. Z Z Y X R φ More This command is available in the 2D Modeler in the Utilities panel and in the Maxwell 2D Field Simulator version 6.1 (or later). In the Utilities panel 2D Modeler, you can change the drawing plane; in the Maxwell 2D Field Simulator 2D Modeler, you can view the drawing plane you specified in the Solver command. > To view or change the drawing plane: 1. Choose Model/Drawing Plane. A window appears, displaying the drawing plane options. Maxwell Online Help System 176 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

212 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Maxwell 2D Model Menu 2. Choose one of the following: XY Plane RZ Plane 3. Choose OK. Creates a cartesian model. Creates an axisymmetric model. The drawing region is then redisplayed and the axes in the lower left corner of the 2D Modeler appear to indicate which drawing plane you have selected. If the entire drawing region is not displayed when you select the RZ drawing plane, choose Window/Change View/Fit Drawing to fit the drawing region in the active window. Because an axisymmetric model represents a device that s revolved around the z-axis, you cannot specify a value for r that is less than zero when creating objects or setting the drawing size. For example, if you create objects in the XY drawing plane and then change the drawing plane to RZ, the following occurs: The xy coordinates assigned to the objects in the XY drawing plane are changed to rz coordinates for the RZ drawing plane. If there are any objects that overlap into the negative RZ space (or were assigned negative x- or y-coordinates when created in the XY drawing plane), the following message appears: Warning! Drawing size and/or items have been shifted into positive R space. > To correct the position of the objects: 1. Choose OK to close the window. 2. Choose Window/Change View/Fit Drawing to display the entire drawing region. Remember to move the objects so that they are positioned correctly in relationship to the axis of symmetry. Maxwell Online Help System 177 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

213 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Maxwell 2D Model Menu Model/SnapTo Mode Choose Model/SnapTo Mode to specify the snap-to behavior of the mouse that is, the way in which the mouse selects points on the grid. > To reset the mouse snap-to behavior: 1. Choose Model/SnapTo Mode. The following window appears: 2. Select one or both of the following options: Snap to Grid Snap to Vertex By default, both options are selected. 3. Choose OK or press Return. Forces the mouse to grab the nearest point on the grid. Forces the mouse to grab the nearest vertex point on an object. If Snap to Grid is in effect, the system snaps to the closest grid point and uses the coordinates of that point rather than the exact location of the mouse. If Snap to Vertex is in effect, the system snaps to the closest object vertex point and uses the coordinates of that point rather than the exact location of the mouse. The mouse must be within three pixels of the vertex. This option allows you to easily create closed objects, since the mouse automatically snaps to the vertex point you are trying to connect. If both Snap to Grid and Snap to Vertex are in effect, the mouse snaps to either an object point or a grid point, depending on which is closer. In general, select at least one of the snap-to options. If neither of these options are selected, the software is in free mode and selects whatever point you click on, regardless of its coordinates. This can cause problems when you are trying to create closed objects. Although the point you select may appear to be the vertex point of an open object, you may not have actually selected the exact coordinates of the point (and thus did not create the closed object). Maxwell Online Help System 178 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

214 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Maxwell 2D Model Menu Keyboard Entry Occasionally, you may need to enter a point that is between grid spacings or object vertices. Instead of changing the mouse behavior, it may be easier to enter the point from the keyboard. Maxwell Online Help System 179 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

215 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Maxwell 2D Model Menu Model/Defaults Choose the Model/Defaults commands to specify the following default settings: Color Text Size Window Settings Model/Defaults/Color Default object and text color. Default size for text. Default subwindow settings, such as grid type, the origin of the local coordinate system, and the distance between adjacent grid points. Choose Model/Defaults/Color to specify the default color of objects and text. All new objects and text will be displayed in the default color you specify. > To set the default object and text color: 1. Choose Model/Defaults/Color. The following window appears: 2. Click on the color square next to the Default Color field. A palette of colors appears. 3. Choose the desired color. It appears in the color square. 4. Choose OK or press Return. All new objects and text will use the selected color as the default color. Maxwell Online Help System 180 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

216 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Maxwell 2D Model Menu Model/Defaults/Text Size Choose Model/Defaults/Text Size to specify the default size of text. All new text will use the new size as the default text size. > To set the default text size: 1. Choose Model/Defaults/Text Size. The following window appears: 2. Enter the desired text size in the Size field. The size is entered in the current units. 3. To set the text size to its suggested value, choose the Suggested Size button. The suggested size value is based on the size of your model s drawing space. 4. Choose OK or press Return. All new text created with Object/Text appears in the specified size. Maxwell Online Help System 181 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

217 Model Menu Model Commands Model/Measure Measurements Model/Object Attributes Model/Drawing Units Model/Drawing Size Things to Consider Scroll Bars Adjusting the View Model/Drawing Plane Model/SnapTo Mode Keyboard Entry Model/Defaults Model/Defaults/Color Model/Defaults/Text Size Model/Defaults/Window Settings Model/Default Color Maxwell 2D Model Menu Model/Defaults/Window Settings Choose Model/Defaults/Window Settings to specify which subwindow settings should be used as the default. The settings include: Grid type (cartesian or polar). Grid spacing. Origin of the local coordinate system. Angle at which the local coordinate system is rotated from the global x-axis. All new subwindows that you create will use the default values. In addition, if you exit the software, the defaults are saved for the next time you use the software. > To specify the default subwindow settings: 1. Set up a subwindow with the desired grid spacing, grid type, coordinate system origin, and angle of rotation, using the commands on the Window menu. 2. Choose Model/Defaults/Window Settings. 3. Select the desired subwindow. A window appears showing the window s grid type, grid spacing, the origin of its coordinate system, the angle at which the coordinate system is rotated from the x-axis, and whether the uv key and the grid are visible. 4. Choose OK or press Return. All new subwindows will use these window settings. Model/Default Color (Boundary Manager only.) Choose Model/Defaults/Color to specify the default color of objects and text. All new objects and text will be displayed in the default color you specify. > To set the default object and text color: 1. Choose Model/Defaults/Color. A window appears, displaying a color block. 2. Click on the Color square. A palette of colors appears. 3. Choose the desired color. It appears in the Color square. 4. Choose OK or press Return. All new objects will use the selected color as the default color. Maxwell Online Help System 182 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

218 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window Menu Use the Window commands to: Open and close subwindows under the active project window. Change the view in the active subwindow. Tile and cascade project windows and subwindows. Rotate or shift the origin of the local coordinate system in a subwindow, or realign the local coordinate system with the global xy-axes. Specify grid spacing and grid visibility. Choose whether a rectangular or radial grid is used. Display geometric objects as solids or wire frame outlines. Select the active project window. View a list of all open projects. When you choose Window from the menu bar, the following menu appears: Maxwell Online Help System 183 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

219 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window Commands The function of each Window command is as follows: New Creates a new subwindow in the active project window. Close Closes the active subwindow in the active project window. Tile Moves and resizes ( tiles ) windows to display them all on the screen at the same time. Cascade Stacks ( cascades ) windows, starting at the upper left corner of the screen or active project window. Change View Expands or shrinks the part of the problem region that is displayed in the active subwindow. Coordinate System Shifts or rotates the local coordinate system in the active subwindow. Grid Specifies 2D grid parameters, such as grid visibility, grid spacing, the type of grid (rectangular or radial), and whether a key (a set of axes showing the u and v directions in the local coordinate system) is displayed. Fill Solids Displays the closed objects in the active subwindow as filled-in solids. (Toggles with Wire Frame.) Wire Frame Displays filled-in objects in the active subwindow as wire frame outlines. (Toggles with Fill Solids.) Toolbar Defines the location of the toolbar for the active window. In addition to the commands available on the Window menu, there is a list of all currently open project windows. To switch to a project window, choose its title from the menu. Maxwell Online Help System 184 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

220 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Selecting the Active Project Window Moving and Resizing Windows Using the Mouse Entering Points With the Keyboard Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Windows All open project windows are listed at the bottom of the Window menu. However, you can only work in one project window at a time. The project window in which you can draw objects and text is the active window. All other project windows are inactive. Selecting the Active Project Window The name of the active project window is marked by a check box on the Window menu. To select the active project window, do one of the following: Select that project name from the Window menu. Click a mouse button anywhere on that window. The window you selected appears on top of all the other project windows on the screen. Depending on how you ve set up your color preferences, the window may also change color when it is selected. Most of the window commands operate on the active window without affecting the other windows. The selected window remains the active window until a new one is chosen. Moving and Resizing Windows Using the Mouse Project windows and subwindows can be moved and resized using the mouse. These commands are the same as those used in the Motif and the Microsoft Windows environments. Instructions for moving and resizing windows using their window frames are included in the document describing the user interface. Entering Points With the Keyboard With some Window commands in the software, you are expected to select points from the screen using the mouse and cursor. As an alternative to selecting points with the mouse, you can enter points with the keyboard in the fields located in the status bar at the bottom of the screen. Use keyboard entry to: Enter coordinates and angles with greater precision than can be achieved using the mouse. Select points that are between grid or mouse snaps without having to change the mouse behavior. Maxwell Online Help System 185 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

221 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/New Choose Window/New to create a new subwindow in the active project window. > To create a new subwindow: Choose Window/New. A new subwindow appears on the screen, as shown below. It automatically becomes the active subwindow: You can create as many subwindows as you like in a project window. Each subwindow s coordinate system, grid, and viewing area are set independently. Maxwell Online Help System 186 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

222 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/Close Choose Window/Close to close the active subwindow under the active project window. > To close a subwindow: 1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow. 2. Choose Window/Close. The subwindow disappears. Note that the geometric model is not deleted if you close all subwindows under a project window. To display the model again, open a new subwindow. Maxwell Online Help System 187 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

223 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Tile/Subwindows Window/Tile/Projects Window/Tile/All Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/Tile Use the Window/Tile commands to move and resize subwindows, project windows, or both so that the windows are visible on the screen at the same time. The following options are available: Subwindows Projects All The Window/Tile commands are used to organize your subwindows and/or project windows so that you can see exactly what each window is displaying at any given time. Window/Tile/Subwindows Tiles the subwindows in the active project window. Tiles all project windows. Tiles all windows. Choose Window/Tile/Subwindows to tile the subwindows in the active project window. > To tile subwindows in the active project window: Choose Window/Tile/Subwindows. The subwindows are moved and resized to display on the screen at the same time, similar to the subwindows shown below. The active subwindow is located in the upper-left corner of the active project window: Maxwell Online Help System 188 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

224 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Tile/Subwindows Window/Tile/Projects Window/Tile/All Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/Tile/Projects Choose Window/Tile/Projects to tile all open project windows. > To tile project windows: Choose Window/Tile/Projects. All open project windows are moved and resized to display on the screen at the same time, similar to the project windows shown below. The active project window is located in the upper left corner of the screen: Window/Tile/All Choose Window/Tile/All to tile all open subwindows and project windows simultaneously. > To tile all open windows: Choose Window/Tile/All. All open windows are moved and resized to display on the screen at the same time. Maxwell Online Help System 189 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

225 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Cascade/Subwindows Window/Cascade/Projects Window/Cascade/All Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/Cascade Use the Window/Cascade commands to move and resize subwindows, project windows, or both so that the windows are stacked on top of each other. The following options are available: Subwindows Projects All The Window/Cascade commands are used to organize your subwindows and/or project windows so you can access any window by clicking a mouse button on it. Window/Cascade/Subwindows Cascades the subwindows in the active project window. Cascades all project windows. Cascades all windows. Choose Window/Cascade/Subwindows to cascade the subwindows in the active project window. > To cascade subwindows: Choose Window/Cascade/Subwindows. All subwindows in the active project window are moved and resized to appear in a stack, similar to the subwindows shown below. The active subwindow is located on top of the other subwindows. Maxwell Online Help System 190 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

226 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Cascade/Subwindows Window/Cascade/ Projects Window/Cascade/All Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/Cascade/Projects Choose Window/Cascade/Projects to cascade all open project windows. > To cascade project windows: Choose Window/Cascade/Projects. All open project windows are moved and resized to appear in a stack on the screen, similar to the project windows shown below. The active project window will be located on top of the other project windows. Window/Cascade/All Choose Window/Cascade/All to cascade all open subwindows and project windows simultaneously. > To cascade all windows: Choose Window/Cascade/All. All open windows appears in a stack on the screen, with the active project window on top of all other project windows. Maxwell Online Help System 191 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

227 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Change View/ Zoom In Window/Change View/ Zoom Out Window/Change View/Fit All Window/Change View/Fit Selection Window/Change View/Fit Drawing Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/Change View Use the Window/Change View commands to change the field of view in the active subwindow that is, the part of the modeling region which appears in that window. The view for each subwindow can be set independently. The Window/Change View commands are: Zoom In Zoom Out Fit All Fit Selection Fit Drawing Window/Change View/Zoom In Zooms in on an area of the subwindow, magnifying the view. Zooms out on an area of the subwindow, shrinking the view. Changes the view to display all items in the active subwindow. Items appear as large as possible without extending beyond the window. Changes the view to display all items that are selected. Depending on where they are located, unselected items may or may not appear in the window. Displays the entire drawing space. Choose Window/Change View/Zoom In to zoom in on a region of the active subwindow, magnifying the view. > To magnify the view: 1. Choose Window/Change View/Zoom In. 2. Select a point at one corner of the region that is to be zoomed. Do one of the following: Click the left mouse button on the point. Enter coordinates of the point using the keyboard. 3. Select the point in the diagonal corner, using either the mouse or the keyboard. The system then expands the selected region to fill the subwindow. Maxwell Online Help System 192 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

228 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Change View/ Zoom In Window/Change View/ Zoom Out Window/Change View/ Fit All Window/Change View/Fit Selection Window/Change View/Fit Drawing Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/Change View/Zoom Out Choose Window/Change View/Zoom Out to zoom out of the field of view in the active subwindow, shrinking the view. > To shrink the view: 1. Choose Window/Change View/Zoom Out. 2. Select a point at one corner of region that is to be zoomed out. Do one of the following: Click the left mouse button on the point. Enter coordinates of the point in using the keyboard. 3. Select the point in the diagonal corner, using either the mouse or the keyboard. The system then redraws the screen, shrinking the current view to fit in the selected area. Window/Change View/Fit All Choose Window/Change View/Fit All to display the entire model in the active subwindow. > To display the entire model: 1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow. 2. Choose Window/Change View/Fit All. The view in the active subwindow expands to include all items in the model. The size of the window does not change. Maxwell Online Help System 193 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

229 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Change View/ Zoom In Window/Change View/ Zoom Out Window/Change View/Fit All Window/Change View/ Fit Selection Window/Change View/ Fit Drawing Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/Change View/Fit Selection Choose Window/Change View/Fit Selection to display all selected items in the active subwindow. This command allows you to see all selected items at the same time. > To display the selected items: 1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow. 2. Choose Window/Change View/Fit Selection. The view in the active subwindow expands to include all items in the model that have been selected by clicking or by one of the commands on the Edit/Select menu. Depending on their location, unselected items may also display in the window. Window/Change View/Fit Drawing Choose Window/Change View/Fit Drawing to display the entire drawing space in the active subwindow. The drawing space is the area in which objects may be drawn and a field solution computed for a model. > To display the drawing in a subwindow: 1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow. 2. Choose Window/Change View/Fit Drawing. The field of view in the active subwindow changes to display the entire drawing space. Maxwell Online Help System 194 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

230 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Coordinate System/Shift Window/Coordinate System/Rotate Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge Window/Coordinate System/Reset Things to Consider Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/Coordinate System Use the Window/Coordinate System commands to shift, rotate, or reset the coordinate system in the active subwindow (the local coordinate system). The local coordinate system can be rotated, shifted, and reset independently in each subwindow. The Window/Coordinate System commands are: Shift Rotate Align to Edge Reset Window/Coordinate System/Shift Shifts the origin of the local coordinate system. Rotates the local coordinate system. Aligns the local coordinate system to the edge of an object. Resets the local coordinate system, realigning it with the global axes, and moving the origin to its default location. Choose Window/Coordinate System/Shift to change the location of the origin of the local coordinate system in the active subwindow. > To shift the origin of the coordinate system in a subwindow: 1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow. 2. Choose Window/Coordinate System/Shift. 3. Move the mouse to the new origin of the local coordinate system and click the left mouse button. (Alternatively, enter the point from the keyboard.) The default coordinates of this point are the coordinates of the point at the center of the selected items. The origin of the local coordinate system moves to the new location. Maxwell Online Help System 195 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

231 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Coordinate System/Shift Window/Coordinate System/Rotate Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge Window/Coordinate System/Reset Things to Consider Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/Coordinate System/Rotate Choose Window/Coordinate System/Rotate to rotate the coordinate system in the active subwindow. This command is useful when drawing parts of a structure s geometry that lie at an angle from the rest of the geometry. > To rotate the local coordinate system: 1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow. 2. Choose Window/Coordinate System/Rotate. 3. Specify the angle of rotation. Do one of the following: To rotate the local coordinate system to a specific angle, enter the angle (in degrees) in the Angle field on the status bar. To enter the rotation angle using an anchor point for the local coordinate system: a. Choose the point about which the coordinate system is to be rotated. b. Choose the point marking the angle at which the coordinate system is to be rotated. The coordinate system rotates by the desired angle. For example, if you picked points that produced a rotation angle of 45, the coordinate system in the active subwindow would look like the one shown below: The rotation angle is always taken from the global x-axis successive rotations are not cumulative. To return the coordinate system to its default orientation (aligned with the global x- and y-axes), choose Window/Coordinate System/Reset. Maxwell Online Help System 196 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

232 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Coordinate System/Shift Window/Coordinate System/Rotate Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge Window/Coordinate System/Reset Things to Consider Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge Choose Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge to base the local coordinate system on the specified edge of an object. > To align the local coordinate system with the edge of an object: 1. Choose Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge. New fields appear below the status bar. 2. Select the edge on which to base the new local coordinate system. The point at which you select the edge is defined as the new origin. The new local coordinate system is aligned to the selected edge. Choose Windows/Coordinate System/Reset to revert to the default alignment and origin. Window/Coordinate System/Reset Choose Window/Coordinate System/Reset to reset the local coordinate system in the active subwindow to its default alignment and origin. The default local coordinate system is aligned with the global x- and y-axes and is centered at the origin (x=0, y=0). In effect, this command returns the local uv-coordinate system to its original alignment with the global coordinate system, canceling the effects of the Window/Coordinate System/Rotate and Window/Coordinate System/Shift commands. > To reset the local coordinate system: Choose Window/Coordinate System/Reset. The coordinate system is then realigned with the global x- and y-axes and centered at the origin. Maxwell Online Help System 197 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

233 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Coordinate System/Shift Window/Coordinate System/Rotate Window/Coordinate System/Align to Edge Window/Coordinate System/Reset Things to Consider Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Things to Consider To modify the default orientation and origin of the coordinate system in new subwindows, use Model/Defaults/Window Settings in conjunction with the Window/Coordinate System commands. > To change the orientation and origin of the coordinate system in a new subwindow: 1. Set up the desired local coordinate system in a subwindow. Use the Window/Coordinate System/Shift command to move the origin of the local coordinate system. Use the Window/Coordinate System/Rotate command to rotate the local coordinate system. Use the Window/Coordinate System/Reset command to reset the local coordinate system with the default global coordinate system. 2. Choose Model/Defaults/Window Settings to make the local coordinate system in the subwindow the default. The local coordinate system in all new subwindows uses the origin and orientation of the one in this subwindow. Maxwell Online Help System 198 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

234 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Default Grid Settings Inappropriate Grid Spacing Invisible Grid Points Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/Grid Use Window/Grid to: Specify whether a polar (radial) grid or a cartesian (rectangular) grid is displayed in the active subwindow. Specify the number of polar or cartesian grid divisions. Toggle between a visible and invisible grid. Display a grid key a set of axes identifying the direction of the local coordinate system. These parameters apply to the grid that is associated with the local coordinate system in the active subwindow. > To change the grid settings: 1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow. 2. Choose Window/Grid. The following window appears: More Maxwell Online Help System 199 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

235 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Default Grid Settings Inappropriate Grid Spacing Invisible Grid Points Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu 3. Select the type of grid: Cartesian Displays a cartesian grid in the active subwindow, similar to the one shown on the left, below. The cartesian grid is centered at the origin of the local coordinate system (u=0, v=0). Points on the grid are divided by their local u- and v-coordinates (not their global x- and y-coordinates). Polar Displays a polar grid in the active subwindow, similar to the one shown in on the right, below. Like the cartesian grid, the polar grid is centered at the origin of the local coordinate system (r=0, θ=0). Points on the grid are defined by their r (radius from the local origin) and θ (angle from the local r- axis) coordinates. The grids are shown below: More 4. Enter the desired spacing beneath the grid you selected. Grid spacing is entered in the model s drawing units. If you selected Cartesian, enter the horizontal spacing under du and the vertical spacing under dv. If you selected Polar, enter the radial spacing under dr, and the angular spacing (in degrees) under dtheta. 5. To reset the cartesian and radial grid spacings to their default values, choose Suggested Spacing. When you select this command, the software calculates the Maxwell Online Help System 200 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

236 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Default Grid Settings Inappropriate Grid Spacing Invisible Grid Points Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu du and dv (for cartesian grids) or dr and DTheta (for polar grids) that are appropriate for the current view. 6. To toggle between a visible and invisible grid, choose Grid Visible. The default is a visible grid. 7. To toggle between a visible and invisible grid key, choose display key. The key is a set of axes showing the orientation of the local coordinate system s u- and v- axes. The default is a visible grid key. Note that the key can be displayed for both cartesian and polar grids. 8. Choose OK or press Return. Note: > To save the grid settings: 1. Choose Model/Defaults/Window Settings. A window appears displaying the current window settings. 2. Choose OK. The grid settings are now saved and will be available the next time you access the 2D Modeler. The grid in the active subwindow appears with the new grid settings. Maxwell Online Help System 201 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

237 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Default Grid Settings Inappropriate Grid Spacing Invisible Grid Points Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Default Grid Settings To change the default grid settings for new subwindows, use Model/Defaults/Window Settings in conjunction with the Window/Grid commands. > To change the default grid settings: 1. Use Window/Grid to set up the desired grid settings in a subwindow. 2. Use the Model/Default/Window Settings command to make the grid in the subwindow the default. All new subwindows will use the grid settings from this subwindow. Inappropriate Grid Spacing If you select a grid spacing that is too small for individual grid points to be displayed, a warning message appears. > For this case, do the following: 1. Choose OK to close the warning message window. Before you can continue, you must reset the grid spacing. 2. Do one of the following: Choose Suggested Spacing so that the software can calculate the values of values of du and dv or dr and dtheta that are appropriate for the current view. Enter larger values for du and dv or dr and dtheta so that you can continue. Invisible Grid Points Occasionally, when you zoom out of the drawing, the software is unable to display grid points using the current grid spacing. Choose Suggested spacing to change the grid spacing so that the grid can be viewed again. Maxwell Online Help System 202 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

238 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/Fill Solids Choose Window/Fill Solids to display all closed objects in the active subwindow as shaded solids instead of wire frame outlines. This is usually done to make the visual relationships between objects easier to see, especially for complicated models. This command can only be accessed if the objects are currently displayed as the wire frame outlines. > To display closed objects as shaded solids: 1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow. 2. Choose Window/Fill Solids. All closed objects in the active subwindow appear as solids, similar to the objects shown below: Note: While the objects are displayed as shaded solids, the Window/Fill Solids command toggles to the Window/Wire Frame command. To display shaded objects as wire frame outlines, choose Window/Wire Frame. Maxwell Online Help System 203 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

239 Window Menu Window Commands Windows Window/New Window/Close Window/Tile Window/Cascade Window/Change View Window/Coordinate System Window/Grid Window/Fill Solids Window/Toolbar Window/Wire Frame Maxwell 2D Window Menu Window/Toolbar Use the Window/Toolbar commands to adjust the position of the toolbar based on the following locations: Left Right Top Bottom Hide Show Window/Wire Frame Moves the toolbar to a vertical column to the left of the window. Moves the toolbar to a vertical column to the right of the window. Moves the toolbar to the top of the window. This is the default setting. Moves the toolbar to the bottom of the window. Removes the toolbar from the active window. Displays any hidden toolbar. Choose Window/Wire Frame to display all closed objects in the active subwindow as wire frame outlines instead of shaded solids. This command can only be accessed if the objects are currently displayed as shaded solids. > To display objects as wire frame outlines: 1. Select the desired subwindow as the active subwindow. 2. Choose Window/Wire Frame. All closed objects in the active subwindow display as wire frame outlines. Note: While the objects are displayed as wire frame outlines, the Window/Wire Frame command toggles to the Window/Fill Solids command. To display objects as shaded solids, choose Window/Fill Solids. Maxwell Online Help System 204 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

240 Help Menu Help Menu Commands Help/About Help Help/On Context Help/On Module Help/On Maxwell 2D Help/ Help/ Help/Shortcuts Help/Shortcuts/Hotkeys Help/Shortcuts/Tool Bar Maxwell 2D Help Menu Help Menu Use the commands on the Help menu to: Access information about the commands available in the current module. Access information about the current module. Access information about the online help system and documentation. Access the table of contents and index of the online documentation. Learn about the hotkeys. When you choose Help, a menu similar to the following one appears. Each menu is dependent upon its module and varies accordingly. For example, this menu is particular to the Maxwell 2D Modeler: Maxwell Online Help System 205 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

241 Help Menu Help Menu Commands Help/About Help Help/On Context Help/On Module Help/On Maxwell 2D Help/ Help/ Help/Shortcuts Help/Shortcuts/Hotkeys Help/Shortcuts/Tool Bar Maxwell 2D Help Menu Help Menu Commands The commands in the Help menu are: About Help Provides help on the online help system. On Context Provides help on the commands of Maxwell 2D. On Module Provides an overview of the current module. On Maxwell 2D Accesses the first page of the online documentation. Lists the table of contents for the online documentation. Lists the index for the online help system. Shortcuts Provides a list of hotkeys and the uses of tool bars. Not all of these commands are present in all modules. Help/About Help Use this command to learn about how to use the features of the online documentation, such as the scroll buttons, the menu commands, and the hyperlinked commands. > To find out information on how to use the online documentation: Choose Help/About Help. The information on how to use the online documentation appears. Help/On Context Use this command to access help on the command you have chosen. > To access help on a particular command: 1. Choose Help/On Context. 2. Click on the command, icon, or portion of the screen on which you wish to access the online documentation. A help screen appears, displaying pertinent information on the item you have chosen. Maxwell Online Help System 206 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

242 Help Menu Help Menu Commands Help/About Help Help/On Context Help/On Module Help/On Maxwell 2D Help/ Help/ Help/Shortcuts Help/Shortcuts/Hotkeys Help/Shortcuts/Tool Bar Maxwell 2D Help Menu Help/On Module Use this command to learn about the current module you are in. For example, if you are in the modeler, this command will read Help/On 2D Modeler. Choosing this will take you to the online documentation on the modeler. Similarly, if you are in the Material Manager, the command will read Help/On Material Manager. Accessing it will take you to the first page of the documentation on the Material Manager. > To access the documentation for the current module: Choose Help/On Module. Help/On Maxwell 2D Use this command to get a description of Maxwell 2D, its features, functions, and uses. This command takes you to the first page of the online documentation. > To access the online documentation: Choose Help/On Maxwell 2D. The first page of the online documentation appears. Help/ Use this command to read the table of contents. The table of contents is organized by module in the sequence in which you are expected to use the modules. > To access the table of contents: Choose Help/. Help/ Use this command to access the index. The index lists all headings, commands, and topics covered in the online documentation. > To access the index: Choose Help/. The index appears. Maxwell Online Help System 207 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

243 Help Menu Help Menu Commands Help/About Help Help/On Context Help/On Module Help/On Maxwell 2D Help/ Help/ Help/Shortcuts Help/Shortcuts/Hotkeys Help/Shortcuts/Tool Bar Maxwell 2D Help Menu Help/Shortcuts Use this command to get a description of how to use hotkeys and toolbars. Hotkeys and toolbars allow you to execute commands much faster than using the mouse to choose the commands from the menu bar. Hotkeys Tool Bar Help/Shortcuts/Hotkeys Hotkeys are keystrokes designed to execute commonly used viewing and exiting commands. Help/Shortcuts/Tool Bar Lists and explains the hotkeys. Explains the uses of tool bars. Tool bars are a list of icons that allow you to execute commonly used commands without the need to pull down the menus. Each module has a different toolbar. To execute a toolbar command, click on the icon of that command. To see an explanation of the icon command, click on the icon and hold down the left mouse button. Maxwell Online Help System 208 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

244 Couple Model Maxwell 2D Couple Model Couple Model If you have generated an eddy current or thermal solution in another project, choose Couple Model from the Define Model menu to perform a one-way coupling of the models by taking the output of the solved model and importing it into the current project. By coupling the projects, you can take the power output of a solved eddy current or thermal solution and use that data to further analyze the model. > To couple a model: 1. Make certain that you have a previously solved thermal or eddy current project in an available directory. 2. Choose Define Model/Couple Model. A file browser appears. 3. Use the file browser to locate and select the name of the solved eddy current or thermal project from which to perform the coupling. 4. Choose OK. The current project is now coupled with the solved one. Maxwell Online Help System 209 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

245 Group Objects Grouping Objects Effects of Grouping Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Group Objects Group Objects Choose Group Objects from the Define Model menu to group together objects that have the same or similar electrical properties. When you choose Group Objects, the following window appears: All of the objects defined as model objects in the 2D Modeler are listed in the Object list box. When you first enter the Group Objects window, all of the buttons are disabled except for the Single Select and Multiple Select buttons, and the buttons under the display window that allow you to change the view of the model. Once you have selected two or more objects the other buttons become enabled. Maxwell Online Help System 210 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

246 Group Objects Grouping Objects Ungrouping Objects Selecting Objects Deselecting Objects Exiting Group Objects Effects of Grouping Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Group Objects Grouping Objects The Group Objects command lets you assign the same electrical properties to a group of objects. Once they are grouped, they are treated as a single object when assigning materials and boundaries, and when computing such quantities as force, torque, inductance, capacitance, and so forth. Grouping is not strictly required and a valid model could be built without using this command. Things to Consider has examples of situations where grouping objects is useful. > To assign several objects to the same group: 1. Select the objects that make up the group. 2. Choose Group at the bottom of the Group Objects menu. 3. Enter a name in the Group Name field. 4. Choose OK when you are finished. The name of this group appears in the Object listing and replaces the names of the objects grouped together. Ungrouping Objects > To ungroup objects that are currently grouped together: 1. Choose the name of the group in the Object listing. 2. Choose Ungroup. The names of the objects you grouped together now appear separately in the Object listing. Maxwell Online Help System 211 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

247 Group Objects Grouping Objects Ungrouping Objects Selecting Objects Deselecting Objects Exiting Group Objects Effects of Grouping Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Group Objects Selecting Objects To select objects to be grouped, click on either the object name in the object list or the geometric representation of it in the drawing. To select a single object at a time, choose Single Select. To select multiple objects, choose Multiple Select. As an alternative, select the desired objects using the commands on the Select menu: > To select a group of objects: Choose By Area to select the desired objects by drawing a box around them. Select the diagonal corners of the box with the left mouse button. Choose By Name to select objects that have the same first letter or some other characteristic of their names in common and when a field appears, asking you to enter the item name or regular expression, enter an expression that identifies the desired objects (use an asterisk as a wildcard character). For example, to select all objects that begin with the letter c, enter c*. Choose All Objects to select all objects. After you use any of these commands, the names of all of the selected objects are highlighted, and the objects in the model also appear highlighted. Deselecting Objects Choose Deselect to deselect all selected objects or groups of objects. You can also deselect an object by clicking the left mouse button on either the highlighted object in the model or the object name in the Object listing. Exiting Group Objects > To exit the Group Objects command: 1. Choose Exit. A window appears, asking you to save the changes before closing. 2. Do one of the following: Choose Yes to save the changes and quit Group Objects. Choose No to exit without saving your changes. Choose Cancel to stay in the Group Objects window. Maxwell Online Help System 212 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

248 Group Objects Grouping Objects Effects of Grouping Assigning Materials Assigning Boundaries or Sources Setting up Executive Parameters Computing Matrices Computing Forces and Torques Current Distribution in Grouped Objects Current Distribution in Magnetostatic Simulations Current Distribution in Eddy Current Simulations Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Group Objects Effects of Grouping After you group objects together, you can no longer individually access the objects that make up the group. This affects the following: Assigning materials. Assigning boundaries and sources. Setting up executive parameters, such as force, torque, capacitance, impedance, and so forth. Computing current distribution in magnetostatic and eddy current simulations. Assigning Materials When you assign materials to the objects in your model in the Material Manager, the group is treated as a single object. The group name replaces the names of individual objects in the group. Assigning Boundaries or Sources When you assign boundaries and sources in the Boundary Manager, the group is treated as a single object. The group name replaces the names of the individual objects in the group. Boundary conditions and sources are assigned to the entire group, not to the individual objects that comprise it. Setting up Executive Parameters When you group a set of objects together this affects the computation of the following executive parameters: Matrices Forces Torques Maxwell Online Help System 213 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

249 Group Objects Grouping Objects Effects of Grouping Assigning Materials Assigning Boundaries or Sources Setting up Executive Parameters Computing Matrices Computing Forces and Torques Current Distribution in Grouped Objects Current Distribution in Magnetostatic Simulations Current Distribution in Eddy Current Simulations Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Group Objects Computing Matrices Conductors can be grouped together and treated as a single conductor in the computed matrices. This is usually done if you are only interested in the electromagnetic effects between groups of conductors and wish to neglect the effects between individual conductors. The individual conductors in a group are not represented separately in computed matrices. For example, suppose you create an electrostatic model of a transmission line with six signal lines. If you do not group the lines, the system computes a 6x6 capacitance matrix during the solution. However, if you identify three groups of two signal line conductors, the system computes a 3x3 matrix. The 6x6 matrix includes terms for all signal conductors in the line; the 3x3 matrix only includes terms for the groups of conductors. Grouping conductors also reduces the size of the matrices for complicated geometries, helping to conserve computing resources and produce simpler models. The exact groups you set up depend on the geometry being modeled and the level of accuracy you wish to achieve in the matrix solution. Computing Forces and Torques When computing forces and torques, the Maxwell 2D treats a group of objects as a single, rigidly connected object. The net force or torque on the object group is computed, not the force or torque on the individual objects. Current Distribution in Grouped Objects When you group conductors, you affect current distribution in magnetostatic and eddy current models. Current Distribution in Magnetostatic Simulations The following occur in magnetostatic problems for grouped conductors: For a group of regular conductors, the Maxwell 2D distributes total current based on the area of the entire group of objects. For a group of perfect conductors, the current is distributed on the surface of the grouped conductors so that no field can penetrate the conductors. Maxwell Online Help System 214 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

250 Group Objects Grouping Objects Effects of Grouping Assigning Materials Assigning Boundaries or Sources Setting up Executive Parameters Computing Matrices Computing Forces and Torques Current Distribution in Grouped Objects Current Distribution in Magnetostatic Simulations Current Distribution in Eddy Current Simulations Things to Consider Maxwell 2D Group Objects Current Distribution in Eddy Current Simulations The AC current distribution in a group of conductors depends on which type of current source you assigned to the group using the Assign/Source/Solid command in the Boundary Manager. To specify the total current including eddy and displacement currents select the Total option. The current distribution is computed during the field solutions and takes all eddy current effects into account. Assigning a total current to a group of conductors has the same effect as assigning a parallel current source to individual conductors. To specify a uniform distribution of current or to define the current distribution as a function of position, select the stranded option. For perfect conductors, the current is distributed on the surface of the grouped conductors so that no fields can penetrate them. When you group objects together, the following effects result on the current flow for these simulations: Current in a DC magnetics (magnetostatic) field simulation is assumed to flow in parallel through all the objects in the group and is distributed uniformly in regular conductors. But in perfect conductors it is redistributed on the surface and takes into account the effects of the magnetic fields. Current in an AC magnetics field solution is assumed to flow in parallel but is subject to redistribution due to eddy current forces. This is true unless the group is declared as stranded (stranded turns off eddy current effects) in the Boundary Manager. Maxwell Online Help System 215 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

251 Group Objects Grouping Objects Effects of Grouping Things to Consider Adjacent Conductors Parallel Sources and Grouped Objects Objects that Appear Differently in Different Cross Sections Grouping Ground Conductors Maxwell 2D Group Objects Things to Consider This section includes different examples of when to use grouping. Note: Even though it may be more convenient to do so, once you group a set of conductors together, you lose the capability of analyzing the interaction between the conductors. Adjacent Conductors Conductors that are assigned the same material and have electrical contact with one another can be grouped together as shown to the right. In this example, the wire strands in the conductor are not insulated and are touching each other. Electrically they are really one conductor and should be treated as such. If all these objects have identical electrical properties, grouping them simplifies assigning materials, boundary conditions, and sources. Parallel Sources and Grouped Objects wire strands Be aware that when assigning current sources in eddy current simulations, assigning a parallel AC current source to two or more individual conductors has the same effect as grouping them. If all of the conductors have the same material properties, group them or assign a parallel current source to the conductors. If the conductors do not have the same material properties, you cannot group them and should assign a parallel current source. Maxwell Online Help System 216 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

252 Group Objects Grouping Objects Effects of Grouping Things to Consider Adjacent Conductors Parallel Sources and Grouped Objects Objects that Appear Differently in Different Cross Sections Grouping Ground Conductors Maxwell 2D Group Objects Objects that Appear Differently in Different Cross Sections Another case in which you could group objects together is if one object separates into several objects at one point, as shown to the right. In this example, a 3D representation of a conductive trace is pictured at the top. The crosssections that lie in plane A and plane B are shown at the below the 3D representation. The two objects making up this conductor can be grouped together because they are actually one object in the 3D structure. Plane B Plane A Plane A Plane B Maxwell Online Help System 217 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

253 Group Objects Grouping Objects Effects of Grouping Things to Consider Adjacent Conductors Parallel Sources and Grouped Objects Objects that Appear Differently in Different Cross Sections Grouping Ground Conductors Maxwell 2D Group Objects Grouping Ground Conductors Depending on the type of simulation being performed, you may or may not need to group multiple ground conductors in a model. In eddy current problems, multiple grounds should be grouped together. g1 For example, in the model shown to the right, the two ground conductors, g1 and g2, must be grouped together. The grouped grounds are treated as c1 c2 one ground, for which the current distribution is automatically g2 determined. In magnetostatic problems, it is not necessary to group all grounds together because the current density is assumed to be uniform. Maxwell Online Help System 218 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

254 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Material Manager Select Setup Materials to do the following: Specify the material attributes for objects by assigning materials from the global database to them. Create new materials and add them to the local database. You can define new materials, or derive them from existing materials. When you choose Setup Materials, the following window appears: More The names of all objects and groups of objects appear in the list box on the left side of the Material Manager window. The materials in the material database are listed in the lower left corner of the window. The model s geometry is displayed on the right side of the window. Functions for changing the view into the problem region Zoom In, Zoom Out, Fit All, Fit Drawing, Fill Solids, and Window appear below it. Fields showing the attributes of the currently selected (highlighted) material appear in the Maxwell Online Help System 219 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

255 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Material Attributes box beneath the geometric model display. These fields change depending on which field solver you ve selected for the problem. (For instance, the fields Conductivity and Imag. Permeability appear if Eddy Current is being used as the solver type.) These fields also change when you select or define a non-linear or an anisotropic material. Note: If you are assigning materials to an electrostatic or AC conduction model, the following message appears: All materials with a conductivity greater than 1000 siemens/meter will be treated as perfect conductors. These field simulators assume that the potential is constant inside these objects essentially treating them as perfect conductors. No fields will be computed inside these objects. If you are assigning materials to a DC conduction model, the following message appears: Note: Perfect insulators are automatically EXCLUDED since there is no current flow in them. Because the conductivity of these materials is zero, no conduction current can flow in them. Therefore, the simulator does not compute fields inside these objects. Maxwell Online Help System 220 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

256 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Modifying the Material Setup If you choose Setup Materials after generating a solution, the following message appears: If you make changes to the material assignments and save those changes, all solution data will be deleted and will have to be recomputed. Pick View Only if no changes are to be saved, Modify if changes are to be saved or Cancel to cancel this operation. > If you get this message, do one of the following: Choose View Only to access the Material Manager in view-only mode. You can view (but not change) all material assignments. Choose Modify to change the existing material assignments. If you modify and save any material assignments, you must re-solve the problem. All solution data are deleted. Choose Cancel to abort the command and return to the Executive Commands menu. Maxwell Online Help System 221 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

257 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel The Material Manager can also be accessed from the Maxwell Control Panel. Doing so enables you to: Add new materials to a central, "global" database of materials. These materials are then available for all Maxwell 2D problems. Delete materials from the global database. Change the properties of existing materials in the global database including the predefined materials in the database that s shipped with the Maxwell 2D software. The properties of any material can be modified if the material is not currently being used in a model. Note: Although you can define and modify the materials available to all models, you cannot assign materials to objects in an individual model if you ve accessed the Material Manager from the Control Panel. > To access the Material Manager from the Maxwell Control Panel: 1. Choose Utilities. A second control panel button bar appears. 2. Choose Materials. The Material Manager appears. Maxwell Online Help System 222 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

258 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Assigning Materials All objects in the model must be assigned a material. When you assign a material to an object, the properties associated with the material such as relative permeability, relative permittivity, conductivity, and so forth are automatically assigned to the object. Only one object, background, is assigned a default material (vacuum). The background represents the space surrounding the model that is, the area in your model that is not contained within any closed geometric objects. To set up a valid model in Maxwell 2D, you must assign a material to all other unassigned objects in the model. Assigning materials is a two-step process. 1. If they are not already included in the material database, define materials for all objects in the model. 2. Assign a database material to each object in the model. For example, to assign polyamide as the material for the object substrate, add polyamide to the material database, then assign the material polyamide to the object substrate. Maxwell Online Help System 223 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

259 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Material Database The material database consists of a group of predefined materials that may be assigned to individual objects in a model. Global Material Database The global material database is the primary material database used throughout all Maxwell software. Materials from the global database can only be deleted or modified from the Maxwell Control Panel, not from Materials Manager. These are listed as External materials in the materials list displayed in the lower left corner of the screen. Local Material Database The local material database is a copy of the global material database supplied with Maxwell 2D. You can add new materials to a project s local database. Materials added to a local database can be deleted or modified. However, they cannot be accessed by other projects and are flagged as Local materials in the display list. Any Local or External material in a project s material database may be assigned to objects in its model. Inheritance New materials can be derived from any existing material in the database, allowing you to create a family of materials that share, or inherit, several characteristics of the base material. You can then modify the characteristics of the derived materials as necessary. One advantage to deriving materials is that you can change the common characteristics of all materials in the family simply by changing the characteristics of the base material. In addition, it makes accessing material data faster and helps to eliminate redundancies in related materials. Maxwell Online Help System 224 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

260 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Functional and Vector Material Properties The properties of some materials vary in magnitude according to the position inside an object. For instance, conductivity and relative permeability could vary if there is a density gradient across the object. Other material properties vary in direction according to the position inside an object. For instance, the magnetization vector of some permanent magnets varies in direction at different points inside the magnet. Such material properties must be defined as functions. In addition, functional material properties can be used to define a material property according to a math function. If you have purchased parametric analysis capability, material properties that are to be varied during a parametric sweep must be identified as functions. Maxwell Online Help System 225 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

261 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials View Window The view window allows you to see the various objects in the model as you assign materials to them. Changing the View of the Geometric Model Once the model appears on the screen, use the commands that appear beneath the window to change your view of it. Zoom In > To zoom in on a section of the geometric model: 1. Choose Zoom In. 2. Click the left mouse button on a point at one corner of the region to be zoomed in on. 3. Click the left mouse button on the point in the diagonal corner of the desired region. The system then expands the portion of the structure in the selected region to fill the view window. This command works in the same way as the 2D Modeler Window/Change View/Zoom In command. Zoom Out > To zoom out of a section of the geometric model: 1. Choose Zoom Out. 2. Click the left mouse button on a point at one corner of the region that is to be zoomed out. 3. Click the left mouse button on a point in the diagonal corner of the desired region. The system then redraws the screen and shrinks the model to fit in the selected region. This command works in the same way as the 2D Modeler s Window/ Change View/Zoom Out command. Maxwell Online Help System 226 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

262 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Fit All Choose Fit All to view the entire geometric model in the display area. The Maxwell 2D automatically adjusts the field of view, making all objects as large as possible while keeping the entire structure visible. This command works in the same way as the 2D Modeler s Window/Change View/Fit All command. Fit Drawing Choose Fit Drawing to display the entire drawing region. The drawing region is defined using the command Model/Drawing Size. This command works in the same way as the 2D Modeler s Window/Change View/Fit Drawing command. Fill Solids Choose Fill Solids to display closed geometric objects as filled-in solids. By default, only the outlines of object borders are displayed. Choosing Fill Solids for complex geometries allows you to better visualize the relationships between each object in the model. Wire Frame After you choose Fill Solids, its button toggles to Wire Frame. Choose Wire Frame to switch back to a wire frame view of the geometric model. The Fill Solids and Wire Frame commands work in the same way as the 2D Modeler s Window/Change View/Fill Solids and Window/Change View/Wire Frame commands. Window Commands The Material Manager s Window commands do the following: Measure Displays the distance between two selected points. Grid Defines the grid settings in the viewing window. SnapTo Mode Toggles the snap mode on and off for grids and vertices. Maxwell Online Help System 227 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

263 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Window/Measure Choose this command to measure the distances between two points. > To measure the distances: 1. Choose Window/Measure. The cursor changes to crosshairs. 2. Select the first point from which to measure. 3. Select the second point. The Measurement window appears, listing the selected points, offset, distance, and relative angle. 4. Choose OK to close the window. 5. Click the right mouse button to exit the command. Window/Grid Choose this command to define the grid settings for the viewing window. > To define the grid settings: 1. Choose Window/Grid. The Grid Settings window appears. 2. Select Cartesian or Polar and enter the spacing values for du and dv or dr and dtheta. 3. Optionally, choose Suggested Spacing to use the default grid values if they have been modified. 4. Toggle Grid Visible to select whether the grid is visible in the viewing window. The grid is visible by default. 5. Toggle Draw Key to select whether the coordinate arrows (or draw key ) are visible. The draw key is visible by default. 6. Choose OK to accept the grid settings or Cancel to cancel the grid changes. Window/SnapTo Mode Choose this command to define the snap settings. > To define the snap settings: 1. Choose Window/SnapTo Mode. The SnapTo Mode window appears. 2. Toggle Snap to grid on or off to set the snaps on or off the grid lines. 3. Toggle Snap to vertex on or off to set the snaps on or off the vertices. 4. Choose OK to accept the snap settings or Cancel to cancel the changes. Maxwell Online Help System 228 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

264 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Adding Materials to the Database Some materials you will wish to use in the model may not exist in the material database. You can add any material by it them and assigning it the necessary properties. Deriving New Materials > If a material you want to use is not in the project s material database, add it as follows: 1. Do one of the following: To create a new material, choose Material/Add. To create a material whose characteristics are derived from an existing material: a. Select a material in the Materials list box. b. Choose Material/Derive. 2. Enter a new name for the material. Note: The stem word Material is reserved for use as the default name of new materials. It cannot be assigned as a material name. 3. If appropriate, select one of the following material types: Perfect Conductor A perfectly conducting material. Anisotropic Material A material whose properties vary with direction. Nonlinear Material (Magnetostatic.) A material with a nonlinear relative permeability, which must be specified using a BH curve. 4. Enter the material s properties in the Material Attributes fields. For perfect conductors, the material s conductivity is automatically set to infinity. This material properties can be changed in perfect conductors. For anisotropic materials, specify the major diagonals of the material s anisotropy tensors as described under Anisotropic Materials. For nonlinear materials, a button labeled BH Curve replaces the Rel. Permeability field. You must define a BH-curve to specify the relative permeability. For permanent magnets, you must specify a non-zero value for the coercivity or the retentivity. 5. After all material characteristics have been set, choose Enter. The new material now appears in the Materials list box and can be assigned to objects. Maxwell Online Help System 229 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

265 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Assigning Materials to Objects Once any new materials have been added to the project s material database, they can be assigned to the objects in the model. > To assign materials to objects: 1. Select the objects to be assigned a material. Do one of the following: Select the name of an object from the Objects list box displayed on the left side of the screen. Click the left mouse button on an object in the display window. Both the object and its name are highlighted. Select multiple objects. Note: When assigning materials, you cannot individually select an object from a group. 2. Highlight the name of the material to assign to the object. Its characteristics are displayed in the Material Attributes box at the bottom of the Material Manager window. 3. With both the desired object name(s) and material name highlighted, choose Assign. 4. If a material with vector, anisotropic or functional properties is assigned to an object, a window appears. Specify the tensor or function orientation or vector direction. The default orientation for the material aligns it with the x-axis of the global coordinate system. Repeat this procedure to assign a material to every object in the model. The Maxwell 2D will not allow you to continue setting up your model until all objects have been assigned materials. Maxwell Online Help System 230 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

266 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Selecting Several Objects at Once If more than one object is made of a particular material, select several objects at once using one of the following methods: > Use the mouse to select several objects as follows: 1. Choose Multiple Select. 2. Click the left mouse button on each object or object name. Each selected item is highlighted. > Use the Select commands as follows: 1. Choose Select. A menu of selection commands appear. 2. Do one of the following: Choose By Area to select objects in a rectangular region. Select the diagonal corners of the region with the left mouse button. Choose By Name to select objects that have the same first letter or some other characteristic of their names in common. The following field appears: Enter name/regular expression Using asterisks as a wildcard characters, enter an expression that identifies the desired objects. For example, to select all objects that begin with the letter c, enter c*. Choose All Objects to select all objects. The names of all selected objects are highlighted. Deselecting Objects Any selected object can be deselected. > To deselect selected objects, do one of the following: To deselect a selected object or group of objects, click on the object or group s name in the list. To deselect all selected objects and groups, choose Deselect. The objects are deselected and their names are no longer highlighted. Maxwell Online Help System 231 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

267 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties The properties of some materials vary in magnitude according to the position inside an object. For instance, conductivity and relative permeability could vary if there is a density gradient across the object. Other material properties vary in direction according to the position inside an object. For instance, the magnetization vector of some permanent magnets varies in direction at different points inside the magnet. Such material properties must be defined as functions. In addition, functional material properties can be used to define a material property according to a mathematical expression. If you have purchased parametric analysis capability, material properties that are to be varied during a parametric sweep must be identified as functions. When you assign a material with vector, anisotropic, or functional properties to an object, the Assignment Coord. Sys. window appears: More For functional properties, specify the material s orientation relative to the object s local coordinate system or the object s orientation. For vector properties such as magnetization and polarization, define the vector s direction. (The fields for specifying an origin do not appear if the vector property has a constant magnitude and direction.) Maxwell Online Help System 232 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

268 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials More Maxwell 2D Setup Materials A local coordinate system, which is associated with each object, is used to evaluate material properties that vary in magnitude or direction according to their position. By default, the local coordinate system is aligned with the global xy-coordinate system and has its origin at the center of the object. > To specify the direction of a material with vector or functional properties: 1. Assign the material to the object. 2. Select one of the following options: Align with object s orientation Align with a given direction Align relative to object s orientation Aligns the function or vector with the x-axis of the object s local coordinate system. The need for an orientation specific direction arises when one desires to assign objects with anisotropic material properties. This means that a material behaves differently in one direction (orthogonal) than in another. Aligns the function or vector at an angle to the object s local coordinate system. This lets you specify the direction in which an anisotropic or vector material property points, or define a functional material property that acts at an angle to the global coordinate system. Aligns the function or vector at an angle to the object s orientation. 3. Do one of the following: For Align with a given direction, enter the Angle of the vector or function. For Align relative to object s orientation, define the offset angle with respect to the object orientation in one of the following ways: a. For a fixed offset angle, enter it in the Angle field. b. For an offset angle defined by a function, select Function and then type the Maxwell Online Help System 233 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

269 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Note: name of the function that defines the angle in the Angle field. If you name a function that has not been defined, the following error message appears when you try to exit the Assignment Coord. Sys. menu: The function that you entered for the angle does not exist. Use the Functions... button to enter its definition first. > If you get this error: 1. Choose Cancel to exit the menu. 2. Define the function. 3. Repeat the Assign command. 4. If a material with functional properties is being assigned, enter the coordinates of the new origin for the function in the X and Y fields under Enter Function origin. By default, the origin is the center of the object. 5. Optionally, choose Functions and define any functional values to use in the coordinate system assignment. Choose OK to accept any entered functions and close the functions window. 6. Choose OK to assign the material or Cancel to abort the material assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 234 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

270 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Object Orientation Display When you are assigning an anisotropic or a permanently magnetized material to an object, the Material Manager now displays the object s primary axis with a directional arrow as shown below. The angular value (in this case, zero degrees) appears next to the arrow s origin: Object orientation angular value Object orientation arrow Maxwell Online Help System 235 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

271 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Excluded Objects In some cases, you must exclude objects from the model to prevent them from being involved in the solution. The Maxwell 2D does not solve for the electric and magnetic fields in an excluded object, making it theoretically non-existent. For example, exclude the background when you plan to use the outside edges of objects as the outside boundaries of the model. This would be done in cases where you want to take advantage of symmetry and model only one-half of a symmetrical structure. One requirement for this is that the object edges that will be matching boundaries must lie at the outside edges of the model. However, for matching boundaries to work properly, the boundaries cannot lie on the outside edges of the problem space (the bounding box). Excluding the background makes object edges outside boundaries, allowing you to define them as matching boundaries. Excluding Objects Above the Object list box is a set of buttons that toggles between Include and Exclude. Choose these buttons to include or exclude the selected objects from the model. > To exclude an object: 1. Select the desired object. 2. Choose Exclude. The selected objects are excluded from the model. Including Objects > To include a previously excluded object: 1. Select the desired object. 2. Choose Include. The selected objects are included in the model and will be involved in the solution. Maxwell Online Help System 236 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

272 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Automatically Excluded Objects (DC Conduction) Objects that are assigned perfectly insulating materials those whose conductivities are very tiny or are equal to zero are automatically excluded from DC conduction solutions. Because no conduction currents can flow in these materials, no solution is computed for objects that are assigned a perfectly insulating material. Such objects cannot be included in the solution unless you assign a material with a non-zero conductivity to them. Note: Because the background object is initially assigned the material properties of vacuum, it is automatically excluded from the model unless you assign a material with a non-zero conductivity to it. To obtain a field solution inside a perfect insulator, use the electrostatic field solver. Maxwell Online Help System 237 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

273 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Changing Material Attributes Often, you will need to modify the attributes of a material to make it appropriate for the model. > To change the attributes associated with a material in the project s local material database: 1. Select the appropriate Local material in the Material list box. The attributes of the selected material appear in the Material Attributes box. Note: You cannot modify the properties of materials in the global database. These materials are labeled as External (lock) in the Material list box. 2. Optionally, change the type of material as described in the Adding Materials to the Database section. 3. Modify the appropriate material characteristics. Refer to Material Attributes for a description of material attributes. If the material is anisotropic, see Anisotropic Materials for instructions on changing the material s attributes. If the material is nonlinear, see Nonlinear Materials for instructions on how to modify its BH-curve. If the material has functional properties, see Functional Material Properties for instructions on how to modify functions and change whether the material properties are functional or not. 4. To delete the changes and revert back to the material s original properties, choose Revert. 5. Choose Enter to save the new characteristics for the selected material. Maxwell Online Help System 238 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

274 Material Manager Modifying the Material Setup Accessing the Material Manager from the Control Panel Assigning Materials Material Database View Window Adding Materials to the Database Assigning Materials to Objects Selecting Several Objects at Once Deselecting Objects Materials with Vector, Anisotropic, or Functional Properties Excluded Objects Changing Material Attributes Deleting Materials Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Deleting Materials You can delete any derived material from the local material database. > To delete a material from the local material database: 1. Select the Local material you wish to delete. 2. Choose Materials. A menu appears. 3. Choose Clear. Warning: The material is deleted. You cannot delete materials from the external material database if you are accessing the Material Manager from Maxwell 2D. However, you can delete materials in the external database if you access the Material Manager from the Maxwell Control Panel. Deleting Derived Materials If you delete a material, any materials that have been derived from it will be listed as Underived in the Material Attributes box. They will, however, retain the common characteristics of the deleted material. Underiving and Rederiving Materials Any derived materials can be underived and modified. > To underive a material: 1. Select the derived material from the materials list. 2. Choose Material/Underive. The material characteristics fields below the view window become active. 3. Enter any new values in the material characteristics fields. 4. Do one of the following: Choose Enter to accept the new derived material characteristics. Choose Revert to ignore any changes to the derived material. Maxwell Online Help System 239 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

275 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers More Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Material Attributes Use the following fields to describe the electromagnetic properties of a linear, isotropic material. Although all of the properties listed below apply to a material, the specific properties that appear in the Material Manager window depend on which field solver and drawing type were selected for a model. The solvers and model types that require a particular material property to be specified are listed under that material property. Note: Only two material properties at a time may be specified for electrostatic and magnetostatic models. The other properties are computed from these customizable properties. Use the Options command to identify which two properties may be entered. Relative Permittivity Electrostatic, Eddy Current, AC Conduction, Eddy Axial Enter the relative permittivity (the dielectric constant) of a material, ε r, in the Rel. Permittivity(Eps) field. The relative permittivity is a dimensionless number. Relative Permeability Magnetostatic, Eddy Current, Eddy Axial Enter the relative permeability of a material, µ r, in the field Rel. Permeability (Mu). The relative permeability is a dimensionless number. Conductivity Electrostatic, Eddy Current, DC Conduction, AC Conduction, Eddy Axial Enter the conductivity of a material, σ, in the Conductivity field. Conductivity is entered in siemens/meter. Depending on which field solver you selected for the model, objects are treated differently based on their conductivity. Perfectly insulating materials (materials whose conductivity is zero) will automatically be excluded from DC conduction field solutions. No conduction currents can flow in Maxwell Online Help System 240 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

276 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Warning: these materials. All materials whose conductivity is above 10,000 siemens/meter will be treated as perfect conductors in electrostatic and AC conduction solutions. No field solution will be computed inside objects that are assigned these materials. Imaginary Permeability Eddy Current, Eddy Axial Some materials exhibit a permeability that includes both a real and imaginary component. The imaginary component is used to model magnetic losses in a time-varying field, using the relationship: where: µ r is the real component of the relative permeability. µ r is the imaginary component of the relative permeability. Enter the imaginary relative permeability of a material, µ r, in the field Imag. Permeability. The default imaginary permeability of zero is that of a material that exhibits no magnetic loss in a time-varying field. Thermal Conductivity Thermal Electrostatic or AC conduction field solutions may fail to converge if materials with relatively low conductivities are used as charge or voltage sources in a model. B = ( µ j ( µ r) )µ o H All materials have an inherent thermal conductivity which determines how much heat can pass through the material in watts per meters-kelvin. Thermal conductivity is given by: K T Where K is the thermal conductivity, T is the temperature, and q is the heat source. In derived materials, the thermal conductivity can be made into a functional value. = q Maxwell Online Help System 241 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

277 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Magnetic Coercivity Magnetostatic Enter the value of a material s magnetic coercivity, H c, in the Magnetic Coercivity field. In a linear, permanently magnetized material, the magnetic coercivity is equal to the value of H needed to reduce B to zero: B = µ o µ r ( H + H c ) This relationship is shown graphically in the figure below. Magnetostatic B Br Magnetic Remanence Permeability µ Hc Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic coercivity is entered in amperes per meter. The default coercivity, zero, is that of a material that is not permanently magnetized. To define a linear permanent magnet, enter a non-zero value for H c. H = B r H c Maxwell Online Help System 242 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

278 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Magnetic Retentivity Magnetostatic Enter the value of a material s magnetic retentivity (or remanence), B r, in the Magnetic Retentivity field. The magnetic retentivity gives the level of permanent magnetization in a material. In physical terms, it is equal to the magnetic flux density, B, that remains in a material when the magnetic field, H, drops to zero as shown below. Magnetostatic B Br Magnetic Remanence Permeability µ Hc Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic retentivity is entered in teslas. The default retentivity, zero, is that of a material that is not permanently magnetized. To define a linear permanent magnet, enter a nonzero value for B r. H = B r H c Maxwell Online Help System 243 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

279 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Magnetization Magnetostatic Enter the value of a material s magnetization, M p, in the Magnetization field. The magnetization is a vector representing the magnetic moment per unit volume of the material. It is related to the magnetic field and magnetic flux density by: B = µ o ( µ r H + M p ) Magnetization is entered in amperes/meter. To define a permanently magnetized material, enter a non-zero value for M p. The direction of the magnetization vector is specified when you assign the material to the object. Enter the angle of the magnetization vector from the global x-axis in the Angle field. To define a material whose magnetization varies in direction, use the Options command to identify magnetization as a Vector Function. Then, use the Vector Fn button (which appears next to Magnetization) to select which type of magnetization vector is defined. Maxwell Online Help System 244 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

280 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Electric Coercivity Electrostatic (XY only) Enter the value of a material s electric coercivity, E c, in the Elec. Coercivity field. In materials that are permanently polarized, the electric coercivity gives the value of E needed to reduce D to zero as shown on below. (This is analogous to the magnetic coercivity, H c, in a permanently magnetized material.) The default of zero is that of a material that is not permanently polarized. Ec Electric Coercivity Electrostatic Dr Electric Retentivity Electric coercivity is entered in volts per meter. D E Permittivity D r ε= E c Maxwell Online Help System 245 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

281 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers More Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Electric Retentivity Electrostatic (XY only) Enter the value of a material s electric retentivity, D r, in the Elec. Retentivity field. In materials that are permanently polarized, the electric retentivity is equal to the electric flux density, D, that remains in a material when the electric field, E, drops to zero as shown below. (This is analogous to the magnetic retentivity, B r, in a permanently magnetized material.) The default zero is that of a material that is not permanently polarized. Electric retentivity is entered in coulombs per square meter. Polarization Electrostatic (XY only) Ec Electric Coercivity Electrostatic Dr Electric Retentivity Enter the value of a material s polarization, P p, in the Polarization field. Polarization is a vector quantity specifying the permanent dipole moment per unit volume of a dielectric material. A permanently polarized material maintains electric flux due to the orientation of the microscopic dipoles in the material. The relationship between D and E in these materials is given by: Polarization is entered in coulombs per square meter. D To define a permanently polarized material, enter a non-zero value for P p. The direction of the polarization vector is specified when you assign the material to the object. Enter the E D = ε r ε o E+ P p Permittivity D r ε= E c Maxwell Online Help System 246 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

282 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials angle of the vector from the global x-axis in the Angle field. To define a material whose polarization varies in direction, use the Options command to identify polarization as a Vector Function. Then, use the Vector Fn button (which appears next to Polarization) to select which type of polarization vector is defined. Radial Vector Functions A radial vector is defined to always point radially outward from a center point. Use it to define material properties like radial magnetization in a motor s permanent magnets. Radial vectors are defined in the general form: where: M = M x î + M y ĵ M x M y = = x M x 2 + y 2 y M x 2 + y 2 You specify the magnitude and center point. Maxwell 2D then uses these quantities to define the radial vector. Its orientation with the model s coordinate system is defined when you assign the material to an object. Maxwell Online Help System 247 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

283 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Tangential Vector Functions A tangential vector is defined to point tangentially from a center point. In effect, it s the tangent of a radial vector. Use it to define material properties that are always tangential to an object s surface. Tangential vectors are defined in the general form: where: M x M y M = M x î + M y ĵ = = y M x 2 + y 2 x M x 2 + y 2 You specify the magnitude and center point. Maxwell 2D then uses these quantities to define the tangential vector. Its orientation with the model s coordinate system is defined when you assign the material to an object. Maxwell Online Help System 248 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

284 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Perfect Conductors All solvers Choose Perfect Conductor to define a perfectly conducting material that is, a material with infinite conductivity. No field solution is performed inside a perfect conductor. Instead, the Maxwell 2D treats the conductor as follows: In magnetostatic, eddy current, and eddy axial, all currents in perfect conductors are surface currents modeling the behavior of current at very high frequencies where the skin depth approaches zero. The magnetic field cannot penetrate the conductor, and no eddy currents are induced inside it. In electrostatic and AC conduction, all materials with a conductivity above 10,000 siemens/meter are treated as being perfect conductors. (For all practical purposes, these the solvers treat these materials as having an infinite conductivity.) All charge is distributed on the surface of an object in such as way as to cancel out the electric field inside the object. In DC conduction and AC conduction, voltage is assumed to be constant across the surface of a perfect conductor. Perfect conductors are excluded from the problem region, so no voltages or fields will be shown when post processing the solutions. Note: If Perfect Conductor is selected, no functional material properties may be defined. The Options button is grayed out to indicate this. Conductivity is always presented in siemens/meter. Maxwell Online Help System 249 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

285 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Anisotropic Materials All solvers Some materials exhibit characteristics that vary with direction and need to be defined by defining their anisotropy tensors. Choose Anisotropic Material to define a material with anisotropic properties. As illustrated below, the values of two tensor diagonals and an angle need to be defined in order to define the tensor: diag 1, the value of the material property tensor along one axis. diag 2, the value of the material property tensor along an axis orthogonal to the first. θ, the angle separating the diag 1 and x axes. y diag 2 θ diag 1 x diag 1 = material property in the first direction diag 2 = material property in the second direction θ = angle between x-axis and first direction In some cases, another diagonal, diag 3, must be defined. Anisotropic materials may be defined for all cartesian (XY) models and axisymmetric (RZ) eddy current models. Maxwell Online Help System 250 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

286 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values The software selects the properties that need to be defined for your problem, based upon the types of solutions that you have requested. Those properties that require definition are displayed to the right of Material Attributes, below the model display. The labels of those properties that do not apply to your problem are grayed out, indicating that their definition input is disabled. Since you will be building the anisotropic properties tensor definition for your material, entry fields for the values of the tensor diagonals appear below the list of applicable properties. There is also an entry field for a property called Yaw, which is the angle (θ) between the x-axis and the first diagonal. > The general procedure for defining the diagonal values is the following: 1. Select the property (Permittivity, Conductivity, Permeability, or Imag. Permeability) that you will be defining. The units for conductivity are shown as [Siemens/Meter] to the right of the property name; the units of the other three are shown as [dimensionless]. 2. If a diagonal is to be defined as a constant, enter the constant value for it in the diagonal entry field. Defaults are displayed in the entry fields and may be accepted if appropriate. 3. If you wish to use a function instead of a constant to define a diagonal, select the Options command at the bottom of the screen. The Tensor Options menu appears, displaying the list of tensor diagonals that apply to your problem. By default, they are all set to use the entered constant for the diagonal value. Select More Maxwell Online Help System 251 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

287 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Function under any that you to want to be defined by a math function. More 4. After you select Function for a diagonal, its data entry field on the main screen will show UNDEFINED instead of the constant value that was previously displayed there. After you exit the Tensor Options menu, you will need to type the name of the function that defines it into the diagonal entry field on the Material Manager menu. If you have not yet defined the function, do so. 5. If you assign a function to a diagonal definition and later want to return to using the constant value for it, choose Options/Constant for that diagonal and the entry Maxwell Online Help System 252 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

288 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Note: field will revert to displaying the previously entered constant. The property that a diagonal defines is determined by the kind of tensor that is being defined. The four kinds of tensors, their diagonals, and what you will be entering in their specific entry fields are explained in the tensor descriptions that follow. Maxwell Online Help System 253 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

289 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers The following equations describe the tensors of material properties used in the electrostatic, AC conductions, and eddy axial solvers. Anisotropic Permittivity Tensor The permittivity tensor for an anisotropic material is described by the following: [ ε] cosθ sinθ sinθ cosθ where: ε 1 is the relative permittivity of the material along one axis of its tensor. ε 2 is the relative permittivity along the other axis of the tensor. θ is the angle between the ε 1 and x-axes. The relationship between E and D is then: = D x ε 1 ε 0 0 cosθ 0 ε 2 ε 0 sinθ ε E x = D y E y sinθ cosθ > To specify the relative permittivity for an anisotropic material: 1. Choose Permittivity in the Material Attribute box. 2. Enter the value of ε 1 in the diag[1] field. 3. Enter the value of ε 2 in the diag[2] field. 4. Enter the value of θ in the Yaw(Z) field. If the relative permittivity is the same in all directions, use the same value for ε 1, ε 2, and ε z. Maxwell Online Help System 254 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

290 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Anisotropic Conductivity Tensor (AC Conduction and Eddy Axial) The conductivity tensor for an anisotropic material is described by the following: [ σ] cosθ sinθ sinθ cosθ where: σ 1 is the relative conductivity along one axis of the material s conductivity tensor. σ 2 is the relative conductivity along the material s other conductivity tensor axis. θ is the angle between the σ 1 and x-axes. The relationship between J and E will then be: σ 1 0 cosθ 0 σ 2 sinθ > To specify the conductivity for an anisotropic material: 1. Choose Conductivity under Material Attributes. 2. Enter the value of σ 1 in the diag[1] field. 3. Enter the value of σ 2 in the diag[2] field. 4. Enter the value of θ in the Yaw(Z) field. = sinθ cosθ If the conductivity is the same in all directions, use the same value for σ 1 and σ 2. J x σ E x = J y E y Maxwell Online Help System 255 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

291 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Anisotropic Permeability Tensor (Eddy Axial Only) The relationship between B and H is: where µ 3 is the relative permeability perpendicular to the plane of the material s permeability tensor. > To specify the relative permeability for an anisotropic material: 1. Choose Permeability in the Material Attribute box. 2. Enter the value of µ 3 in the diag[3] field. Anisotropic Imaginary Relative Permeability Tensor B z The relationship between B and H is: µ 3 µ 0 H z where µ 3 is the "imaginary relative permeability" perpendicular to the plane of the material s permeability tensor. > To specify the imaginary relative permeability for an anisotropic material: 1. Choose Imag. Permeability. 2. Enter the value of µ'' 3 in the diag[3] field. = B z = ( µ ' 3 jµ'' 3 )µ o H z Maxwell Online Help System 256 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

292 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers The following equations describe the tensors of material properties used in the magnetostatic and eddy current solvers. Anisotropic Permeability Tensor The permeability tensor for an anisotropic material is described by: [ µ ] cosθ sinθ sinθ cosθ where: µ 1 is the relative permeability along one axis of the material s permeability tensor. µ 2 is the relative permeability along the material s other permeability tensor axis. θ is the angle between the µ 1 and x-axes. The relationship between B and H is: = B x µ 1 µ 0 0 cosθ 0 µ 2 µ 0 sinθ µ H x = B y H y sinθ cosθ > To specify the relative permeability for an anisotropic material: 1. Choose Permeability in the Material Attribute box. 2. Enter the value of µ 1 in the diag[1] field. 3. Enter the value of µ 2 in the diag[2] field. 4. Enter the value of θ in the Yaw(Z) field. If the relative permeability is the same in all directions, use that value for both µ 1 and µ 2. Maxwell Online Help System 257 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

293 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Anisotropic Imaginary Relative Permeability Tensor (Eddy Current Only) The "imaginary permeability" tensor for an anisotropic material is described by: [ µ'' ] = cosθ sinθ sinθ cosθ ( µ ' 1 jµ'' 1 )µ o 0 0 ( µ ' 2 jµ'' 2 )µ o cosθ sinθ where: µ'' 1 is the "imaginary relative permeability" in one direction. µ'' 2 is the "imaginary relative permeability" in the orthogonal direction. θ is the angle between the µ'' 1 and x-axis. µ' 1 and µ' 2 are the relative real permeabilites specified earlier. The relationship between B and H will then be: > To specify the imaginary relative permeability for an anisotropic material: 1. Choose Imag. Permeability. 2. Enter the value of µ'' 1 in the diag[1] field. 3. Enter the value of µ'' 2 in the diag[2] field. 4. Enter the value of θ in the Yaw(Z) field. B x µ H x = B y H y sinθ cosθ If the imaginary relative permeability is the same in all directions, use the same value for both µ'' 1 and µ'' 2. Maxwell Online Help System 258 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

294 Material Attributes Relative Permittivity Relative Permeability Conductivity Imaginary Permeability Thermal Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity Magnetic Retentivity Magnetization Electric Coercivity Electric Retentivity Polarization Perfect Conductors Anisotropic Materials Entering Anisotropic Material Property Values Electrostatic, AC Conduction, and Eddy Axial Solvers Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Solvers Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Anisotropic Permittivity Tensor (Eddy Current Only) The relationship between E and D is then: where ε 1 is the relative permittivity of the material perpendicular to the plane of its tensor. > To specify the relative permittivity for an anisotropic material: 1. Choose Permittivity in the Material Attribute box. 2. Enter the value of ε 3 in the diag[3] field. Anisotropic Conductivity Tensor (Eddy Current Only) The relationship between J and E will then be: where σ 3 is the relative conductivity perpendicular to the plane of the material s conductivity tensor. > To specify the conductivity for an anisotropic material: 1. Choose Conductivity under Material Attributes. 2. Enter the value of σ 3 in the diag[3] field. D z = J z ε 3 ε 0 E z = σ 3 E z Maxwell Online Help System 259 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

295 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Functional, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Nonlinear Materials Magnetostatic and XY Eddy Current If a material has a permeability that varies with the flux density, a B vs. H curve (BHcurve) such as the following one is needed to describe the material s nonlinear behavior: Add Point Move Point Clear All AXES Minimum H B -1e imum Maximum Intercep In nonlinear materials, the B-field (magnetic flux density) is a function of itself: B = µ r ( B)µ o H 1e Maximum Accept Cancel Round Off where µ r ( B), the relative permeability, depends on the magnitude of the B-field at each point in the material. Therefore, to model the magnetic behavior of the material, a curve relating the B-field directly to the H-field is used to describe the nonlinear relationship. 0 0 Intercep ampere/meter tesla Maxwell Online Help System 260 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

296 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Functional, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Nonlinear, Functionally Defined, and Anisotropic Materials The software prohibits the assignment of nonlinear materials (those with BH-curves) and either of the following in the same model: Materials with functionally defined permeabilities. Anisotropic materials. This restriction is needed because the nonlinear solver (which is executed if you assign a nonlinear material) will not produce any results if the model also contains either of the other two types. If you violate the restriction, you get an error message when you attempt to exit the Material Manager. The error message tells you that you should change the material assignments, asks if you wish to continue, and presents a Yes/No option that you must exercise in order to proceed. > In this instance, do one of the following: Choose No to remain in the Material Manager and reassign the materials. Choose Yes to exit the Material Manager. If you exit with an uncorrected error, the Setup Materials command box in the Executive Commands menu will not have the checkmark that indicates a successful setup and you will not be able to execute any solutions until you change your model s material assignments. Maxwell Online Help System 261 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

297 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets In general, permanent magnets are nonlinear and should be modeled via a BH-curve as shown below. The magnetic coercivity, H c, is defined as the BH-curve s H-axis intercept, and the magnetic remanence, B r, as its B-axis intercept. Linear Permanent Magnet Hc Br B Nonlinear Permanent Magnet In many applications, however, the permanent magnet s behavior can be approximated using a linear relationship between B and H. In these cases, there is no need to create a nonlinear material. Simply enter the appropriate values of B r or H c for the material when defining its properties. H Maxwell Online Help System 262 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

298 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Adding Nonlinear Materials You can add nonlinear materials to the local material database. > To add a nonlinear material: 1. Choose Nonlinear Material as the material type. 2. Choose BH Curve, which appears next to Relative Permittivity. The following window appears: 3. Enter a new BH-curve for the material or import an existing BH-curve. 4. Choose Exit. A message appears prompting you to save changes. Choose Yes to save the BH-curve and return to the Material Manager. Choose No to exit without saving the BH-curve. Choose Cancel to remain in the BH-curve entry window. Enter the other material properties as you would normally. Maxwell Online Help System 263 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

299 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Entering a BH-Curve Enter the points of the BH-curve to define the nonlinear material. > To enter a BH-curve: 1. Choose Add Point. 2. Enter the points on the curve. Do one (or both) of the following: To enter points with the mouse, click the left mouse button on the desired points in the display area. Start at B=0, which is the value of H c, the magnetic coercivity. To enter points with the keyboard, enter the H and B values of each point in the H and B fields at the bottom of the window: a. Double-click the mouse in the H field. b. Enter the H value of the point. c. Press the TAB key to move to the B field. d. Enter the B value of the point. e. Choose Enter or press Return to accept the point. If you enter a curve whose slope is less than that of the permeability of free space, an error message appears. 3. When you finish entering the curve, double-click the mouse on the last point in the curve. If you are using keyboard entry, choose Enter or press Return twice. Warning: The system then draws the BH-curve according to the points you specified. Nonlinear materials that will be used in structures that are analyzed with the eddy current solver must have a BH-curve that passes through the origin. Deleting a BH-Curve You can delete the current BH-curve for the material. > To delete a BH-curve: Choose Clear All. Maxwell Online Help System 264 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

300 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH- Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Any value on an existing BH-curve can be modified to make it more appropriate or accurate for the nonlinear material. > To modify the B and H values of the points on a BH-curve: 1. Choose Move Point. 2. Click the left mouse button on the desired control point on the BH-curve (the squares marking the input points). 3. Move the point to the new coordinates using the mouse, and click the left mouse button again. 4. Alternatively, enter the new H and B values of the point in the H and B fields, then choose Enter. 5. When you are finished moving points, click the right mouse button. Adding Points to a BH-Curve Add points to an existing curve to refine or smooth its nonlinearity. > To add points to a BH-curve: 1. Choose Add Point. The last point in the BH-curve is automatically selected. 2. Specify the B and H values of additional points on the curve using the mouse or the keyboard. 3. When you finish entering the curve, double-click the mouse on the last point in the curve. If you are using keyboard entry, choose Enter or press Return twice. The system redraws the BH-curve, adding the new points. Maxwell Online Help System 265 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

301 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Importing a BH-Curve Import existing BH-curves into a new nonlinear material to define similar nonlinear materials with varying attributes. This is an effective way to create a family of materials with the same BH-curve. > To read a BH-curve from a file: 1. Choose Import. The following window appears: 2. Enter the directory path name of the BH-curve, and select the BH-curve file type (.bh format or.dat format). 3. Choose OK. Note: BH-curves created in Maxwell 3D and earlier versions of Maxwell 2D can be imported for use in the current version of the software. Maxwell Online Help System 266 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

302 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Saving a BH-Curve Save the BH-curve to reuse it in a different material. > To save a BH-curve to a file: 1. Choose Export. The Export Data window appears: 2. Enter the directory path name of the BH-curve in the File Name field. Alternatively, use the file folder icon to locate the directory where the file is to be stored. 3. Specify the BH-curve file type (.bh format or.dat format). 4. Choose OK. Maxwell Online Help System 267 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

303 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Axes Use these fields to modify how the axes for entering and displaying BH-curves are displayed, and to select the units in which the BH-curve is entered: Minimum Enter the minimum values to be displayed on the B- and H-axes. Maximum Enter the maximum B and H values to be displayed on the axes. Intercept View-only field showing the B and H values at the point where the BH-curve intersects the B-axis. The H value represents the material s magnetic coercivity, H c, and the B value represents its magnetic retentivity, B r. ampere/meter, oersted tesla, gauss Accept Cancel Round Off Lets you select the units in which H values are entered and displayed. Click the left mouse button on this field to display a menu of units. H values may be entered in ampere/meter (the default) or oersted. Lets you select the units in which B values are entered and displayed. Click the left mouse button on this field to display a menu of units. B values may be entered in tesla (the default) or gauss. Accepts the new axes settings and units. Cancels the new axes settings and units, reverting to the previous settings. Rounds off the minimum and maximum B and H values to better display the BH-curve. Maxwell Online Help System 268 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

304 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials View Graph Choose View Graph to view the entire BH-curve. A graph of the BH-curve is displayed. Three new buttons appear beneath the viewing window: Show Coords Plot Set Graph Set Note: Displays the B and H-coordinates of the selected points. Specifies axis scales, tick marks, labels, plot headings, minimum and maximum B and H values to be plotted, and whether a plot legend and axes are displayed. Specifies the color, line thickness, line style, name and marker type of the BH-curve. Also specifies whether the curve is visible on the plot. If you do not choose to show the markers or the line, the curve does not appear on the plot. You cannot make changes to the BH-curve while viewing a graph of it. To edit the BH-curve, choose Edit Curve. These buttons operate the same way as the following commands in the PlotData utility: Plot/Show Coordinates Plot/Format Axes Plot/Format Graphs Maxwell Online Help System 269 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

305 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions More Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Nonlinear Permanent Magnets A ferromagnetic material exhibits an overall constructive response as a function of the influences that it experiences. One can supply a magnetic field to a volume containing a ferromagnetic material, and the overall magnetic field in that volume will be larger than the magnetic field supplied. This physics relationship is represented by: B = ( µ 0 H + µ 0 M ) where: B is the total magnetic field. H is the supplied field. M is the response of the material to the supplied field. These are vectorial references, and it is not necessary for B, H, and M to all be aligned in a parallel direction. One subclass of ferromagnetic materials is the permanent magnet subclass. The materials are unique in that they store part of the supplied magnetic field in the form of energy. This storage of magnetic energy is represented by how the material behaves in what is called the second quadrant of the hysteresis curve. In general, this curve is nonlinear in nature in the second quadrant. A large majority of permanent magnet materials are actually linear in the second quadrant, and this allows us to more easily compute and provide the appropriate physics within a device where they are used. Additionally, a full range of operating conditions can be determined readily, where reluctance and variations in supplied fields can be taken into account. When the material is actually nonlinear in the second quadrant, the material behavior is a function of history, and of the overall supplied fields throughout the volume of the material. To correctly model a nonlinear permanent magnet, one would have to maintain a full history of the supplied fields and determine multiple recoil minor loop characteristics from the original nonlinear curve. Each of these new characteristic curves depends upon the local Maxwell Online Help System 270 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

306 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials amplitude and direction of the supplied field, as well as the overall reluctance. A Figure A depicts a nonlinear material with a particular shape and overall reluctance. Figure B shows the same material type with a different shape. Note the difference in the operating points associated with the geometry alone. In general, one cannot consider the appropriate handling of this type of material when using the formulations and assumptions associated within a magnetostatic solution. The software interpolates along the nonlinear curve to determine static operating conditions for the magnetic materials in question, and this provides an appropriate solution under two very significant conditions. In Air Demagnetization If a nonlinear permanent magnet is charged or energized in a magnetizing fixture, then removed from the fixture, the material will demagnetize itself based on its geometric proportions. This behavior will traverse along the second quadrant nonlinear curve. Maxwell will provide the correct operating point. B Maxwell Online Help System 271 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

307 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials In Device Demagnetization If one assembles a device with a nonlinear permanent magnet in a non-energized condition, and then magnetizes the magnet in the assembly the magnet will demagnetize itself based on its geometric proportions as well as taking into consideration the additional passive components in the assembly. This is generally the preferred manner to handle nonlinear permanent magnet assemblies as it allows for a larger amount of energy to be stored, then used in assembly operation. Other Device Considerations Under all additional operating conditions the appropriate operating point and thus magnetization character of the nonlinear permanent magnet will be incorrectly handled. This means that permanent magnet devices, which rely on history, or on additionally supplied fields acting near or on the permanent magnets, will not be computed correctly by a single magnetostatic solution. In these cases, you can sequentially iterate from one solution to another to create a pseudo-history simulation, and derive the correct results. Maxwell Online Help System 272 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

308 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Functional Material Properties Any material property that can be specified by entering a constant can also be specified using a mathematical function, which you can define. Functional material properties can be used to: Define material properties that vary in magnitude according to their position inside an object. Define material properties whose value is given by a mathematical relationship for instance, one relating it to another property s value. If you have a license for the Parametric Analysis Module, define properties whose values vary during a parametric sweep. These properties are set to constant functional values. > In general, to define a functional material property: 1. Add or derive a Local material. 2. Choose Options to specify which material properties are constant and which are functional. 3. Choose Functions to define math functions that describe the material property s behavior. 4. Enter the appropriate function name as the value for the desired material property. Functional Properties in RZ Solvers You may use functional materials in RZ models as long as the value of the function does not vary with position in the material. Therefore, the material property value may not be a function of spatial coordinates. If you attempt to exit the Material Manager after assigning a function that violates this restriction, you get the following error message which requires you to execute a Yes/No option to proceed. The procedure for recovering from this error is the same as that described under Nonlinear, Functionally Defined, and Anisotropic Materials. Maxwell Online Help System 273 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

309 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Options Choose Options to do the following: Specify whether the material properties vary as functions of position, or are constant in a new or derived material. For magnetostatic or electrostatic problems, select which two material properties are to be entered (this defines the two that are computed from them). A window similar to the following one appears, listing the available material properties: For each material property, select one of the following: Constant. The material property s value is constant throughout an object (the default). Functional. The material property s value is a function of position. For scalar properties like relative permittivity, relative permeability, conductivity, and so forth, the function defines the value of the property at all points. For vector properties such as polarization and magnetization, the function defines the magnitude of the vector at all points. Its direction is constant and is defined when you assign the material to an object. Vector Fn. If a material property (such as magnetization) is a vector, specify whether its direction and magnitude are constant or are a function of position. This option also allows you to define radial and tangential vector material properties such as tangential magnetization in a material. Maxwell Online Help System 274 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

310 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Dependent and Independent (Editable) Material Properties In magnetostatic and electrostatic problems, only two of the four available material properties need to be specified. The values of the other two properties are dependent on these properties, and can be computed from the two you enter. This prevents you from over-specifying a material s properties. Use the Options command to pick the properties you d like to enter for a material. To select an editable property, click on the select button next to the desired property. Magnetostatic Properties In magnetostatic problems, select two of the following: Mu The relative permeability, µ r. Hc The magnetic coercivity, H c. Br The magnetic retentivity, B r. Mp The permanent dipole magnetization, M p. These properties are related by: B = µ o (( 1 + χ m )H + M p ) = µ o ( µ r H + M p ) B = µ o µ r ( H + H c ) where: B is the magnetic flux density. H is the magnetic field. µ 0 is the permeability of free space, 4π 10-7 webers/ampere-meter. µ r is the relative permeability. H c is the magnetic coercivity. M p is the permanent dipole magnetization. χ m is the magnetic susceptibility. The magnetic retentivity, B r, represents the value of B in a material when H goes to zero. These relationships then reduce to: B r = µ o M p = µ o µ r H c Maxwell Online Help System 275 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

311 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Thus, only two quantities are needed to specify the magnetic properties of the material. The other two can be obtained using this relationship. Electrostatic Properties In electrostatic problems, select two of the following: Er The relative permittivity, ε r. Ec The electric coercivity, E c. Dr The electric retentivity, D r. Pp The permanent polarization, P p. These properties are related by: D = ε o ( 1 + χ)e + P p ε o ε r E + P p D = ε r ( ε o E E ) + c where: E is the electric field intensity. D is the electric flux density. ε 0 is the permittivity of free space, coulombs 2 /newton-meter 2. ε r is the relative permittivity. E c is the electric coercivity. χ is the electric susceptibility. The electric retentivity, D r, is the magnitude of D in a material when E equals zero. The relationships above then become: D r = P p = ε r E c Again, only two of these quantities are needed; the value of the other two can be found using this relationship. Maxwell Online Help System 276 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

312 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions More Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Functions Choose Functions to define mathematical functions that give a material property s value. The Function Definitions window appears: > In general, to define a function: 1. Enter the function name in the field left of the equals sign. 2. Enter the numeric value or mathematical expression for the function in the field to the right of the equals sign (above the Add button). To view a listing of valid operators and expressions, choose Help. Note: The pre-defined variables X, Y, PHI, and R (XY problems) or R, Z, THETA, and RHO (RZ problems) must be entered in capital letters. If you have purchased RMxprt, P (position), S (speed), and T (time) are also pre-defined, and must be entered in capital letters. 3. Choose Add or press Return. The function is listed in the following columns: Name Value Expression Displays the name of the function. Displays the numeric value of the function (if applicable). Displays the function. 4. Optionally, choose Datasets to define a piecewise linear expression for the Maxwell Online Help System 277 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

313 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials function. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until you have defined all the necessary functions. 6. When you finish adding functions, choose Done to return to the Material Manager. You can now use the functions you created to specify the value of material properties. Note: For more information on the defining functions including a list of valid operators, pre-defined constants, intrinsic functions, uses, and datasets choose Help in the Function Definitions window. Modifying a Function Any function in the Function Definitions window can be modified to allow for new variables, operators, trigonometric function, or constants. > To modify an existing function: 1. Select the function to modify. 2. Change the desired values in the function. 3. Choose Update. The updated function is displayed. Deleting a Function Delete any unwanted functions from the Function Definitions window. > To delete a function: 1. Select the function to delete. 2. Choose Delete. The selected function is deleted. Transient Function Variables If you have purchased EMpulse, three new functional variables are available to you: P is the position variable. S is the speed variable. T is the time variable. Maxwell Online Help System 278 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

314 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions More Maxwell 2D Setup Materials Vector Functions Choose Vector Fn to identify whether the direction and magnitude of vector material properties (such as magnetization) are constant or functional. Use this option to define vector properties in which the magnitude and the direction of one or more components of the vector property vary as a function of position. When you choose Vector Fn, the following window appears: > To define a vector function: 1. If the values for the x- and y-components of the vector are constants, enter the value in the X Component and Y Component fields. 2. If the value of either component is functional, select the Function button to the right of each field, and enter the function name in X Component or Y Component. A vector is defined by its x- and y-components as shown below. The direction in which it points depends on whether you have specified constant or functional values for the x- and y- components. If they are constant, the vector will point in a uniform direction. The magnetization vector shown, M, varies in both magnitude and direction according to the rela- Maxwell Online Help System 279 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

315 Nonlinear Materials Nonlinear, Function, and Anisotropic Materials Nonlinear and Linear Permanent Magnets Adding Nonlinear Mats Entering a BH-Curve Deleting a BH-Curve Modifying B and H values for a BH-Curve Adding Pts to a BH-Curve Importing a BH-Curve Saving a BH-Curve Axes View Graph Nonlinear Perm Magnets Functional Mat Properties Functional Properties in RZ Solvers Options Dependent and Independent Mat Properties Functions Vector Functions Maxwell 2D Setup Materials tionship M x =X and M y =Y: y x M M x = X M y = Y Use this type of vector function to represent material properties that vary according to any type of function. You enter the x- and y-components and define whether they are functional or constant. The orientation of the vector with the model s coordinate system is defined when you assign the material to an object. Maxwell Online Help System 280 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

316 Setup Boundaries/Sources Boundary Manager Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Boundaries and Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Setup Boundaries/Sources Choose Setup Boundaries/Sources from the Executive Commands menu of Maxwell 2D to access the Boundary Manager. Boundary Manager Use the Boundary Manager to do the following: Define sources of voltage, current, and charge. Define boundary conditions which allow you to model the behavior of the electric or magnetic field on inside surfaces or edges of the problem space. A window similar to the following one appears: All existing boundaries and sources are listed in the box on the left side of the Boundary Manager window. (If none have been defined, this area is blank.) The geometric model appears in the display area on the upper right side. If you select the name of a boundary or source, information about it appears in the box beneath the geometric model. You can then view or change the boundary or source values. Maxwell Online Help System 281 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

317 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Boundaries and Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup If you choose Setup Boundaries/Sources after generating a field solution, the following message appears: If you make changes to the boundary setup and save those changes, all solution data will be deleted and will have to be recomputed. Pick View Only if no changes are to be saved, Modify if changes are to be saved or Cancel to cancel this operation. > Do one of the following: Choose View Only to access the Boundary Manager in view-only mode. You will be able to select and view all boundary conditions and sources; however, you will not be able to change them. Choose Modify to change the existing boundary conditions. Be aware that you must re-solve the problem after doing so. Choose Cancel to return to the Executive Commands menu. Maxwell Online Help System 282 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

318 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Boundaries and Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Boundary Manager Commands The following commands are available in the Boundary Manager: File Allows you to save the boundary, voltage, current, or charge information that you define, and exit the Boundary Manager. This command also allows you to reset the boundaries and sources to their defaults. Edit Allows you to select, deselect, and delete objects, edges, boundaries, and sources. Assign Allows you to assign boundary types, voltages, currents, and charge densities to the edges and objects that you have selected using the Edit/Select commands, using the available boundary conditions and sources for the solver you have selected. Model Allows you to define the size and units of the drawing region, snap mode, and default colors. Measures the distances between two points in the viewing window. Displays the attributes of the objects in the model. Window Allows you to create and arrange viewing windows. Maxwell Online Help System 283 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

319 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Boundaries and Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Boundary Manager Tool Bar The tool bar serves as a shortcut for executing various Boundary Manager commands. > Each button in the tool bar represents a different Boundary Manager command. To execute a command, click on the desired icon. To view a brief description of a command, click and hold down on an icon. The description appears in the message bar at the bottom of the screen. Note: If a tool bar icon appears to do nothing when you click on it, the command may not be available at the time. For instance, you cannot access any of the Assign commands from the tool bar if you have not yet selected an edge or object as a boundary. Maxwell Online Help System 284 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

320 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Modifying Boundaries and Sources Deleting Boundaries and Sources Exiting Setup Boundaries/ Sources Boundaries and Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources General Procedure Assign boundaries and sources to the objects whose field affects you wish to observe. > To define boundary conditions and sources for a model: 1. Choose one of the Edit/Select commands to identify the location of an object or edge at which you wish to specify a particular voltage, current, or field alignment (boundary condition). 2. Choose one of the Assign commands to assign a source or boundary condition to the selected object or edge. Choose an Assign/Boundary command to assign a boundary condition that specifies how the electric or magnetic field behaves on a selected outside edge or object interface. Choose an Assign/Source command to assign a specific voltage, current, or charge to the selected object or edges. Warning: 3. Choose Assign at the bottom of the screen. This completes the assignment to the selected object of all the boundary or source values that you have entered. 4. If you are defining many boundaries or sources, choose File/Save every so often to save them they are not saved automatically. 5. Choose File/Exit to exit the Boundary Manager. Note: In order to set up a valid problem, you must have at least one source of current, charge, voltage, or electric or magnetic field. Edges that are not explicitly assigned boundary conditions or sources use Maxwell 2D s default boundary condition (Neumann for outside edges; natural for object interfaces). The field behavior on these boundaries is different for each solver, and is described later in this chapter. Maxwell Online Help System 285 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

321 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Modifying Boundaries and Sources Deleting Boundaries and Sources Exiting Setup Boundaries/ Sources Boundaries and Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying Boundaries and Sources Once assigned, any boundary or source can be modified. > To modify an existing boundary or source: 1. Select the boundary or source that you wish to modify. The system highlights the name of that boundary or source and displays all relevant information about it at the bottom of the screen. 2. Do one of the following: To assign a different type of boundary condition or source to the selected boundary: a. Choose one of the Assign/Boundary or Assign/Source commands. If you have selected more than one existing boundary, a message then appears, warning you that the existing boundary will be incorporated in the new boundary. This actually means that the old boundary or source assignment will be replaced by the new. b. Choose Yes to change the boundary or source type. c. Enter the new charge, current, voltage, or symmetry values for the boundary or source. To change a selected boundary or source s charge, current, voltage, or symmetry value: a. Select the parameter for which you want to change the value(s). b. Change the displayed entry field value(s). c. Choose the Accept command next to the Options button at the bottom of the screen to get the software to accept the values that you have typed in the entry fields. 3. Choose Assign at the bottom of the screen to enter the change or Cancel to cancel the change. Maxwell Online Help System 286 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

322 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Modifying Boundaries and Sources Deleting Boundaries and Sources Exiting Setup Boundaries/Sources Boundaries and Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Deleting Boundaries and Sources Delete unwanted boundaries and sources in the model. Deleted boundaries and sources retain their original default boundary conditions. Deleting any boundary or source will necessitate generating a new solution for the model. > To delete a boundary or source after it has been defined: 1. Click on the boundary or source that you wish to delete. The system highlights the name of that boundary or source. 2. Choose Edit/Clear. The highlighted boundary or source is then removed from the list of boundaries and sources. Choose Edit/Undo Clear to retrieve boundaries and sources that are deleted by mistake. However, only the most recently-deleted boundary or source can be retrieved. Note: Deleted boundaries and sources revert to the Neumann or natural boundary condition the default boundary condition for Maxwell 2D. Exiting Setup Boundaries/Sources Once you have finished assigning the boundaries and sources, exit the Boundary Manager. > To exit after all necessary boundary conditions have been specified: 1. Choose File/Exit. If no changes were made, you automatically exit. 2. If you have made changes to the model s boundary conditions, the following message appears: Save changes before closing? Do one of the following: Choose Yes to save the changes and exit. Choose No to exit without saving your changes. Choose Cancel to continue setting boundaries and sources. Maxwell Online Help System 287 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

323 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Boundaries and Sources Boundary Conditions Sources Required Electromagnetic Sources References for Electric or Magnetic Potential Functional Boundaries and Sources Modeling External Fields Using Symmetry Boundaries and Sources in Axisymmetric Models Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Boundaries and Sources Each field solver available in the Maxwell 2D allows different boundary conditions and sources for a problem. These boundary conditions and sources can be set up by: The Assign/Boundary commands. These commands give you access to all boundary conditions that may be defined for object interfaces and outside edges of the model including the solver s default boundary conditions. The Assign/Source commands. These commands give you access to all electromagnetic sources that may be defined for objects or edges. Boundary Conditions Boundary conditions define the behavior of the electric or magnetic field at object interfaces or edges of the problem region. They can be used to: Identify structures that are magnetically isolated, electrically insulated, or electrically isolated. Set the electric or magnetic potential at a surface to a constant value or a function of position, in order to define the behavior of the electric or magnetic field on that surface Simulate the field patterns that would exist in a structure while modeling only part of it. To do this, you can define planes of symmetry where electric or magnetic fields are either tangential to or normal to the surface. Additionally, you can define planes of symmetry where the field on one surface matches the magnitude and direction (or opposite direction) of the field on another surface. Simulate the field patterns produced by thin resistive layers on conductors (DC conduction solver) or eddy currents with very tiny skin depths in conductors (eddy current solver), without having to explicitly draw, assign materials to, or solve for fields inside the objects in question. Maxwell Online Help System 288 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

324 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Boundaries and Sources Boundary Conditions Sources Required Electromagnetic Sources References for Electric or Magnetic Potential Functional Boundaries and Sources Modeling External Fields Using Symmetry Boundaries and Sources in Axisymmetric Models Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Sources Sources define how charges, voltages, or currents are distributed in a model whether for edges or solid objects. Solid sources are used to model distributions of current, charge, or voltage on objects. Sheet sources are used to model edge voltages, charge sheets, or current sheets. To simulate uniform distributions of charge, voltage or current on an edge, they can be defined as constants. To simulate distributions of charge, voltage, or current that vary as a function of position, they can be defined as math functions. The behavior of the electric or magnetic field for the object or edge is not directly specified, but is determined by the type of source you defined. Required Electromagnetic Sources To compute fields for a structure, you must define a source of charge, voltage, current, or electric or magnetic fields for your model. Assign at least one object or edge as either a source (such as a current, charge, or voltage) or a value boundary. Permanently polarized or magnetized materials also act as sources of charge or magnetic field (respectively). If you do not identify some type of source, the Maxwell 2D will not be able to generate a solution. The field quantities computed by each solver and the required electromagnetic sources are given in the following table: More Field Solver Sources Field Computed Magnetostatic Electrostatic Eddy Current DC currents; external static magnetic fields; permanent magnets Voltages; charges; permanently polarized materials AC currents; external AC magnetic fields. A Z (XY models), A φ (RZ models) φ A Z (t) (XY models), A φ (t) (RZ models) H, B E, D Derived Field Quantities J Z (t) (XY models), J φ (t) (RZ models), H(t), B(t), Maxwell Online Help System 289 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

325 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Boundaries and Sources Boundary Conditions Sources Required Electromagnetic Sources References for Electric or Magnetic Potential Functional Boundaries and Sources Modeling External Fields Using Symmetry Boundaries and Sources in Axisymmetric Models Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Field Solver Sources Field Computed AC Conduction AC voltages φ(t) E(t), J(t) DC Conduction DC voltages φ E, D, J Eddy Axial External AC magnetic fields H Z (t) E(t), D(t), J(t) Transient Transient voltages A Z (XY and RZ H, B and currents. models) Thermal none temperature, T where: A is the magnetic vector potential. H is the magnetic field. B is the magnetic flux density. φ is the electric potential. E is the electric field. D is the electric flux density. J is the current density. These quantities are phasors in AC simulations. Derived Field Quantities Maxwell Online Help System 290 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

326 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Boundaries and Sources Boundary Conditions Sources Required Electromagnetic Sources References for Electric or Magnetic Potential Functional Boundaries and Sources Modeling External Fields Using Symmetry Boundaries and Sources in Axisymmetric Models Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources References for Electric or Magnetic Potential You must specify a reference for electric scalar potential or magnetic vector potential that Maxwell 2D can use when computing fields. To do so, assign one of the following boundary or source types to at least one surface in your model: Value boundary Voltage source Odd symmetry boundary Balloon boundary If you do not set a reference for electric or magnetic potential, the model is not uniquely defined and an error message appears when you try to generate a field solution. This problem usually occurs when you set up: Electrostatic problems that contain only charge sources. The electrostatic field solver requires that a reference voltage be defined in order to compute the electric potential (and from it, the electric field) in the problem region. Magnetostatic and eddy current problems that contain only current sources. These solvers require that a reference value of A Z or ra φ reference value be set in order to compute the magnetic vector potential (A z ) and from it, the magnetic field in the problem region. Click here for more information on computing solutions. Functional Boundaries and Sources Functional boundaries and sources have defined by math functions, and are used: To model distributions of charge, current or voltage that vary as a function of position. To model external fields that vary as functions of position. To define voltage, current, charge or boundary values as variables to be used in a parametric sweep. Maxwell Online Help System 291 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

327 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Boundaries and Sources Boundary Conditions Sources Required Electromagnetic Sources References for Electric or Magnetic Potential Functional Boundaries and Sources Modeling External Fields Using Symmetry Boundaries and Sources in Axisymmetric Models Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Modeling External Fields Use value boundaries to model external magnetic or electric fields. In the example shown below, a constant external magnetic field produced the magnetic field and axial currents in the cracked solenoid. The external field (which points in the z direction into the crosssection of the solenoid) was modeled using a value boundary on the outside edge of the air space in the problem: H(z) e e e e e e e e e e e+01 Value boundary of 500 H/m y x zoom 3 For more information about value boundaries for a particular field solver, refer to the description of its boundary conditions in this chapter. Maxwell Online Help System 292 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

328 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Boundaries and Sources Boundary Conditions Sources Required Electromagnetic Sources References for Electric or Magnetic Potential Functional Boundaries and Sources Modeling External Fields Using Symmetry Boundaries and Sources in Axisymmetric Models Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Using Symmetry When modeling a structure that is geometrically and electrically symmetrical, you can take advantage of the symmetry by modeling only part of the structure. The two types of symmetry boundaries that can be modeled in Maxwell 2D are even and odd. An example of an even symmetry boundary is shown below: Current in The B-field is perpendicular to an even symmetry boundary. Image Positive Charge The E-field is tangential to an even symmetry boundary. EVEN SYMMETRY Current in ox ox ox ox ox o x xo ox ox ox ox ox ox ox Drawing Region Positive Charge More Maxwell Online Help System 293 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

329 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Boundaries and Sources Boundary Conditions Sources Required Electromagnetic Sources References for Electric or Magnetic Potential Functional Boundaries and Sources Modeling External Fields Using Symmetry Boundaries and Sources in Axisymmetric Models Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources An example of an odd symmetry boundary is shown below: Current out Image o. o. o. o o.. o. o. The B-field is tangential to an odd symmetry boundary. Negative Charge - - The E-field is perpendicular to an odd symmetry boundary. - ODD SYMMETRY ox ox o x ox ox ox ox Drawing Region Current in Positive Charge Given a fixed amount of computer memory, modeling a portion of a problem allows you to compute fields for larger structures than would be possible if the entire geometry was modeled. It also allows the system to generate solutions more quickly than it would with the full model. To specify the location of a symmetry boundary, follow the same general procedure that is used to define sources and boundaries. That is, first identify the location of the boundary with an Edit/Select command; then assign the boundary with the Assign/Boundary/ Symmetry command. Maxwell Online Help System 294 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

330 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Boundaries and Sources Boundary Conditions Sources Required Electromagnetic Sources References for Electric or Magnetic Potential Functional Boundaries and Sources Modeling External Fields Using Symmetry Boundaries and Sources in Axisymmetric Models Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Boundaries and Sources in Axisymmetric Models In general, boundary conditions and sources operate the same way for axisymmetric (RZ) models as they do for cartesian (XY) models. However, be aware of the following when you are setting boundaries for each type of model. Outside Boundaries In axisymmetric models, Maxwell 2D ignores any boundary conditions or sources assigned to the left edge of the problem space. As shown below, the left edge of the problem space is used as the axis of rotational symmetry in an axisymmetric geometry. To model the axis of symmetry, the system automatically imposes a boundary condition on that edge of the problem region. It overrides any other boundary conditions or sources that may be assigned to the left edge of the model. Cartesian (XY) y x Axis of Symmetry Axisymmetric (RZ) Z R Outside Edges Uses assigned boundary condition or source on all outside edges. Outside Edges Uses assigned boundary condition or source on all outside edges except axis of symmetry. The edge is still listed in the Boundary Manager as being assigned the boundary condition or source you specified, even though the axisymmetric solvers ignore it during the solution. Maxwell Online Help System 295 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

331 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Boundaries and Sources Boundary Conditions Sources Required Electromagnetic Sources References for Electric or Magnetic Potential Functional Boundaries and Sources Modeling External Fields Using Symmetry Boundaries and Sources in Axisymmetric Models More Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Value Boundaries in Magnetostatic and Eddy Current Problems In axisymmetric magnetostatic and eddy current problems, equipotential lines of ra φ coincide with lines of magnetic flux. To define a boundary that coincides with a magnetic flux line, specify constant values or functions of ra φ (not A φ ) when setting value boundaries. Axisymmetric External Fields All external fields modeled with value boundaries must be symmetric about the axis of rotation (the z-axis). Left boundary - Axis of symmetry (default) z Top boundary - Neumann (default) r Bottom boundary - Neumann (default) For instance, to set up a uniform B-field in the z-direction for the axisymmetric model shown above, define boundaries as follows: Set the right boundary to a constant value of ra φ. Leave the top, bottom and left (z-axis) boundaries set to their default boundary conditions. R is constant on the right edge, which causes the first term to drop out of the following equation: B = = A φ Aφ rˆ z This indicates that the B-field is uniform and points only in the z direction. + B 1 -- r ( raφ ) ẑ r Right boundary - Value ra φ = constant Maxwell Online Help System 296 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

332 Setup Boundaries/Sources Modifying the Boundary and Source Setup Boundary Manager Commands Boundary Manager Tool Bar General Procedure Boundaries and Sources Boundary Conditions Sources Required Electromagnetic Sources References for Electric or Magnetic Potential Functional Boundaries and Sources Modeling External Fields Using Symmetry Boundaries and Sources in Axisymmetric Models Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources When defining external fields for eddy current and magnetostatic problems, always remember that you are specifying value of ra φ, not A φ. For instance, setting the top and bottom boundaries as shown below produces a magnetic field that points in the r direction: Left boundary - Axis of symmetry (default) The value of r is always increasing, creating a diverging B-field which is not physically valid. Symmetry Boundaries z Top boundary - Value (ra φ = constant) B (diverging) r Bottom boundary - Value (ra φ = 0) Right boundary - Neumann (default) To use symmetry boundaries in axisymmetric problems, all vector quantities including external fields modeled with boundary conditions must be symmetric about the axis of rotation (the z-axis). Maxwell Online Help System 297 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

333 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Electrostatic Boundary Conditions The following boundary types are available for electrostatic models: Default (Neumann and Natural) Value Balloon Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries The default boundary conditions for the electrostatic field solver are Neumann and natural boundaries. Initially, when you define boundaries and sources for an electrostatic model, all surfaces are set to one of the following: All outside edges are defined as Neumann boundaries. In this type of boundary, the tangential components of E ( φ) and the normal components of D ( ε φ) are continuous across the boundary. On a boundary at the edge of the drawing region, the normal component of E is zero, forcing the field to be tangential to the boundary. All object interfaces are defined as natural boundaries. This simply means that E is continuous across the object surface, according to the following relationships: = where: E t is the electric field intensity tangential to the interface. D n is the electric flux density (displacement), εe, normal to the interface. ρ s is the surface charge density. E t1 Choose Assign/Boundary/Value to reset sources and boundaries to their default Neumann/natural state. Deleted boundaries and sources also revert to the Neumann/natural boundary condition. E t2 D n1 = D n2 + ρ s Maxwell Online Help System 298 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

334 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Magnetostatic Sources More Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Value Boundaries Use value boundaries to set the electric scalar potential, φ, to a constant value on a boundary. The potential can also be defined as a function of position using math functions. Normally, this type of boundary condition is used to specify the voltages on conductors and outer boundaries. It can also be used to set the interface between two objects to a potential, modeling the presence of a very thin conductor between the objects. Value boundaries are set using Assign/Boundary/Value. They are sometimes called Dirichlet boundaries. It s important to note that the potential on the surface of a conductor is all that the electrostatic solver needs to know about that conductor. Because the region inside the conductor is at the same potential, no E-field exists inside the conductor. The electrostatic field simulator does not solve for the potential inside the conductor whatever value you specify on the boundary is the potential throughout the conductor. (Because no solution is computed inside the conductor, the simulator models the potential inside these conductors as being equal to zero even though it is not actually this value. The potential set via the value boundary is considered to apply to the surface of the conductor.) The behavior of the E-field on a value boundary depends on whether you define a constant or functional potential on the boundary. If the potential is constant, the tangential component of E ( φ) is zero, forcing E to be perpendicular to the boundary. If the potential is a function of position, E may not be perpendicular to the boundary. Its behavior depends on what type of math function was used to specify the potential. For instance, in the following figure, the potential on the left edge of the problem space was defined using the relationship φ=10 y +1. The tangential component of E ( φ) on the boundary is not equal to zero, since φ is constantly changing on Maxwell Online Help System 299 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

335 Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Magnetostatic Sources the boundary. Value boundary Voltage e e e e e e e e e e e+01 Functional Value boundary y x Balloon boundary 3 Maxwell Online Help System 300 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

336 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Balloon Boundaries Balloon boundaries model the region outside the drawing space as being nearly infinitely large effectively isolating the model from other voltage or charge sources. Choose Assign/Boundary/Balloon to assign this type of boundary to the outside edges of the model. Visualize the background object as extending to infinity along the edges identified as balloon boundaries. Two types of balloon boundaries are available for electrostatic models: Charge Voltage A balloon boundary is shown on the bottom edge of the structure in the previous figure. As can be seen in the field plot, the E-field is neither tangential to nor normal to a balloon boundary. Symmetry Boundaries Models the case where the charge at infinity matches the charge in the solution region, forcing the net charge to be zero. Physically, this represents an electrically insulated system. Models the case where the voltage at infinity is zero. Physically, this represents an electrically grounded system. In most cases, the results will be very similar to those produced with the Charge option; however, the charge at infinity may not exactly match the charge in the drawing region. A symmetry boundary models a plane of symmetry in a structure. Use this type of boundary condition to take advantage of geometric symmetry and electrical symmetry in a structure. Doing so enables you to reduce the size of your model and conserve computing resources. You could even assign symmetry boundaries to the entire outside of the problem region, but you would have to make sure that all source voltages and currents sum to zero. You could also assign different boundary types (including symmetry) to different edges of the outside of your problem space. Two types of symmetry boundaries Odd and Even may be defined for an electrostatic model. Maxwell Online Help System 301 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

337 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Odd Symmetry An odd symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) of all charges and voltages on one side of a symmetry plane are the opposite of those on the other side. The electric field is perpendicular to this type of boundary, and contours of equal potential are tangential to it. To define an odd symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a value (Dirichlet) boundary with a voltage of zero. For instance, the plane of symmetry shown in the following figure is modeled by an odd symmetry boundary, since the signs of the voltage sources on the left side of the symmetry plane are the opposite of the voltage sources on the right side of the plane (the part that is modeled): Odd Symmetry Boundary Voltage e e e e e e e e e e e+00 y x 3 Maxwell Online Help System 302 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

338 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Even Symmetry An even symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) of the voltages and charges on one side of a symmetry plane are the same as those on the other side. The electric field is tangential to this type of boundary, and contours of equal potential are perpendicular to it. To define an even symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a Neumann boundary acting as an electrical mirror to the model. For instance, the plane of symmetry shown in the following figure could be modeled by an even symmetry boundary, since the signs of the voltage sources on the left side of the symmetry plane are the same as that of the voltage sources on the right side of the symmetry plane (the part that is modeled): Even Symmetry Boundary Voltage e e e e e e e e e e e+00 y x 3 Maxwell Online Help System 303 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

339 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Matching boundaries, which are intended for use on your model s outside boundary edges, allow you to reduce the size of a model by taking advantage of its periodicity. Master/slave boundaries may be defined on the edges of the background surface. A model need not be symmetric to be periodic. For example, the following figure shows the geometric model for a simple electrostatic micromotor: More The rotor is held at zero volts while the six stator poles are switched between three different voltages, causing the rotor to rotate. The electric field pattern at any snapshot of time repeats itself every 180 degrees. Therefore, the field in one half of the motor matches the field in other half. Using matching boundaries allows you to simplify this particular device by modeling only half of the structure. The only requirement is that the E-field over the top half of the left boundary must match the E-field over the bottom half of the left boundary. Matching boundaries allow you to enforce this condition. To define matching boundaries, you must define both a master matching boundary and a slave matching boundary. These boundaries are defined using the Assign/Boundary/ Master and Assign/Boundary/Slave commands. In order to be true matching boundaries, the magnitude of the electric field at each point on one surface (the slave surface) must match the electric field at each corresponding point on the other surface (the mas- Maxwell Online Help System 304 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

340 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources ter surface). The field on the slave boundary must also point in the same direction or in the opposite direction as the field on the master boundary. Note that a symmetry, value, or Neumann boundary cannot be used in place of matching boundaries. The electric field is not necessarily either perpendicular or tangential to periodic surfaces. For example, in the following figure, the electric field would be exactly tangential to the left bounding surface of the half-model only when the poles of the rotor are aligned with the poles of the stator. For all other positions of the rotor, matching boundaries are required. Slave 0 volts E slave E master -100 volts Master 100 volts Some structures have a periodic electric field that repeats every 120 degrees, 90 degrees, or less. In such cases, model the smallest possible periodic segment of the structure. Maxwell Online Help System 305 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

341 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Electrostatic Sources Solid Voltage Edge Voltage Solid Charge Sources Floating Charge Sources (Floating Conductors) Charge Sources for Non-Conductors Charge Sheet Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Electrostatic Sources There are a number of different sources available for electrostatic models: Solid Voltage This type of source specifies the total DC voltage (electric potential) on a conductor. Voltages can be defined as constants or as math functions; however, the potential on a conductor is constant over the entire conductor. Note that conductors that touch should be set to the same voltage or defined as a single voltage source, since their potentials are identical. Solid voltage sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command. Edge Voltage This type of source specifies the total DC voltage on the selected edge or edges. Voltages can be defined as constant or as functions of position (for instance, to model a specific distribution of potential on the surface of a dielectric). Edge voltage sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Sheet command. Solid Charge Sources This type of charge source defines the total charge on an object. The electrostatic field simulator computes the object s potential during the field solution. Solid charge sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command. Two types of solid charge sources are available. Floating Charge Sources (Floating Conductors) This type of source specifies the total charge on a conductor, identifying it as a floating conductor. Charge is assumed to be evenly distributed on the object s surface. Its value can be defined as a constant or as a function of position; however, charge is distributed over a conductor so that the electric potential is constant throughout the conductor. Because of this, the E-field is equal to zero in this region and no solution is computed inside the conductor. Maxwell Online Help System 306 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

342 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Electrostatic Sources Solid Voltage Edge Voltage Solid Charge Sources Floating Charge Sources (Floating Conductors) Charge Sources for Non-Conductors Charge Sheet Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Charge Sources for Non-Conductors This type of source specifies the total charge or charge density on a non-conducting object. If the total charge is specified, charge is assumed to be uniformly distributed throughout the interior of the object. If a constant value for the charge density is specified, charge is assumed to be uniformly distributed throughout the object. The charge density can also be specified as a function of position to model a distribution of charge that varies inside the object. Charge Sheet This type of source specifies the charge on the selected edge or edges. It is used primarily to assign surface charges to non-conductors. The surfaces being referred to are those created by extending the edge in the z direction (cartesian models) or revolving it around the z-axis (axisymmetric models). Specify either the total charge or the charge density. If the total charge is specified, charge is assumed to be evenly distributed on the selected surface. If the charge density is specified, you can define either a uniform charge density or one that varies as a function of position to model specific distributions of charge on the surface. The electrostatic field simulator computes the electric potential on the edge during the solution. Charge sheets are defined using the Assign/Source/Sheet command. Maxwell Online Help System 307 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

343 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions In the magnetostatic solver, each type of boundary condition has an effect on the static magnetic fields in your model. The following boundary types are available for magnetostatic models: Default (Neumann) Value Balloon Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Initially, when you define boundaries and sources for a magnetostatic model, all surfaces are set to one of the following: All outside edges are defined as Neumann boundaries. In this type of boundary, the tangential component of H is zero, forcing the magnetic field to be perpendicular to the boundary. (Usually, you will want to change the default outside boundary condition.) All object interfaces are defined as natural boundaries. This simply means that the tangential component of H and the normal component of B are continuous across the object surface, according to the following relationships: H t1 = H t2 + J s = B n1 where: H t is the magnetic field intensity tangential to the interface. B n is the magnetic flux density normal to the interface. J s is the surface current density. Choose Assign/Boundary/Value to reset sources and boundaries to their default Neumann/natural state. Deleted boundaries and sources also revert to the Neumann/natural boundary condition. B n2 Maxwell Online Help System 308 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

344 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Value Boundaries Use value boundaries to set the magnetic vector potential, A Z, to a constant value on a boundary. The potential can also be defined as a function of position using math functions. Normally, this type of boundary condition is used to specify the potential of conductors and outer boundaries. It can also be used to set the interface between two objects to a potential, modeling the presence of a very thin conductor between the objects. Value boundaries are set using the Assign/Boundary/Value command. They are sometimes called Dirichlet boundaries. The behavior of the magnetic field on a value boundary depends on whether you define a constant or functional potential on the boundary. Remember that the magnetic vector potential, A, is defined to be a field that satisfies the equation: A = B Since the magnetostatic field solver assumes that A has a z-component only and B lies in the xy-plane, the relationship of B to A is given by the following: B = A zxˆ y A z ŷ x More If A Z is constant along a horizontal boundary, the partial derivatives of A Z with respect to x will be zero forcing B to have an x-component only, and be tangential to the boundary. Likewise, if A Z is constant along a vertical boundary, the partial of A Z with respect to y will be zero forcing B to have a y-component only and again indicating that the field will be tangential. In general, the magnetic field will be tangential to any boundary on which A Z has been set to a constant. This condition is shown in the following figure, where the right edge of the problem space has been defined as a value boundary with a constant potential of -10 weber/meter and the left edge has been defined as a Maxwell Online Help System 309 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

345 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources value boundary with a constant potential of +10 weber/meter. y Value Boundary Default (Neumann) Boundary Value Boundary x Balloon Boundary Flux Lines e e e e e e e e e e e+00 3 If the potential is a function of position, the partial derivatives of A Z with respect to x and y will not necessarily be zero. It all depends on what type of math function was used to specify the potential. Thus, B may not be tangential to the boundary and some flux will cross it. Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models In axisymmetric models, A is assumed to have only a φ-component and B is assumed to lie only in the rz-plane. The relationship between A φ and B is given by: B = 1 -- r ( r A z φ )rˆ + ( r Aφ )ẑ r Because equipotential lines of ra φ in axisymmetric models coincide with the lines of magnetic flux, you must specify values or functions of ra (not A) when setting value boundaries. Maxwell Online Help System 310 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

346 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Balloon Boundaries Balloon boundaries model the region outside the drawing space as being nearly infinitely large effectively isolating the model from other sources of current or magnetic fields. Visualize the background object as extending to infinity along the edges identified as balloon boundaries. The magnetic vector potential, A Z or A φ, goes to zero at infinity. Choose Assign/Boundary/Value to assign this type of boundary to the outside edges of the model. A balloon boundary is shown on the bottom of the previous figure. As can be seen in this field plot, the lines of magnetic flux are neither tangential to nor normal to a balloon boundary. Maxwell Online Help System 311 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

347 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Symmetry Boundaries A symmetry boundary models a plane of symmetry in a structure. Use this type of boundary condition to take advantage of geometric symmetry and electrical symmetry in a structure. Doing so enables you to reduce the size of your model allowing you to conserve computing resources. Two types of symmetry boundaries Odd and Even may be defined for an inductance model. Odd Symmetry An odd symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) of all currents on one side of a symmetry plane are the opposite of those on the other side. The magnetic field is tangential to this type of boundary. To define an odd symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a value (Dirichlet) boundary with a magnetic vector potential of zero acting as a magnetic mirror to the model. For instance, the plane of symmetry shown below is modeled by an odd symmetry boundary, since the direction of the current flow in the conductor on the left side of the symmetry plane is the opposite of the current flow in the conductor on the right side of the plane (the side that is modeled): Odd Symmetry Boundary y x Flux Lines e e e e e e e e e e e+00 3 Maxwell Online Help System 312 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

348 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Even Symmetry An even symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) of the currents on one side of a symmetry plane are the same as those on the other side. The magnetic field is perpendicular to this type of boundary. To define an even symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a Neumann boundary. For instance, the plane of symmetry shown below could be modeled by an even symmetry boundary, since the direction of the current flow in the conductor on the left side of the symmetry plane is the same as that of the current flow in the conductor on the right side of the plane (the side that is modeled): Even Symmetry Boundary y x 3 Maxwell Online Help System 313 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

349 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Matching boundaries allow you to take advantage of periodicity in a structure. For example, the following figure shows the cross section of a DC motor. The field in such a motor repeats itself every 120 degrees; that is, the field pattern in one third of the motor matches the magnitude and direction (or the opposite of the direction) of the field pattern in the other two thirds. Matching boundaries force the magnetic field at each point on one boundary (the slave boundary) to match the magnetic field at each corresponding point on the other surface (the master boundary). Modeling one third of the structure allows you to make efficient use of the available computing resources: File Edit Reshape Arrange Object Constraint Model Window pm_motor [read-only] pm_match [read-only] More To define matching boundaries, you must define both a master matching boundary and a slave matching boundary using the Assign/Boundary/Master and Assign/Boundary/ Slave commands. The condition that needs to be enforced, as illustrated in the following figure, is that the magnitude of the magnetic field at each point on the slave boundary surface must match the magnetic field at each corresponding point on the master boundary surface. The field on the slave boundary must point in either the same direction or in the Maxwell Online Help System 314 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

350 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Magnetostatic Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources exact opposite direction as the field on the master boundary: + N + S S + N + + Master H m + H m = H s H s N + One-quarter of a periodic structure (DC motor) S modeled using matching boundaries. Note that a value (Dirichlet), Neumann or symmetry boundary cannot be used to simulate periodicity because the magnetic field is not necessarily either perpendicular or tangential to periodic surfaces. For example, in the quarter model shown above, the magnetic field is exactly perpendicular to the bounding surfaces only when the gap separating the permanent magnets is perfectly horizontal or vertical. For all other positions of the rotor, matching boundaries are required to take advantage of symmetry. S N Slave Maxwell Online Help System 315 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

351 Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Electrostatic Sources Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Magnetostatic Sources Current Perfect Current Current Sheet Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Magnetostatic Sources There are a number of different DC current sources available for magnetostatic models. Current This type of source specifies the DC current flowing in a conductor. You can set either the total current or the current density flowing in the object. If total current is specified, the current density is assumed to be uniform throughout the object. If current density is specified, you may define a uniform current density or one that varies as a function of position. Solid current sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command. Perfect Current This describes the case in which all current in a perfect conductor flows only on the surface of the conductor. Magnetic fields cannot penetrate this type of conductor. You can only specify the total DC current when defining a perfect conductor as a current source. Perfect current sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command. Note: You cannot define a perfect conductor as a current sheet. Current Sheet This type of source specifies the surface current on an edge or edges defining a current sheet. You can set either the total surface current or the surface current density. If the total surface current is specified, the current density is assumed to be uniform. If the surface current density is specified, you may define a uniform current density or one that varies as a function of position to model specific distributions of current on the surface. Current sheets are defined using the Assign/Source/Sheet command. Maxwell Online Help System 316 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

352 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Each type of boundary condition has an effect on the time-varying magnetic fields in your model.the following boundary types are available for eddy current models: Default (Neumann and natural) Value Balloon Symmetry Impedance Matching (Master and Slave) Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries The default boundary conditions for the eddy current field solver are Neumann and natural boundaries. Initially, when you define boundaries and sources for an eddy current model, all surfaces are set to one of the following: All outside edges are defined as Neumann boundaries. In this type of boundary, the tangential component of H(t) is zero, forcing the magnetic field to be perpendicular to the boundary. All object interfaces are defined as natural boundaries. This simply means that the tangential component of H(t) and the normal component of B(t) are continuous across the object surface, according to the following relationships: H t1 () t = H t2 () t + J s () t B n1 () t = B n2 () t where: H t (t) is the magnetic field intensity tangential to the interface. B n (t) is the magnetic flux density normal to the interface. J s (t) is the surface current density. Choose Assign/Boundary/Value to reset sources and boundaries to their default Neumann/natural state. Deleted boundaries and sources also revert to the Neumann/natural boundary condition. Maxwell Online Help System 317 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

353 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Value Boundaries Use value boundaries to set the magnetic vector potential, A Z (t) to a constant value on a boundary. In eddy current problems, the magnetic vector potential is a time-varying quantity in the form: A Z () t = A m cos( ωt + θ) where A m is the magnitude of the potential and θ is its phase angle its offset from a pure cosine wave. Therefore, when specifying A Z on a boundary, you must enter both its magnitude and phase. The magnitude and phase of the potential can also be defined as a function of position using math functions. Normally, this type of boundary condition is used to specify the potential of conductors and outer boundaries. It can also be used to set the interface between two objects to a potential, modeling the presence of a very thin conductor between the objects. Value boundaries are set using the Assign/Boundary/Value command. They are sometimes called Dirichlet boundaries. The behavior of the magnetic field on a value boundary depends on whether you define a constant or functional potential on the boundary. Remember that the magnetic vector potential, A, is defined to be a field that satisfies the equation: A = B Since the eddy current field solver assumes that A has a z-component only and B lies in the xy-plane, the relationship of B to A is given by the following expression: B = A zxˆ y A z ŷ x If A Z is constant, the magnetic field will be tangential to the boundary. If the magnetic vector potential is a function of position, the partial derivatives of A Z with respect to x and y will not necessarily be zero. It all depends on what type of math function was used to specify the potential. Thus, B may not be tangential to the boundary and some flux may cross it. Maxwell Online Help System 318 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

354 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models In axisymmetric models, A is assumed to have only a φ-component and B is assumed to lie only in the rz-plane. The relationship between A and B is given by: B = 1 -- r ( r A z φ )rˆ + ( r Aφ )ẑ r Equipotential lines of ra φ in axisymmetric models coincide with the lines of magnetic flux, as shown below. When you define value boundaries for axisymmetric eddy current problems, specify values or functions of ra φ (not A φ ): File Global Window Show Post Calc Axis of Symmetry y θ=0 x Axis of Symmetry Default boundary Balloon boundary Default boundary Flux Lines e e e e e e e e e e e+00 Value boundary ra φ = 0.1 wb Flux Lines e e e e e e e e e e e-04 Maxwell 2D Post Processor Ver Mouse Mode Object Yes Grid Yes Keyboard No Maximums x e+02 y e+01 Minimums x e+00 y e+01 Mouse Position u v Units mm Mouse Left MENU PICK Mouse Right y θ=90 x Balloon boundary Value boundary ra φ = 0.1 wb 2 Reading Points Maxwell Online Help System 319 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

355 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Balloon Boundaries Balloon boundaries model the region outside the drawing space as being nearly infinitely large effectively isolating the model from other sources of current or magnetic fields. Visualize the background object as extending to infinity along the edges identified as balloon boundaries. The magnetic vector potential, A Z or A φ, goes to zero at infinity. The lines of magnetic flux are neither tangential to nor normal to a balloon boundary. Choose Assign/Boundary/Balloon to assign this type of boundary to the outside edges of the model. Symmetry Boundaries A symmetry boundary models a plane of symmetry in a structure. Use this type of boundary condition to take advantage of geometric symmetry and electrical symmetry in a structure. Doing so enables you to reduce the size of your model allowing you to conserve computing resources. Two types of symmetry boundaries Odd and Even may be defined for an eddy current model. Maxwell Online Help System 320 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

356 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Odd Symmetry An odd symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) of all currents on one side of a symmetry plane are the opposite of those on the other side. The magnetic field is tangential to this type of boundary. The field on one side of the boundary oscillates in the opposite direction from the field on the other side of the boundary that is, they are 180 out of phase. To define an odd symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a value (Dirichlet) boundary with a magnitude and phase angle of zero acting as a magnetic mirror to the model. For instance, the plane of symmetry shown below is modeled by an odd symmetry boundary, since the direction of the current flow in the conductor on the left side of the symmetry plane is opposite to the direction of current flow in the conductor on the right side of the plane (the side that is modeled). The field patterns on the boundary at phase angles of θ=0 and θ=90 are shown: y y File Global Window Show Post Calc Odd Symmetry Boundary θ=0 x Odd Symmetry Boundary θ=90 x Flux Lines e e e e e e e e e e e+00 Flux Lines e e e e e e e e e e e Maxwell 2D Post Processor Ver Mouse Mode Object Yes Grid Yes Keyboard No Maximums x e+01 y e+01 Minimums x e+01 y e+01 Mouse Position u v Units mm Mouse Left MENU PICK Mouse Right Maxwell Online Help System 321 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

357 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Even Symmetry An even symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) of the currents on one side of a symmetry plane are the same as those on the other side. The magnetic field is perpendicular to this type of boundary. The fields on both sides of the boundary oscillate in the same direction that is, they are in phase. To define an even symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a Neumann boundary. For instance, the plane of symmetry shown below is modeled by an even symmetry boundary, since the direction of the current flow in the conductor on the left side of the symmetry plane is the same as that of the current in the conductor on the right side of the plane (the side that is modeled).the field patterns on the boundary at phase angles of θ=0 and θ=90 are shown: y File Global Window Show Post Calc x Even Symmetry Boundary θ=0 Even Symmetry Boundary θ=90 Flux Lines e e e e e e e e e e e-05 Flux Lines e e e e e e e e e e e-08 3 Maxwell 2D Post Processor Ver Mouse Mode Object Yes Grid Yes Keyboard No Maximums x e+01 y e+01 Minimums x e+01 y e+01 Mouse Position u v Units mm Mouse Left MENU PICK Mouse Right y x 2 Maxwell Online Help System 322 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

358 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Impedance Boundaries Impedance boundaries allow you to simulate the effect of induced currents in a conductor without explicitly computing them. The ohmic loss due to induced currents is computed from the tangential components of the H-field along the impedance boundary the surface of the object that you are interested in. Use this boundary condition for models where the following conditions occur: The skin depth in the conductor of interest is less than two orders of magnitude smaller than the dimensions of the structure. In models like this, the Maxwell 2D s meshmaker may not be able to create a fine enough mesh in the conductor to compute eddy currents. The magnetic field decays much more rapidly inside the conductor in the direction that is normal to the surface than it does in directions that are tangential to the surface. The AC current source is relatively far away from the surface where eddy currents occur, compared to the size of the skin depth. The object itself is not included in the solution region. Instead, when drawing the geometry, make the surface along which eddy currents are to be computed an outer surface of the problem region. Then, when defining boundaries, assign an impedance boundary to this surface. To assign an impedance boundary, choose Assign/Boundary/Impedance. By entering the conductivity, σ, and the relative permeability, µ r, of the object, you specify the skin depth of induced eddy currents. The simulator uses this skin depth when computing the electromagnetic field solution. It assumes that the H-field falls off exponentially inside the conductor. For instance, suppose you want to compute eddy current losses in the conductor next to More Maxwell Online Help System 323 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

359 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems More Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources the current source shown below. Current Source at 1 MHz If AC current is passing through the current source at a frequency of 1 MHz, the skin depth in the conductor is given by the following relationship:.5 m where: ω = 2πf = 2π x 10 6 = 6.28 x 10 6 radians/second σ = 5.8 x 10 7 siemens/meter µ r = 1 µ 0 = 4π x 10-7 henries/meter δ = Skin Depth = 6.6x10-5 m ωσµ r µ 0 Thickness 1x10-3 m Conductor µ r =1 σ=5.8x10 7 Substituting these values into this equation, the skin depth is found to be 6.6x10-5 meters. Since this is much smaller than the thickness of the conductor and the surface where currents are induced is relatively far away from the current source, an impedance boundary can be used to model the induced currents in the conductor, as shown below. The conductor itself is not included in the model; instead, the outside boundary of the model is moved to the inside surface of the conductor. This outside surface is defined as an imped- Maxwell Online Help System 324 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

360 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources ance boundary, using the conductivity and permeability specified previously. After generating a solution, you can compute the ohmic loss for the surface using the plane calculator and plot the loss density on the boundary. For impedance boundaries, ohmic loss is given by: where: ω is the angular frequency, which is equal to 2πf. σ is the conductor s conductivity in siemens/meter. µ r is the conductor s relative permeability. µ 0 is the permeability of free space, which is equal to 4π x 10 7 H/m. H t is the tangential component of H on the impedance boundary. H t * is the complex conjugate tangential component of H on the impedance boundary. Note: P Current Source at 1 MHz.5 m Outside edge of problem region Impedance Boundary µ r =1 σ=5.8x10 7 ωµ 0 µ = r H 8σ t H t ds (Watts) Sur Keep in mind that an impedance boundary approximates the effect of eddy currents acting at a shallow skin depth; it does not directly compute them. In general, the fields modeled using an impedance boundary will closely match the field patterns that would actually occur in the structure. However, the field patterns may be different at discontinuities in the surface such as corners. Maxwell Online Help System 325 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

361 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Matching boundaries in eddy current problems operate in a similar way to matching boundaries in magnetostatic problems. The main thing to keep in mind is that the magnitude, direction and phase of the magnetic field on the master boundary is imposed on the slave boundary. Setting the field on the slave boundary to point in the opposite direction from the field on the master boundary causes it to oscillate 180 out of phase. Maxwell Online Help System 326 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

362 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Eddy Current Sources The conductors in an eddy current model can be divided into two groups: Active conductors. These conductors are connected to an external current source. Their total current is constrained to the value you specify. Passive conductors. These conductors are not connected to an external source, but current may be induced in them. Treat any conductor in which the current is constrained to zero (an open circuit) as being connected to a zero-amp current source. Active and passive conductors are shown in the figure below. In this simple transformer model, the coil on the left is an active conductor carrying 1500 amps of current. The coil on the right is a passive conductor in which current is induced by the oscillating magnetic field. The total current is plotted e e e e e e e e e e e+05 Active Passive Maxwell Online Help System 327 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

363 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Active Conductors Non-perfect (Resistive) Conductors Only Define currents for active conductors using the Assign/Source commands. Available current sources for conductors in eddy current models include the following. Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Sources These types of sources specify the magnitude and phase of the AC current flowing through a conductor. They are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command. Solid current sources model eddy and displacement currents in a solid conductor. The amount of eddy current and displacement current as well as the amount of source current are included in the total current you specify. Stranded current sources model current as being carried on strands within a conductor. They can be used to model conductors made up of many individual insulated turns, all small enough so that eddy currents can be neglected. Eddy currents and displacement currents are not computed inside the conductor. Either the total current or the current density may be specified. A uniform current density is assumed throughout the conductor, unless a functional current density is defined. Parallel current sources connect two or more conductors in parallel to an outside source. The total current flowing through all selected conductors (including eddy and displacement currents) is specified. However, the current flowing through individual conductors in the parallel group is unconstrained and its value is computed during the solution. More Maxwell Online Help System 328 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

364 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources The differences between each type of AC current source are shown below: Stranded Solid Parallel I(t)=i 1 (t)+i 2 (t) i R Total current; no eddy or displacement currents. Uniform current density. i Skin Depth For solid and parallel current sources, the current you specify is the total current in the conductor: I Total = I Source + I Eddy + I Displacement where: I Total is the total current flowing through the source. It satisfies Ohm s law with the potential seen by the source. I Source is the current due to the potential difference generated by the external source. It is the current that the source would supply if you reduced the potential difference by the back EMF produced by the eddy and displacement currents in the conductor. I Eddy is the eddy current induced in the conductor due to time-varying magnetic fields penetrating the conductor. I Displacement is the displacement current due to time-varying electric fields in the conductor. It becomes significant only at very high frequencies. For stranded current sources, the current you specify is the total source current (or source current density), I total = I source. Eddy current and displacement current effects are neglected. R Total current; includes eddy and displacement currents. Models skin effect. i 1 (t) i 2 (t) Total current through all selected conductors; includes eddy and displacement currents. Models skin effect. Maxwell Online Help System 329 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

365 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Current Sources for Touching Conductors Conductors whose surfaces touch are assigned sources as follows: If they are not assigned the same material, these conductors must be defined as a parallel source. Otherwise, they will behave as if they are separated by a thin layer of insulating material. If they are assigned the same material, these conductors may be defined either as a parallel source or as grouped conductors assigned a solid source. This distributes current appropriately across the surfaces of the conductors. Current Sources for Perfect Conductors A perfect current source specifies the magnitude and phase of the AC current flowing through a perfect conductor. All currents in perfect conductors are surface currents, simulating the conductor s behavior at very high frequencies. You can only specify the magnitude and phase of the total current. Perfect current sources are set via the Assign/Source/Solid command. Sheet current sources cannot be defined for perfect conductors. Current Sheets This type of source specifies the magnitude and phase of the AC current on an edge defining a current sheet. Eddy current effects are not modeled, since all currents are surface currents. Specify either the total surface current or the surface current density. The total surface current is assumed to be distributed uniformly across the edge. The surface current density can be defined as a function of position or as a uniform current density. Surface currents are set via the Assign/Source/Sheet command. Maxwell Online Help System 330 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

366 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Passive Conductors Passive conductors can have eddy and displacement currents flowing through them, but have no component of source current. Two types of passive conductors may be defined: To define a passive conductor modeling a short circuit, simply assign a conducting material to the desired object. Do not assign source current to it. There are no constraints on the eddy and displacement currents flowing in this type of passive conductor. For cartesian models, visualize this type of conductor as being infinitely long and eventually looping back on itself. For axisymmetric models, visualize this type of conductor as a conducting ring that carries no source current. To define a passive conductor modeling an open circuit, assign a solid current source with a magnitude and phase of zero to it. Current may be induced in it, but the net current is constrained to zero amps. In cartesian models, visualize this type of conductor as an infinitely long conducting rod with no return path for current. In axisymmetric models, visualize this type of conductor as a conducting ring with a gap in it. Maxwell Online Help System 331 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

367 Eddy Current Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Value Boundaries in Axisymmetric Models Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Impedance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Eddy Current Sources Active Conductors Solid, Stranded, and Parallel Current Srcs Current Sources for Touching Conductors Current Sources for Perfect Conductors Current Sheets Passive Conductors Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Specifying Phase In Single and Multi-Phase Systems Remember, all AC currents are time-varying quantities in the form: I = I m cos( ωt + θ) where I m is the magnitude of the current and θ is its phase angle the offset of the current from a pure cosine wave. Therefore, when specifying a current or current density, you must enter both its magnitude and phase. In a single-phase system, time t=0 is usually chosen so that the phase angle, θ, is zero that is, the current peaks at t=0. In multi-phase systems involving currents that are out of phase with each other, time t=0 is usually chosen so that one current has a phase angle equal to zero. For example, phase angles in a three-phase system could be assigned as shown here: Phase B= I m cos(ωt+120 ) 120 Imaginary 120 Phase A = I m cos(ωt+0 ) Real Phase C= I m cos(ωt+240 ) Maxwell Online Help System 332 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

368 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Resistance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries DC Conduction Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Eddy Axial Sources More Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources DC Conduction Boundary Conditions Each type of boundary condition has an effect on the fields and conduction currents in your model.the following boundary types are available for DC conduction models: Default (Neumann and natural) Value Balloon Symmetry Resistance Matching (Master and Slave) Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries The default boundary conditions for the DC conduction field solver are Neumann and Natural boundaries. Initially, when you define boundaries and sources for an DC conduction model, all surfaces are set to one of the following: All outside edges and edges of objects that have been declared to be non-existent are defined as Neumann boundaries. In this type of boundary, the tangential components of E(-vφ) and the normal components of J(σE) are continuous along the boundary. On such boundaries, the normal component of E is zero, forcing it and the conduction current, J, to be tangential to the boundary. As a consequence, current flow will also be tangential to the boundary modeling the condition where no current is allowed to flow into the non-existent object or the area outside the solution region. Physically, this represents the interface between a conducting area and a non-conducting area (like a hole in a plate), since materials whose conductivities are zero are automatically excluded from the DC conduction solution. All object interfaces are defined as natural boundaries. This simply means that E and J are continuous across the object surface, according to the following relationships: = E t1 J n1 where: E t is the electric field intensity tangential to the interface. J n is the conduction current density normal to the interface. Accept this boundary condition at all object interfaces where the potential is not = E t2 J n2 Maxwell Online Help System 333 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

369 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Resistance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries DC Conduction Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Eddy Axial Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources known. Choose Assign/Boundary/Value to reset sources and boundaries to their default Neumann/natural state. Deleted boundaries and sources also revert to the Neumann/natural boundary condition. Maxwell Online Help System 334 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

370 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Resistance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries DC Conduction Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Eddy Axial Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Value Boundaries Use value boundaries to set the electric scalar potential, φ, to a constant value on a boundary. The potential can also be defined as a function of position using math functions. Normally, this type of boundary condition is used to specify the voltages on conductors and outer boundaries. It can also be used to set the interface between two objects to a potential, modeling the presence of a very thin conductor between the objects. Value boundaries are set using the Assign/Boundary/Value command. They are sometimes called Dirichlet boundaries. The behavior of conduction currents and the electric field on a value boundary depends on whether you define a constant or functional potential on the boundary. If the potential is constant, the tangential components of E(-vφ) and J(-σvφ) are zero, forcing them to be perpendicular to the boundary. The equipotential contours of φ are then parallel to the boundary, as shown below: Value boundary V = 3 Volts Default boundary Default boundary Default boundary Value boundary V = 0 Volts If the potential is a function of position, E and J may not be perpendicular to the boundary. It all depends on what type of math function was used to specify the potential. The tangential components of E(-vφ) and J(-σvφ) on the boundary will not be equal to zero if φ is constantly changing on the boundary, and the equipotential contours of φ will not be parallel to the boundary. Maxwell Online Help System 335 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

371 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Resistance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries DC Conduction Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Eddy Axial Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Balloon Boundaries Balloon boundaries model the region outside the drawing space as being nearly infinitely large effectively isolating the model from other voltage sources. Use the Assign/Boundary/Balloon command to assign this type of boundary to the background object of the model, provided that it is not included in the material setup. Visualize the background object as extending to infinity along the edges identified as balloon boundaries. The electric potential, φ, goes to zero at infinity. The lines of equal potential are neither tangential to nor normal to a balloon boundary. If the background is filled with a conductive material it will not be excluded. Then the balloon boundary can be assigned to the entire background object (as opposed to an edge) and the solution becomes valid. The balloon boundary adds layers of large triangles outside the edges of the defined problem region. These triangles have the same material property as the background object but have no relation to the object or material that borders the edge of the problem space. A value boundary is placed at the outside edge of the balloon triangles. This is designed to move your boundary condition sufficiently away so that the fields in the problem region are unconstrained. Note: In electrostatic models, no value boundaries are placed for a zero-charge balloon boundary. A Neumann boundary is placed at the outside edge instead. Typically, assign a balloon boundary to all outside edges of the problem. It would be impractical to balloon only part of an outside edge, because the side of the balloon triangles would be left with a Neumann boundary that acts as an even symmetry boundary along a line other than the edge. This side rests along a line running from the origin of the problem space through the endpoint of the selected edge. Maxwell Online Help System 336 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

372 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Resistance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries DC Conduction Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Eddy Axial Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Symmetry Boundaries A symmetry boundary models a plane of symmetry in a structure. use this type of boundary condition to take advantage of geometric symmetry and electrical symmetry in a structure. Doing so enables you to reduce the size of your model allowing you to conserve computing resources. Two types of symmetry boundaries Odd and Even may be defined for a DC conduction model. Odd Symmetry An odd symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) of all voltages on one side of a symmetry plane are the opposite of those on the other side. E and J are perpendicular to this type of boundary. To define an odd symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a value (Dirichlet) boundary with a voltage of zero. Even Symmetry An even symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) of the voltages on one side of a symmetry plane are the same as those on the other side. E and J are tangential to this type of boundary. To define an even symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a Neumann boundary acting as an electrical mirror to the model. Maxwell Online Help System 337 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

373 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Resistance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries DC Conduction Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Eddy Axial Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Resistance Boundaries A resistance boundary models a very thin layer of resistive material (such as that caused by deposits or oxidation on a metallic surface) on a conductor at a known potential. Use this boundary condition when the resistive layer s thickness is much smaller than the other dimensions of the model. For instance, in the following example, the resistive layer on the conductor is 5x10-6 meters thick. Since this is four orders of magnitude smaller than the dimensions of the model, use a resistance boundary on the conductor to avoid having to create a very thin object modeling the layer which could cause problems when the Maxwell 2D generates a mesh for the model and solves for its conduction currents. Conductor (V=10 Volts) 0.15 m 0.05 m 0.35 m Conducting Plate Conductor with Resistive Layer (V=5 Volts, Layer Thickness=5x10-6 m) 0.1 m 0.4 m More 0.05 m 0.15 m To assign a resistance boundary, choose Assign/Boundary/Resistance. Specify the thickness and conductivity of the resistive material, and the potential of the conductor. Resistance boundaries can only be applied to outer boundaries and to the edges of Maxwell Online Help System 338 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

374 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Resistance Boundaries Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries DC Conduction Sources Solid Voltage Edge Voltage AC Conduction Boundary Conditions AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Eddy Axial Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources excluded objects. (For example, the conductor with the resistive layer above would be defined as an excluded object when assigning materials.) Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Matching boundaries in DC conduction problems operate in a similar way to matching boundaries in electrostatic problems. The main thing to keep in mind is that the magnitude and direction of the electric field on the master boundary is imposed on the slave boundary. DC Conduction Sources There are several different sources available for DC conduction models. Solid Voltage This type of source specifies the total DC voltage (electric potential) on a conductor. Voltages can be defined as constants or as functions; however, the voltage is assumed to be uniform over the source. Solid voltage sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command. Edge Voltage This type of source specifies the total DC voltage on the selected edge or edges. Voltages can be defined as constants or as functions of position to model specific distributions of potential on a dielectric s surface. Edge voltage sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Sheet command. Maxwell Online Help System 339 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

375 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions DC Conduction Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Eddy Axial Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions Each type of boundary condition has an effect on the fields and conduction currents in your model.the following boundary types are available for AC conduction models: Default (Neumann and Natural) Value Balloon Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries The default boundary conditions for the AC conduction field solver are Neumann and natural boundaries. Initially, when you define boundaries and sources for an AC conduction model, all surfaces are set to one of the following: All outside edges are defined as Neumann boundaries. In this type of boundary, the tangential components of E(-vφ) and the normal components of J(-σvφ) are continuous along the boundary. On a boundary at the edge of the drawing region, the normal component of E is zero, forcing the field to be tangential to the boundary. The conduction current, J, is also tangential. All object interfaces are defined as natural boundaries. This simply means that E and J are continuous across the object surface, according to the following relationships: = where: E t is the electric field intensity tangential to the interface. J n is the conduction current density normal to the interface. E t1 J n1 Choose Assign/Boundary/Value to reset sources and boundaries to their default Neumann/natural state. Deleted boundaries and sources also revert to the Neumann/natural boundary condition. = E t2 J n2 Maxwell Online Help System 340 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

376 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions DC Conduction Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Eddy Axial Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Value Boundaries Use value boundaries to set the electric scalar potential, φ, on a boundary. In AC conduction models, the electric potential is a time-varying quantity in the form: φ() t = φ m cos( ωt + θ) where φ m is the magnitude of the potential and θ is its phase angle its offset from a pure cosine wave. Therefore, when specifying φ on a boundary, you must enter both its magnitude and phase. The magnitude and phase of the potential can also be defined as a function of position using math functions. Value boundaries are set using the Assign/Boundary/Value command. They are sometimes called Dirichlet boundaries. Normally, this type of boundary condition is used to specify the voltages on conductors and outer boundaries. It can also be used to set the interface between two objects to a potential, modeling the presence of a very thin conductor between the objects. The behavior of the E-field on a value boundary depends on whether you define a constant or functional potential on the boundary. If the potential is constant, the tangential components of E(-vφ) and J(-σvφ) are zero, forcing them to be perpendicular to the boundary. The equipotential contours of φ are then parallel to the boundary. If the potential is a function of position, E may not be perpendicular to the boundary. It all depends on what type of math function was used to specify the potential. The tangential components of E(-vφ) and J(-σvφ) on the boundary will not be equal to zero if φ is constantly changing on the boundary, and the equipotential contours of φ will not be parallel to the boundary. Balloon Boundaries Balloon boundaries model the region outside the drawing space as being nearly infinitely large effectively isolating the model from other voltage sources. Choose Assign/Boundary/Balloon to assign this type of boundary to the outside edges of the model. Visualize the background object as extending to infinity along the edges identified as balloon boundaries. The electric potential, φ, goes to zero at infinity. The lines of equal potential are neither tangential to nor normal to a balloon boundary. Maxwell Online Help System 341 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

377 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions DC Conduction Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Eddy Axial Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Symmetry Boundaries A symmetry boundary models a plane of symmetry in a structure. Use this type of boundary condition to take advantage of geometric symmetry and electrical symmetry in a structure. Doing so enables you to reduce the size of your model allowing you to conserve computing resources. Two types of symmetry boundaries Odd and Even may be defined for an AC conduction model. Odd Symmetry An odd symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) of all voltages on one side of a symmetry plane are the opposite of those on the other side. J and E are perpendicular to this type of boundary. The field on one side of the boundary oscillates in the opposite direction from field on the other side of the boundary that is, they are 180 out of phase. To define an odd symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a value (Dirichlet) boundary with a voltage of zero and a phase angle of zero. Even Symmetry An even symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) of the voltages on one side of a symmetry plane are the same as those on the other side. J and E are tangential to this type of boundary. The field on both sides of the boundary oscillates in the same direction that is, in phase. To define an even symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a Neumann boundary acting as an electrical mirror to the model. Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Matching boundaries in AC conduction problems operate in a way that is similar to matching boundaries in electrostatic problems. The main thing to keep in mind is that the magnitude, direction and phase of the electric field on the master boundary is imposed on the slave boundary. Setting the field on the slave boundary to point in the opposite direction from the field on the master boundary causes it to oscillate 180 out of phase. Maxwell Online Help System 342 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

378 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions DC Conduction Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions AC Conduction Sources Solid Voltage Edge Voltage Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Eddy Axial Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources AC Conduction Sources There are several sources available for AC conduction models. Note: Solid Voltage This type of source specifies the magnitude and phase of the AC voltage (electric potential) on a conductor. Voltages can be defined as constants or as math functions; however, the voltage is assumed to be uniform over the source. Solid voltage sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command. Edge Voltage Remember, all voltages in AC conduction models are time-varying quantities in the form: V() t = V m cos( ωt + θ) where V m is the magnitude of the voltage and θ is its phase angle the offset of the current from a pure cosine wave. Therefore, when specifying a voltage, you must enter both its magnitude and phase. This type of source specifies the magnitude and phase of the AC voltage on the selected edge or edges. Voltages can be defined as constants or as functions of position to model specific distributions of potential on the surfaces of dielectrics. Edge voltage sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Sheet command. Maxwell Online Help System 343 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

379 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions DC Conduction Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching Boundaries Eddy Axial Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions The following boundary types are available for eddy axial models: Default (Neumann and Natural) Value Balloon symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) This section describes each type of boundary condition and its effect on the fields and conduction currents in your model. Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries The default boundary conditions for the eddy axial field solver are Neumann and natural boundaries. Initially, when you define boundaries and sources for an eddy axial model, all surfaces are set to one of the following: All outside edges are defined as Neumann boundaries. In this type of boundary, the tangential component of E is zero, forcing the electric field to be perpendicular to the boundary. All object interfaces are defined as natural boundaries. This simply means that the tangential component of E and the normal component of J are continuous across the object surface, according to the following relationships: E t1 () t = E t2 () t J n1 () t = J n2 () t where: E t (t) is the electric field tangential to the interface. J n (t) is the current density normal to the interface. Choose Assign/Boundary/Value to reset sources and boundaries to their default Neumann/natural state. Deleted boundaries and sources also revert to the Neumann/natural boundary condition. Maxwell Online Help System 344 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

380 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions DC Conduction Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching Boundaries Eddy Axial Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Value Boundaries Use value boundaries to set the magnetic field, H, to a constant value on a boundary. Normally, this type of boundary condition is used to specify the strength of external magnetic fields in a model the only excitations available in the eddy axial field solver. Value boundaries are sometimes called Dirichlet boundaries. In eddy axial problems, the magnetic field is a time-varying quantity in the form: H() t = H m cos( ωt + θ) where H m is the magnitude of the potential and θ is its phase angle its offset from a pure cosine wave. Therefore, when specifying H on a boundary, you must enter both its magnitude and phase. The magnitude and phase of the magnetic field can also be defined as a function of position using math functions. The eddy axial field solver assumes that H has a z-component only. The behavior of the magnetic field on a value boundary depends on whether you define a constant or functional value boundary. If H Z is constant, the electric field and conduction current will be tangential to the boundary. If the potential is a function of position, the partial derivatives of H Z with respect to x and y will not necessarily be zero. It all depends on what type of math function was used to specify the potential. Thus, J may not be tangential to the boundary and some current will cross it. Balloon Boundaries Balloon boundaries model the region outside the drawing space as being nearly infinitely large effectively isolating the model from other magnetic field sources. Choose Assign/Boundary/Balloon to assign this type of boundary to the outside edges of the model. Visualize the background object as extending to infinity along the edges identified as balloon boundaries. The magnetic field, H Z, goes to zero at infinity. Maxwell Online Help System 345 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

381 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions DC Conduction Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching Boundaries Eddy Axial Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Symmetry Boundaries A symmetry boundary models a plane of symmetry in a structure. Use this type of boundary condition to take advantage of geometric symmetry and electrical symmetry in a structure. Doing so enables you to reduce the size of your model allowing you to conserve computing resources. Two types of symmetry boundaries Odd and Even may be defined for an eddy axial model. Odd Symmetry An odd symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) of all magnetic field sources on one side of a symmetry plane are the opposite of those on the other side. The resulting electric field is tangential to this type of boundary. The field on one side of the boundary oscillates in the opposite direction from the field on the other side of the boundary that is, they are 180 out of phase. To define an odd symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a value (Dirichlet) boundary with a magnetic field value of zero and a phase angle of zero. Even Symmetry An even symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) of the magnetic sources on one side of a symmetry plane are the same as those on the other side. The magnetic field is perpendicular to this type of boundary. The field on both sides of the boundary oscillates in the same direction that is, in phase. To define an even symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a Neumann boundary. Matching Boundaries Matching boundaries in eddy axial problems operate in a similar way to matching boundaries in magnetostatic and eddy current problems. The main thing to keep in mind is that the magnitude, direction and phase of the electric field on the master boundary is imposed on the slave boundary. Setting the field on the slave boundary to point in the opposite direction from the field on the master boundary causes it to oscillate 180 out of phase. Maxwell Online Help System 346 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

382 DC Conduction Boundary Conditions DC Conduction Sources AC Conduction Boundary Conditions AC Conduction Sources Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Eddy Axial Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Eddy Axial Sources The only sources available for the eddy axial field solver are applied magnetic fields. Choose Assign/Boundary/Value to define the boundary conditions modeling these fields. Maxwell Online Help System 347 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

383 Transient Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Transient Sources Solid Current Solid Voltage Current Sheet Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Transient Boundary Conditions EMpulse only. In the transient solver, each type of boundary condition has an effect on the static magnetic fields in your model. The following boundary types are available for transient models: Default (Neumann) Value Balloon Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Initially, when you define boundaries and sources for a transient model, all surfaces are set to the following: All outside edges are defined as Neumann boundaries. In this type of boundary, the normal component of H is zero, forcing the magnetic field to be tangential to the boundary. (Usually, you will want to change the default outside boundary condition.) All object interfaces are defined as natural boundaries. This means that the tangential component of H and the normal component of B are continuous across the object surface, according to the following relationships: H t1 = H t2 + J s = B n1 where: H t is the magnetic field intensity tangential to the interface. B n is the magnetic flux density normal to the interface. J s is the surface current density. Choose Assign/Boundary/Value to reset sources and boundaries to their default Neumann/natural state. Deleted boundaries and sources also revert to the Neumann/natural boundary condition. B n2 Maxwell Online Help System 348 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

384 Transient Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Transient Sources Solid Current Solid Voltage Current Sheet Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Value Boundaries Use value, or Dirichlet, boundaries to set the magnetic vector potential, A Z, to a constant value on a boundary. The potential can also be defined as a function of position using math functions. Normally, this type of boundary condition is used to specify the potential of conductors and outer boundaries. It can also be used to set the interface between two objects to a potential, modeling the presence of a very thin conductor between the objects. Value boundaries are set using the Assign/Boundary/Value command. The behavior of the magnetic field on a value boundary depends on whether you define a constant or functional potential on the boundary. Remember that the magnetic vector potential, A, is defined to be a field that satisfies the equation: A = B Since the transient solver assumes that A has a z-component only and B lies in the xyplane, the relationship of B to A is given by the following: B = A zxˆ y A z ŷ x If A Z is constant along a horizontal boundary, the partial derivatives of A Z with respect to x will be zero forcing B to have an x-component only, and to be tangential to the boundary. Likewise, if A Z is constant along a vertical boundary, the partial of A Z with respect to y will be zero forcing B to have a y-component only and again indicating that the field will be tangential. In general, the magnetic field will be tangential to any boundary on which A Z has been set to a constant. This condition is shown in the following figure, where the right edge of the problem space has been defined as a value boundary with a constant potential of -10 weber/meter and the left edge has been defined as a Maxwell Online Help System 349 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

385 Transient Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Transient Sources Solid Current Solid Voltage Current Sheet Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources value boundary with a constant potential of +10 weber/meter. y Value Boundary Default (Neumann) Boundary Value Boundary x Balloon Boundary Flux Lines e e e e e e e e e e e+00 3 If the potential is a function of position, the partial derivatives of A Z with respect to x and y will not necessarily be zero. It all depends on what type of math function was used to specify the potential. Thus, B may not be tangential to the boundary and some flux will cross it. Maxwell Online Help System 350 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

386 Transient Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Transient Sources Solid Current Solid Voltage Current Sheet Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Balloon Boundaries Balloon boundaries model the region outside the drawing space as being nearly infinitely large effectively isolating the model from other sources of current or magnetic fields. Visualize the background object as extending to infinity along the edges identified as balloon boundaries. The magnetic vector potential A Z goes to zero at infinity. Choose Assign/Boundary/Balloon to assign this type of boundary to the outside edges of the model. A balloon boundary is shown on the bottom of the previous figure. As can be seen in this field plot, the lines of magnetic flux are neither tangential to nor normal to a balloon boundary. Maxwell Online Help System 351 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

387 Transient Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Transient Sources Solid Current Solid Voltage Current Sheet Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Symmetry Boundaries A symmetry boundary models a plane of symmetry in a structure. Use this type of boundary condition to take advantage of geometric and electrical symmetry in a structure. Doing so enables you to reduce the size of your model allowing you to conserve computing resources. Two types of symmetry boundaries Odd and Even may be defined for a model. Choose Assign/Boundary/Symmetry to define the symmetry boundaries. Odd Symmetry An odd symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) of all currents on one side of a symmetry plane are the opposite of those on the other side. The magnetic field is tangential to this type of boundary. To define an odd symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a value (Dirichlet) boundary with a magnetic vector potential of zero acting as a magnetic mirror to the model. For instance, the plane of symmetry shown below is modeled by an odd symmetry boundary, since the direction of the current flow in the conductor on the left side of the symmetry plane is the opposite of the current flow in the conductor on the right side of the plane (the side that is modeled): Odd Symmetry Boundary y x Flux Lines e e e e e e e e e e e+00 3 Maxwell Online Help System 352 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

388 Transient Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Transient Sources Solid Current Solid Voltage Current Sheet Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Even Symmetry An even symmetry boundary models a structure in which the signs (positive or negative) of the currents on one side of a symmetry plane are the same as those on the other side. The magnetic field is perpendicular to this type of boundary. To define an even symmetry boundary, the simulator sets the selected edge to a Neumann boundary. For instance, the plane of symmetry shown below could be modeled by an even symmetry boundary, since the direction of the current flow in the conductor on the left side of the symmetry plane is the same as that of the current flow in the conductor on the right side of the plane (the side that is modeled): Even Symmetry Boundary y x 3 Maxwell Online Help System 353 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

389 Transient Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Transient Sources Solid Current Solid Voltage Current Sheet Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Matching boundaries allow you to take advantage of periodicity in a structure. For example, the following figure shows the cross-section of a DC motor. The field in such a motor repeats itself every 120 degrees; that is, the field pattern in one third of the motor matches the magnitude and direction (or the opposite of the direction) of the field pattern in the other two thirds. Matching boundaries force the magnetic field at each point on one boundary (the slave boundary) to match the magnetic field at each corresponding point on the other surface (the master boundary). Modeling one third of the structure allows you to make efficient use of the available computing resources: File Edit Reshape Arrange Object Constraint Model Window pm_motor [read-only] pm_match [read-only] More To define matching boundaries, you must define both a master matching boundary and a slave matching boundary using the Assign/Boundary/Master and Assign/Boundary/ Slave commands. The condition that needs to be enforced, as illustrated in the following figure, is that the magnitude of the magnetic field at each point on the slave boundary surface must match the magnetic field at each corresponding point on the master boundary surface. The field on the slave boundary must point in either the same direction or in the exact opposite direction as the field on the master boundary. Note that a value, Neumann, or symmetry boundary cannot be used to simulate periodicity because the magnetic field is not necessarily either perpendicular or tangential to peri- Maxwell Online Help System 354 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

390 Transient Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Transient Sources Solid Current Solid Voltage Current Sheet Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources odic surfaces. For example, in the quarter model shown below, the magnetic field is exactly perpendicular to the bounding surfaces only when the gap separating the permanent magnets is perfectly horizontal or vertical. For all other positions of the rotor, matching boundaries are required to take advantage of symmetry. + N + S S + N + + Master H m + H m = H s H s N + One-quarter of a periodic structure (DC motor) S modeled using matching boundaries. S N Slave Maxwell Online Help System 355 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

391 Transient Boundary Conditions Default (Neumann and Natural) Boundaries Value Boundaries Balloon Boundaries Symmetry Boundaries Odd Symmetry Even Symmetry Matching (Master and Slave) Boundaries Transient Sources Solid Current Solid Voltage Current Sheet Maxwell 2D Setup Boundaries/Sources Transient Sources You may assign solid or sheet sources to a transient model. Solid Current This type of source specifies the current flowing in a conductor. You can set either the total current or the current density flowing in the object. If total current is specified, the current density is assumed to be uniform throughout the object. If current density is specified, you may define a uniform current density or one that varies as a function of position. Solid current sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command. Solid Voltage This type of source specifies the total voltage drop (electric potential) over the length of a conductor. Voltage drops can be defined as constants or as math functions; however, the potential on a conductor is constant over the entire cross-section of the conductor. Note that conductors that touch should be set to the same voltage or defined as a single voltage source, since their potentials are identical. Solid voltage sources are defined using the Assign/Source/Solid command. Current Sheet This type of source specifies the surface current on an edge or edges defining a current sheet. You can set either the total surface current or the surface current density. If the total surface current is specified, the current density is assumed to be uniform. If the surface current density is specified, you may define a uniform current density or one that varies as a function of position to model specific distributions of current on the surface. Current sheets are defined using the Assign/Source/Sheet command. Maxwell Online Help System 356 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

392 Edit Menu (Boundary Manager) Boundary Manager Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Clear Edit/Select Edit/Select/Objects Edit/Select/Objects/By Clicking Edit/Select/Objects/By Area Edit/Select/Objects/By Name Edit/Select/Edge Edit/Select/Trace Things to Consider Edit/Select/Object Intersect Edit/Deselect All Boundary Manager Edit Menu Edit Menu (Boundary Manager) Use the Edit commands to: Select objects to be assigned boundaries and sources. Deselect objects. Delete and undelete boundaries and sources. When you choose Edit from the Boundary Manager menu bar, the following menu appears: Maxwell Online Help System 357 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

393 Edit Menu (Boundary Manager) Boundary Manager Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Clear Edit/Select Edit/Select/Objects Edit/Select/Objects/By Clicking Edit/Select/Objects/By Area Edit/Select/Objects/By Name Edit/Select/Edge Edit/Select/Trace Things to Consider Edit/Select/Object Intersect Edit/Deselect All Boundary Manager Edit Menu Boundary Manager Edit Commands The following commands appear in the Boundary Manager s Edit menu: Undo Clear Reverses the effect of the last Clear command. Clear Deletes the selected boundary. Select Selects items to be edited: Object Selects all items in a rectangular area. Edge Selects the edge of an object. Trace Selects the trace layers. Object Intersect Selects the intersection of two objects. Deselect All Deselects all selected objects. Maxwell Online Help System 358 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

394 Edit Menu (Boundary Manager) Boundary Manager Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Clear Edit/Select Edit/Select/Objects Edit/Select/Objects/By Clicking Edit/Select/Objects/By Area Edit/Select/Objects/By Name Edit/Select/Edge Edit/Select/Trace Things to Consider Edit/Select/Object Intersect Edit/Deselect All Boundary Manager Edit Menu Edit/Undo Clear Choose this command to reverse the effect of the Edit/Clear command. All boundaries in the active project window that were deleted using the most recent Edit/Clear command are restored and displayed in their original locations. The restored boundary remains selected until you deselect them. Edit/Undo Clear only restores boundaries deleted by the latest Edit/Clear command; it cannot restore boundaries deleted in previous Edit/Clear commands. It also cannot restore boundaries after other boundaries have been cut, copied, or pasted. Edit/Clear Choose this command to delete all selected boundaries. > To clear items: 1. Select the desired boundary by clicking on it or by using one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Edit/Clear. The selected boundaries are deleted from the screen. Edit/Undo Clear restores the latest set of boundaries deleted with Edit/Clear. However, previously cleared boundaries are lost. Maxwell Online Help System 359 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

395 Edit Menu (Boundary Manager) Boundary Manager Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Clear Edit/Select Edit/Select/Objects Edit/Select/Objects/By Clicking Edit/Select/Objects/By Area Edit/Select/Objects/By Name Edit/Select/Edge Edit/Select/Trace Things to Consider Edit/Select/Object Intersect Edit/Deselect All Boundary Manager Edit Menu Edit/Select Use the Edit/Select commands to select the items to which you will assign the boundaries or sources. You can also select (and deselect) objects by clicking the left mouse button on them. The number of selected items is displayed in the message bar at the bottom of the 2D Boundary/Source Manager window. The commands on the Edit/Select menu are listed below: Object Edge Trace Object Intersect Selects items: By Clicking Selects objects by clicking on them. By Area Selects objects in a defined area. By Name Selects the object by choosing its name. Selects the geometric edge of an object. Selects edges by tracing them with a polyline. Selects the intersecting region of two objects. You must select an item or group of items with one of the Edit/Select commands before entering the commands in the following table. Selecting identifies the objects and text on which those commands act. The following commands require a selection in the Boundary Manager: Clear Edit Menu Deselect All Assign Menu Boundary Source End Connection Maxwell Online Help System 360 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

396 Edit Menu (Boundary Manager) Boundary Manager Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Clear Edit/Select Edit/Select/Objects Edit/Select/Objects/ By Clicking Edit/Select/Objects/ By Area Edit/Select/Objects/ By Name Edit/Select/Edge Edit/Select/Trace Things to Consider Edit/Select/Object Intersect Edit/Deselect All Boundary Manager Edit Menu Edit/Select/Objects Choose the Edit/Select/Objects commands to select the objects in the model to which to assign boundaries and sources. By Clicking By Area By Name Edit/Select/Objects/By Clicking Choose this command to select or deselect individual objects by clicking on them. > To select or deselect objects by clicking: 1. Choose Edit/Select/Objects/By Clicking. 2. Click on the object you wish to select or deselect. The selected objects are highlighted. Edit/Select/Objects/By Area Choose this command to select all the objects contained within a specified area. > To select objects in a defined area: 1. Choose Edit/Select/Objects/By Area. The cursor changes to crosshairs. 2. Click on a point that represents a corner of the region in which the objects will be selected. 3. Click on the point that represents the opposite corner. The objects within the area are selected. Grouped objects are only selected if the entire group falls within the selected area. Edit/Select/Objects/By Name Selects objects by clicking on them. Selects objects in a defined area. Selects the object by choosing its name. Choose this command to select individual objects by entering their names. > To select all objects by name: 1. Choose Edit/Select/Objects/By Name. A window appears. 2. Enter the name of the object to select in the blank field. WIldcards and similar expressions may also be entered in this field. 3. Choose OK. The object is highlighted, indicating that it has been selected. Maxwell Online Help System 361 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

397 Edit Menu (Boundary Manager) Boundary Manager Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Clear Edit/Select Edit/Select/Objects Edit/Select/Objects/By Clicking Edit/Select/Objects/By Area Edit/Select/Objects/By Name Edit/Select/Edge Edit/Select/Trace Things to Consider Edit/Select/Object Intersect Edit/Deselect All Boundary Manager Edit Menu Edit/Select/Edge Choose Edit/Select/Edge to select an object edge (a single straight or curved segment of the object s outline) by clicking on it. This command can also be used to select edges of the background object. > To select an edge (or edges): 1. Choose Edit/Select/Edge. 2. Move the cursor to the desired edge. 3. Click the left mouse button. The system highlights the selected edge. If you select an edge by mistake, you may deselect it by clicking on it a second time. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional edges. 5. To exit the command, click the right mouse button anywhere within the geometric model s display area. Maxwell Online Help System 362 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

398 Edit Menu (Boundary Manager) Boundary Manager Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Clear Edit/Select Edit/Select/Objects Edit/Select/Objects/By Clicking Edit/Select/Objects/By Area Edit/Select/Objects/By Name Edit/Select/Edge Edit/Select/Trace Things to Consider Edit/Select/Object Intersect Edit/Deselect All Boundary Manager Edit Menu Edit/Select/Trace Choose Edit/Select/Trace to select object edges by tracing a line over them. This command can also be used to select edges of the background object. One difference between Edit/Select/Trace and Edit/Select/Edge is that while Edit/ Select/Edge forces you to select the entire edge between two object vertices, Edit/ Select/Trace allows you to trace along a portion of an edge, turn at the intersection with another object, and follow the edge of the other object. Another distinction is that an edge may be curved, but a trace must be comprised of straight line segments. > To select object edges by tracing them: 1. Choose Edit/Select/Trace. 2. Move the cursor to one corner of an object edge and click the left mouse button. The system anchors the trace-line at that corner. 3. Move the cursor along the object edge to another object corner, possibly one from another object that touches the first edge. Click the left mouse button again. 4. Repeat step 3 to continue tracing along the desired path. Note: To delete the previously selected corner, click the right mouse button. If you attempt to delete a point when no other points are selected, the command is cancelled. 5. When you ve finished outlining the desired boundary, click the left mouse button twice on the same corner. Things to Consider In general, use the Edit/Select/Edge command to select edges to be assigned matching boundaries. If you select these edges using the Edit/Select/Trace command, you must trace edges between object vertex points. If necessary, insert an extra vertex at the end point of the trace using the Reshape/Vertex/Insert command in the 2D Modeler. Maxwell Online Help System 363 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

399 Edit Menu (Boundary Manager) Boundary Manager Edit Commands Edit/Undo Clear Edit/Clear Edit/Select Edit/Select/Objects Edit/Select/Objects/By Clicking Edit/Select/Objects/By Area Edit/Select/Objects/By Name Edit/Select/Edge Edit/Select/Trace Things to Consider Edit/Select/Object Intersect Edit/Deselect All Boundary Manager Edit Menu Edit/Select/Object Intersect Choose Edit/Select/Object Intersect to select edges shared by two adjacent, closed geometric objects. The objects must share at least part of one edge. > To select the intersection of two object edges as a boundary: 1. Choose Edit/Select/Object Intersect. 2. Select the first object. You may select the background as an object if an adjacent closed object lies on the edge of the background. Note: 3. Select the second object. The system selects those edges (or portions of edges) that are shared by the two objects. Edit/Deselect All To cancel this command while selecting objects, click the right mouse button. Choose Edit/Deselect All to deselect any items that are currently selected. To deselect individual items, toggle them using the Edit/Select/Object/By Clicking command. Maxwell Online Help System 364 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

400 Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign Menu After selecting the desired object(s) or edge(s) with the Edit/Select commands, use the Assign commands (shown below) to: Assign a boundary condition, defining the behavior of the electric or magnetic field on that surface. Assign a voltage, current, or charge source. Assign an end connection to the conductors in the model. After assigning your boundaries or sources, you can define boundaries and sources that use mathematical functions. When you choose Assign from the 2D Boundary/Source Manager menu bar, the following menu appears: Maxwell Online Help System 365 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

401 Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign Commands The Assign commands are: Boundary Source End Connection Assigns a boundary condition to a selected edge or object, specifying the behavior of the electric or magnetic field. Assigns a distribution of voltages, charges, or currents to an object. EMpulse only. Assigns an end connection to the objects in the model. Depending on which field solver you selected, different types of boundary conditions and sources are available. Note: The sources and boundaries that you define with the Assign commands are used during all field, force, torque, current flow, and flux linkage solutions. However, during a matrix solution, the current or voltage sources assigned to the conductors in the model are modified to enable the simulator to compute the inductance, capacitance, impedance, admittance, or conductance of the system. Maxwell Online Help System 366 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

402 Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu General Procedure > In general, to assign a boundary condition or source: 1. Select the desired edge(s) or object(s) using one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Do one of the following: To assign a boundary condition to the selected edge or object, choose one of the Assign/Boundary commands. To assign a source to the selected edge or object, choose one of the Assign/ Source commands. Warning: In order to set up a valid problem, you must identify a source of electric or magnetic field from the boundary conditions, sources, and materials that can serve as field sources. 3. Enter the required information for the boundary or source (such as the value of the electric or magnetic potential, the phase angle, the type of symmetry, the current density, and so forth) in the fields that appear beneath the geometric model. If boundary or source quantities are constant, enter the values for these parameters in the appropriate fields. If boundary or source quantities are to be defined using math functions, do the following: a. Choose Options to identify which quantities are functional. b. Choose Functions to create math functions specifying the values of the quantities. c. Choose Orientation to define each function s orientation to the model s coordinate system. These commands appear beneath the boundary or source fields. 4. Choose Assign at the bottom left of the window to assign the specified boundary condition or source to the selected edge. Repeat this procedure for each boundary condition or source to be assigned. Maxwell Online Help System 367 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

403 Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Setting Default Boundary Conditions By default, the outside edges of the problem region are defined as Neumann boundaries. The edges of objects are automatically defined as natural boundaries, which simply means that the electric or magnetic field is continuous across the edge. These default boundary conditions are set regardless of which solver you selected for the model. > To reset a boundary or source to its default condition, do one of the following: To completely delete the boundary or source, select it and choose Edit/Clear. The edge resets to its default Neumann or natural boundary condition. To delete the assigned boundary condition or source without deleting the boundary itself, choose Assign/Boundary/Value. Deselect the Value option, and choose Assign. The boundary then displays as an unassigned boundary and is reset to its default boundary condition. Assigning Boundary Conditions The boundary conditions that may be specified for each solver are listed in the following tables. For detailed descriptions of these boundary conditions, click on the ones that are of interest to you: Electrostatic Boundary Conditions Magnetostatic Boundary Conditions Eddy Current Boundary Conditions DC Conduction Boundary Conditions AC Conduction Boundary Conditions Eddy Axial Boundary Conditions Transient Boundary Conditions Maxwell Online Help System 368 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

404 Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Boundary Type Neumann Natural Value (Dirichlet) Balloon Even Symmetry Odd Symmetry Master Matching Boundary Slave Matching Boundary Magnetic Field Behavior B and H are perpendicular to the outer edges of the problem space. Normal components of B and tangential components of H are continuous across the edge. Sets the magnetic vector potential, A Z or ra φ, on the boundary. The behavior of H depends on whether A Z or ra φ is constant or functional. Models the case where the structure is infinitely far away from other magnetic fields or current sources. H is perpendicular to the boundary. H is tangential to the boundary. H has the same magnitude and direction (or the same magnitude and opposite direction) on the master boundary and all slave boundaries that are assigned to it. The H-field on the boundary is forced to match the magnitude and direction (or opposite direction) of the H-field on the master boundary to which it is assigned. Used to model... Default outer boundary condition. Default boundary between objects. Outer boundaries at specific vector potentials; externally applied magnetic fields. Magnetically isolated structures. Planes of symmetry where the signs (plus or minus) of all currents are the same on both sides of the boundary. Planes of symmetry where the signs (plus or minus) of all currents are opposite to those on the other side of the boundary. Planes of symmetry in periodic structures where H is neither tangential to nor perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry in periodic structures where H is neither tangential to, nor perpendicular to, the boundary. Maxwell Online Help System 369 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

405 Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Boundary Type Electric Field Behavior Used to Model... Neumann E and D are tangential to the boundary. Default outer boundary. Natural E is continuous across the boundary. Default boundary between objects. Value Balloon Even Symmetry Odd Symmetry Master Matching Boundary Slave Matching Boundary Sets the electric potential, φ, on the boundary. The behavior of E depends on whether φ is constant or functional. Two options are available: Charge The charge at infinity balances the charge in the drawing region. The net charge is zero. Voltage The voltage at infinity is zero. E is tangential to the boundary. E is perpendicular to the boundary. E has the same magnitude and direction (or the same magnitude and opposite direction) on the master boundary and all slave boundaries that are assigned to it. The E-field on the boundary is forced to match the magnitude and direction (or opposite direction) of the E-field on the master boundary to which it is assigned. Boundaries at known voltages. Electrically insulated structures (Charge option) or electrically grounded structures (Voltage option). Planes of symmetry where the signs (plus or minus) of all voltages and charges are the same on both sides of the boundary. Planes of symmetry where the signs (plus or minus) of all voltages and charges on one side of the boundary are opposite those on the other side. Planes of symmetry in periodic structures where E is neither tangential to nor perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry in periodic structures where E is neither tangential to nor perpendicular to the boundary. Maxwell Online Help System 370 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

406 Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Boundary Type Neumann Natural Value (Dirichlet) Balloon Even Symmetry Odd Symmetry Master Matching Boundary Slave Matching Boundary Impedance Eddy Current Field Behavior B(t) and H(t) are perpendicular to the outer edges of the problem space Normal components of B(t) and tangential components of H(t) are continuous. Sets the magnetic vector potential, A Z (t) or ra φ (t), on the boundary. The behavior of H(t) depends on whether A Z (t) or ra φ (t) is constant or functional. Models the case where the structure is infinitely far away from other magnetic fields or current sources. H(t) is perpendicular to the boundary. H(t) is tangential to the boundary. H(t) has the same magnitude, phase, and direction (or the same magnitude and opposite direction and phase) on the master all assigned slave boundaries. The H-field on the boundary is forced to match the magnitude and direction (or opposite direction) of the H-field on the master boundary to which it is assigned. Includes the effect of induced currents beyond the boundary surface. Used to model... Default outer boundary condition. Default boundary between objects. Outer boundaries at specific vector potentials; externally applied magnetic fields. Magnetically isolated structures. Planes of symmetry where the signs (plus or minus) of all currents are the same on both sides of the boundary. Planes of symmetry where the signs (plus or minus) of currents are opposite those on the other side of the boundary. Planes of symmetry in periodic structures where H(t) is neither tangential to nor perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry in periodic structures where H(t) is neither tangential to nor perpendicular to the boundary. Conductors whose skin depths are very tiny compared to the dimensions of the rest of the structure. Maxwell Online Help System 371 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

407 Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Boundary Type AC Conduction Behavior Used to model... Neumann E and J are tangential to the boundary. Default outer boundary condition. Natural Value E and J are continuous across the boundary. Default boundary between objects. Sets the electric potential, φ, on the boundary. The behavior of E and J depends on whether φ is constant or functional. Boundaries at known voltages. Balloon Resistor Even Symmetry Boundary Odd Symmetry Boundary Models the case where the structure is infinitely far away from other voltage sources. The effect of a thin layer of resistive material on fields and conduction currents is computed. E and J are tangential to the boundary. E and J are perpendicular to the boundary. Electrically grounded structures, where ground is a long way off. Very thin resistive layers on conductors at known voltages. Planes of symmetry where the signs of the voltages are the same on both sides of the boundary. Planes of symmetry where the signs (plus or minus) of voltages on one side of the boundary are opposite those on the other side. Master Matching Boundary Slave Matching Boundary E has the same magnitude and direction (or the same magnitude and opposite direction) on the master boundary and all slave boundaries assigned to it. The E-field on the boundary is forced to match the magnitude and direction (or opposite direction) of the E-field on its assigned master boundary. Planes of symmetry in periodic structures where E is neither tangential to nor perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry in periodic structures where E is neither tangential to nor perpendicular to the boundary. Maxwell Online Help System 372 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

408 Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Boundary Type DC Conduction Field Behavior Neumann E(t) and J(t) are tangential to the boundary. Natural Value E(t) and J(t) are continuous across the boundary. Sets the electric potential, φ, on the boundary. The behavior of E(t) and J(t) depends on whether φ is constant or functional. Used to model... Default outer boundary condition. Default boundary between objects. Boundaries at known voltages and phases. Balloon Resistor Even Symmetry Boundary Models the case where the structure is infinitely far away from other voltage sources. Computes the effect of a thin layer of resistive material on fields and conduction currents. E(t) and J(t) are tangential to the boundary. Electrically grounded structures. Very thin resistive layers on conductors with known voltages. Planes of symmetry where the signs of all voltages are the same on both sides of the boundary. Odd Symmetry Boundary Master Matching Boundary Slave Matching Boundary E(t) and J(t) are perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry where the signs (plus or minus) of all voltages on one side of the boundary are opposite those on the other side. E(t) has the same magnitude, phase, and direction (or the same magnitude and opposite phase and direction) on the master boundary and all slave boundaries that are assigned to it. The E-field on the boundary is forced to match the magnitude, phase, and direction (or opposite phase) of the E-field on its assigned master boundary. Planes of symmetry in periodic structures where E(t) is neither tangential to nor perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry in periodic structures where E(t) is neither tangential to nor perpendicular to the boundary. Maxwell Online Help System 373 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

409 Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Boundary Type Neumann Natural Eddy Axial Field Behavior E(t) and J(t) are perpendicular to the outer edges of the problem space. Tangential components of E(t) and J(t) are continuous. Used to model... Default outer boundary condition. Default boundary between objects. Value (Dirichlet) Balloon Even Symmetry Odd Symmetry Sets the magnetic field, H Z (t), on the boundary. H Z (t) can be constant or functional. Models the case where the structure is infinitely far away from other magnetic fields or current sources. E(t) is perpendicular to the boundary. E(t) is tangential to the boundary. External magnetic fields (the only sources that can be defined for eddy axial models). Magnetically isolated structures. Planes of symmetry where the signs (plus or minus) of all fields are the same on both sides of the boundary. Planes of symmetry where the signs (plus or minus) of all fields are opposite to those on the other side of the boundary. More Master Matching Boundary Slave Matching Boundary E(t) has the same magnitude, phase, and direction (or the same magnitude and opposite direction) on the master boundary and all slave boundaries that are assigned to it. The E-field on the boundary is forced to match the magnitude and direction (or opposite direction) of the E-field on the master boundary to which it is assigned. Planes of symmetry in periodic structures where E(t) is neither tangential to nor perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry in periodic structures where E(t) is neither tangential to nor perpendicular to the boundary. Maxwell Online Help System 374 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

410 Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Boundary Type Neumann Natural Value (Dirichlet) Balloon Even Symmetry Odd Symmetry Master Matching Boundary Slave Matching Boundary Transient Field Behavior B and H are perpendicular to the outer edges of the problem space. Normal components of B and tangential components of H are continuous across the edge. Sets the magnetic vector potential, A Z, on the boundary. The behavior of H depends on whether A Z is constant or functional. Models the case where the structure is infinitely far away from other magnetic fields or current sources. H is perpendicular to the boundary. H is tangential to the boundary. H has the same magnitude and direction (or the same magnitude and opposite direction) on the master boundary and all slave boundaries that are assigned to it. The H-field on the boundary is forced to match the magnitude and direction (or opposite direction) of the H-field on the master boundary to which it is assigned. Used to model... Default outer boundary condition. Default boundary between objects. Outer boundaries at specific vector potentials; externally applied magnetic fields. Magnetically isolated structures. Planes of symmetry where the signs (plus or minus) of all currents are the same on both sides of the boundary. Planes of symmetry where the signs (plus or minus) of all currents are opposite to those on the other side of the boundary. Planes of symmetry in periodic structures where H is neither tangential to nor perpendicular to the boundary. Planes of symmetry in periodic structures where H is neither tangential to, nor perpendicular to, the boundary. Maxwell Online Help System 375 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

411 Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Sources The types of sources that may be specified for each solver are listed in the tables below. Click here for detailed explanations of the sources available for each type of mode. Magnetic Source Current or perfect current Type of excitation DC current flowing in an object (either the total current or the current density). Current sheet or perfect current sheet DC surface current on an edge or edges (either the total surface current or the surface current density). Permanent magnets also act as sources of magnetic fields. Some of the electric field sources include the following: Electric Source Voltage Edge voltage Charge Charge sheet Type of excitation Total DC voltage on a closed geometric object. Total DC voltage on an edge. Charge on an object (total charge or charge density). The object s potential is computed during the solution. Charge on an edge (total charge or charge density). The edge s potential is computed during the solution. More Maxwell Online Help System 376 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

412 Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Permanently polarized materials also act as sources of electric field. AC Conduction Source Current sheet or perfect current sheet Current or perfect current Type of excitation Magnitude and phase of AC surface current on an edge or edges (either the total current or the current density). Magnitude and phase of AC current flowing in an object. Can be one of the following: Solid Models eddy currents in a conductor. Parallel Connects two or more conductors in parallel to an outside source. The total current flowing through all selected conductors (including eddy currents) is specified. Stranded Models current as being carried on strands within the conductor, with no eddy or displacement currents. Either the total current or the current density may be specified. Current density is uniform, unless a functional current density is defined. Eddy effects are not modeled in a perfect conductor, but current is distributed on its surface so that no fields penetrate. The following DC conduction sources are available. More DC Conduction Source Voltage Edge voltage Type of Excitation Total DC voltage on a closed geometric object. Total DC voltage on an edge. Maxwell Online Help System 377 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

413 Assign Menu Assign Commands General Procedure Setting Default Boundary Conditions Assigning Boundary Conditions Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu The following AC voltage sources are available: AC Voltage Source Voltage Edge voltage Type of Excitation Magnitude and phase of the AC voltage on a closed geometric object. Magnitude and phase of the AC voltage on an edge. The following eddy axial source is available: Eddy Axial Source Applied magnetic field Type of Excitation Magnitude and phase of an external magnetic field (defined using boundary conditions). (EMpulse only.) The following transient sources are available: Transient Source Solid Sheet Type of Excitation Current or voltage on a closed geometric object. DC surface current on an edge or edges (either the total surface current or voltage or the surface current density). (Thermal only.) The following thermal sources are available: Transient Source Solid Sheet Type of Excitation Heat source on a closed geometric object. Heat source sheet on an edge or edges. Maxwell Online Help System 378 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

414 Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign/Boundary After selecting the desired edges or objects using the Edit/Select commands, choose one of the Assign/Boundary commands to define the behavior of the electric and magnetic fields on that surface. Available boundary conditions are: Value Balloon Symmetry Impedance Resistance Master Slave Sets the value of the electric scalar potential, magnetic vector potential, or magnetic field on the boundary. (The specific field quantity depends on which solver you selected.) Models the case in which the structure is far away from external fields. Models a plane of symmetry in which the electric or magnetic field is either perpendicular or tangential to a boundary. (Eddy current.) Models the effects of eddy currents in conductors with tiny skin depths, allowing you to simulate induced currents and energy losses without having to explicitly solve for currents inside the conductor. (DC conduction.) Models a very thin resistive layer on a conductor at a known potential, allowing you to model its presence without explicitly drawing it. Defines a master matching boundary. Matching boundaries are used to model symmetry planes in periodic structures where the field pattern on one boundary matches the magnitude and direction (or opposite direction) of the field pattern on another boundary. The field pattern on a master boundary is imposed on the slave boundaries that are assigned to it. Defines a slave matching boundary. The field pattern on a slave boundary is forced to match the magnitude and direction (or the opposite direction) of the field pattern on the master boundary to which it is assigned. Depending on which field solver you selected, not all of the boundary conditions listed here will be available. If you selected the thermal solver, none of these options will appear. The field solvers to which a particular boundary condition applies are listed next to the description of that command. Maxwell Online Help System 379 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

415 Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Thermal solutions only. When solving a thermal problem, choose Assign/Boundary to define the thermal boundary conditions for the objects in the model. When you choose Assign/Boundary, the following window appears: More > To define the thermal settings: 1. Select the object to which to assign the thermal boundary condition. 2. Choose Assign/Boundary. New fields appear below the viewing window. 3. Enter a Name for the boundary condition or accept the default. 4. Select a Color for the boundary. 5. Select Temperature, and enter a new temperature for the model in the blank field. Temperature is entered in degrees C. 6. Select Convection & Radiation and define the convention and radiation settings. 7. Select Flux Boundary, and enter a new value for the thermal flux density in W/m 2. Maxwell Online Help System 380 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

416 Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave Boundary Manager Assign Menu 8. Optionally, choose Options and select which values are to be made functional. Choose OK when you have finished defining the options. 9. Optionally, choose Functions and define any functional values for the boundary conditions. Choose Done when you have finished defining the functional values. 10. Choose Assign to assign the boundary condition to the selected object. Remember that you must assign a heat sink to correspond to the thermal sources. Convection & Radiation > To define the convection and radiation characteristics: Select Convection & Radiation, and define the heat sinks by entering the following values: Convection Cff. This is the convection coefficient, which typically ranges from 5 to 15. This value depends on factors such as the roughness of the surface of the object, or the object s orientation (vertical or horizontal). The factor increases for objects which can dissipate heat more efficiently. Eff Radiation. This is the effective radiation which varies between 0 (for no radiation) and 1 (for a perfectly radiating black-body). Reference Temp. This is the reference temperature, in degrees C. Alpha Factor. This is the power factor for the radiation and temperature quantity which varies between 0 and 1. Note: The thermal solver cannot solve natural convection for objects surrounded by air. To solve these types of problems, exclude the air background in the Material Manager and assign a convection and radiation boundary in the Boundary Manager using an effective radiation of zero. The thermal rise of a given object will be independent from the temperature of any nearby objects. Maxwell Online Help System 381 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

417 Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign/Boundary/Value All solvers Choose Assign/Boundary/Value to: Set the value of the electric scalar potential, magnetic vector potential, or magnetic field on the boundary. The field quantity that is set depends on which solver you selected. For eddy current, AC conduction, and eddy axial models, you can also specify the phase angle of the field at the boundary (relative to the phase of other sources in the problem). Reset the boundary to its default, unassigned state (a Neumann boundary). For a more detailed explanation of how a value boundary works for a particular field solver including how it affects the electric or magnetic field see the description of that solver s boundary conditions. The field quantities that may be set on a value boundary are shown below: More Solver Electrostatic Magnetostatic Eddy Current Eddy Axial DC Conduction AC Conduction Transient Field Quantity set on Value Boundary Voltage (the electric potential, φ). A Z for XY models; ra φ for RZ models. (Magnetic vector potential). A Z (t) for XY models; ra φ (t) for RZ models. (Magnetic vector potential). H Z (t) (Magnetic field). Note that external magnetic fields are the only type of electromagnetic source that can be defined for eddy axial models. Voltage (The electric potential, φ). Voltage (The electric potential, φ(t)). (EMpulse only.) A Z for XY models. (The magnetic vector potential.) Maxwell Online Help System 382 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

418 Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave Boundary Manager Assign Menu > After identifying an edge or object using one of the Edit/Select commands, do the following to define it to be a value boundary: 1. Choose Assign/Boundary/Value. The fields shown below appear at the bottom of the Boundary Manager window. (The example shown is for an eddy current problem; however, similar fields appear for other types of models.) Additionally, a name (such as value1 or value2) is assigned to the new boundary and appears in the list of boundary names. More The field quantity to be set on the boundary (in the figure above, the magnetic vector potential, A Z ) is listed next to a check box. If an AC field quantity is being computed, fields for entering the magnitude and phase of the field quantity on the boundary appear; if a DC field quantity is being computed, a single field for entering its value appears. 2. Leave the check box next to the field quantity selected to set its value on the boundary. Note: To reset the boundary to its default, unassigned state (a Neumann or natural boundary), click on the check box to deselect it. 3. Set the voltage, vector potential, magnetic potential, or magnetic field on the boundary: If you selected the Electrostatic, Magnetostatic, Transient, or DC Conduction solver for the model, enter the value of the field quantity on the boundary in the Value field. If you selected the Eddy Current, Eddy Axial, or AC Conduction solver for the model, do the following: Maxwell Online Help System 383 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

419 Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave Boundary Manager Assign Menu a. Enter the magnitude of the field quantity on the boundary in the Magnitude field. b. Enter its phase angle (relative to other sources in the model) in the Phase field. Phase angles are entered in degrees. You can specify constant or functional values for the magnitude and/or phase of the field quantity on the boundary. 4. Choose Assign to record the value of the potential on the boundary or Cancel to cancel the boundary assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 384 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

420 Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign/Boundary/Symmetry All Solvers Choose Assign/Boundary/Symmetry to define a plane of symmetry on the edge of the problem space. Two types of symmetry are available: Even Odd Models the case in which the sign (plus or minus) of all currents, voltages, and charges is the same on both sides of the boundary. In such cases, the electric field is tangential to the boundary and the magnetic field is perpendicular to the boundary. The fields on both sides of an even symmetry boundary will oscillate in the same direction (in phase) in AC field simulations. Models the case in which the sign (plus or minus) of all currents, voltages, and charges on one side of the boundary is opposite that on the other side. In such cases, the electric field is perpendicular to the boundary and the magnetic field is tangential to the boundary. The fields on each side of an odd symmetry boundary will oscillate in the opposite direction (180 out of phase) in AC field simulations. After selecting an edge of the drawing region using the Edit/Select commands, you can define that edge as a symmetry boundary. > To define a symmetry boundary: 1. Choose Assign/Boundary/Symmetry. The fields Even and Odd appear beneath the geometric model. In addition, a name (such as symmetry1 or symmetry2) is assigned to the edge that you have selected and appears in the list of boundary names. 2. Select the type of symmetry (Even or Odd) to be defined on the boundary. 3. Select Assign to define the boundary or Cancel to cancel the boundary assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 385 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

421 Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign/Boundary/Balloon All Solvers Choose Assign/Boundary/Balloon to model the case in which the empty space around the structure extends infinitely out into space isolating it from other sources of electric or magnetic fields. Balloon boundaries can only be assigned to outside edges of the model. > To assign a balloon boundary: 1. Select one or more edges of the drawing region to which to assign a balloon boundary. 2. Choose Assign/Boundary/Balloon. A name, such as balloon1 or balloon2, is assigned to the group of edges that you have selected and appears in the list of boundary names. 3. If you selected Electrostatic as the solver for your model, choose one of the following balloon boundary types: Select Charge to model the case in which the charge at infinity balances the charge in the drawing region, forcing the net charge to be zero (an electrically insulated system). Select Voltage to model the case in which the voltage at infinity is zero (an electrically grounded system). In most cases, the results will be very similar to that produced with the Charge option; however, the charge at infinity may not exactly balance the charge in the drawing region. 4. Select Assign to assign the balloon boundary to the selected edge or Cancel to cancel the boundary assignment. If all four edges of the drawing region have been defined to be balloon boundaries, visualize the drawing region that is, the background as extending to infinity in all directions. If only one, two, or three edges have been defined to be balloon boundaries, visualize the background as extending to infinity in those directions alone. Maxwell Online Help System 386 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

422 Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign/Boundary/Resistance DC Conduction Choose Assign/Boundary/Resistance to model a very thin layer of a resistive material on a conductor at a known voltage. Use this type of boundary when the thickness of the resistive layer is very tiny in comparison to the model s dimensions. You do not need to explicitly draw the resistive layer; instead, you specify its thickness and conductivity when you define the boundary. The Maxwell 2D then simulates the behavior of conduction currents and the electric field as if the layer was actually present. This type of resistance boundary can only be used on outer boundaries or on non-existent (excluded) objects such as conductors. > To define a resistance boundary: 1. Choose Assign/Boundary/Resistance. The following fields appear beneath the geometric model. A name (such as resistance1 or resistance2) is assigned to the group of edges you have selected, and is listed in the boundary names: More 2. Enter the Thickness of the resistive layer (in meters). 3. Enter the conductivity (σ) of the resistive layer in the Cond field. Note: To define the conductivity or thickness using math functions, follow the instructions under Functional Boundaries and Sources. 4. Enter the conductor s voltage in the Value field. 5. Select Assign to assign the resistance boundary to the selected edge or Cancel to cancel the boundary assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 387 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

423 Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/ Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign/Boundary/Impedance Eddy Current Choose Assign/Boundary/Impedance to model the effect of eddy currents in conductors with very small skin depths. Use this type of boundary when the conductor s skin depth is very small compared to the dimensions of the model. Modeling thin skin depth with impedance boundaries lets you simulate induced surface currents and energy losses without having to actually compute the currents inside the conductor. This impedance boundary condition can only be assigned to a selected edge of the problem space. > To define an impedance boundary: 1. Choose Assign/Boundary/Impedance. The following fields appear beneath the geometric model. Additionally, a name (such as impedance1 or impedance2) is assigned to the group of edges that you have selected and appears in the list of boundary names. 2. Enter the conductor s conductivity (σ) under Cond. 3. Enter its relative permeability (µ r ) under Rel. Perm. Note: To define the conductivity or relative permeability as math functions, follow the instructions under Functional Boundaries and Sources. 4. Select Assign to assign the impedance boundary to the selected edge or Cancel to cancel the boundary assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 388 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

424 Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave More Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign/Boundary/Master Warning: All Solvers Choose Assign/Boundary/Master to define a master matching boundary. Matching boundaries are used to model periodic structures in which the E-field or the H-field has the same magnitude and direction (or the same magnitude and opposite direction) on one or more boundaries. The field on a master boundary is imposed on all slave boundaries assigned to it. In eddy current, AC conduction, and eddy axial problems, the fields on the master and slave boundaries are in phase if the directions match, or 180 out of phase if the directions are opposite. The following restrictions apply to master boundaries: A master boundary can only be assigned to a continuous outside edge of the model; it cannot be assigned to the entire edge of a closed object. The edge to be assigned a master boundary must lie between two object vertex points. If necessary, insert additional vertices to serve as end points for the master boundary. Master boundaries must be defined before slave boundaries. A master boundary must be associated with at least one slave. > To define a master matching boundary: 1. Select an outside edge of the drawing space. 2. Choose Assign/Boundary/Master. The following fields appear beneath the geometric model. A name (such as master1 or master2) is assigned to the group of edges that you have selected, and appears in the list of boundary names: 3. Select Master. Maxwell Online Help System 389 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

425 Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave Boundary Manager Assign Menu 4. The start point and end point of the master boundary must correspond to the start points and end points of all slave boundaries assigned to it. If these points were selected in the opposite order of the slave boundaries, choose Swap Points to swap the beginning and end points of the master boundary so that they correspond to the start and end points of its slave boundaries. 5. Select Assign to assign the master boundary to the selected edge or Cancel to cancel the boundary assignment. Initially, the master boundary is listed as an unassigned boundary, since its slave boundaries have not yet been created. When you create a slave boundary to be assigned to a master boundary, the word master appears next to the boundary name. Remember, each master boundary must have at least one corresponding slave boundary. During the field and parameter solutions, the field on the slave boundaries you selected will be forced to match the magnitude and direction (or the magnitude and opposite direction) of the field on the master boundary. Warning: The mesh on a master boundary must be identical to the mesh on all slave boundaries assigned to it. Otherwise, the field solution will not match on the boundaries. To match the meshes, you must manually refine the model s finite element mesh after defining matching boundaries. > To create identical meshes on master and slave boundaries: 1. Under Setup Solution Options, choose Manual Mesh to access the 2D Meshmaker. 2. Generate a finite element mesh using the Mesh/Make command. 3. Use the Mesh/Line Match command to identify the master and slave boundary lines where the mesh is to be matched. Maxwell Online Help System 390 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

426 Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign/Boundary/Slave All Solvers Warning: Choose Assign/Boundary/Slave to define a slave matching boundary. The E-field or H- field of the slave boundary is forced to match the magnitude and direction (or opposite direction) of the E-field or H-field on the master boundary to which it is assigned. The following restrictions apply to slave boundaries: They can only be assigned to continuous outside edges of the model, and cannot be assigned to the entire surface of closed objects. The edge to be assigned a slave boundary must lie between two object vertex points. If necessary, insert additional vertices to serve as end points of the slave boundary. Master boundaries must be defined before slave boundaries. Multiple slave boundaries can be assigned to a master boundary. > To define a slave matching boundary: 1. Define the master boundary to which the slave boundary is to be assigned, using the Assign/Boundary/Master command. 2. Select an outside edge of the drawing space using one of the Edit/Select commands. 3. Choose Assign/Boundary/Slave. The fields shown below appear beneath the geometric model. A name (such as slave1 or slave2) is assigned to the group of edges that you have selected and appears in the list of boundary names. The most recent master matching boundary that has been created is listed. It is the one to which the slave boundary will be assigned. 4. To specify the direction of the field on the slave boundary, select one of the following: Maxwell Online Help System 391 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

427 Assign/Boundary Assign/Boundary (Thermal) Assign/Boundary/Value Assign/Boundary/Symmetry Assign/Boundary/Balloon Assign/Boundary/Resistance Assign/Boundary/Impedance Assign/Boundary/Master Assign/Boundary/Slave Boundary Manager Assign Menu Choose Slave = +Master to force the field on the slave boundary to have the same magnitude and direction as the field on the master boundary. In eddy current, eddy axial, and AC conduction problems, this causes the fields to be in phase. Choose Slave = -Master to force the field on the slave boundary to point in the opposite direction from the field on the master boundary. In eddy current, eddy axial, and AC conduction problems, this causes the fields to be 180 out of phase. 5. The start point and end point of a slave boundary must correspond to the start point and end point of the master boundary to which it is assigned. If these points were selected in the opposite order from the master boundary, choose Swap Points to swap the beginning and end points of the slave boundary so that they correspond to the start and end points of its master boundary. 6. Select Assign to assign the slave boundary to the selected edge or Cancel to cancel the boundary assignment. When you define a slave boundary, the word slave appears next to its name in the list of boundary conditions. During the field and parameter solutions, the field on the slave boundary will be forced to match the magnitude and direction (or the magnitude and opposite direction) of the field on the master boundary to which it is assigned. Warning: The mesh on a slave boundary must be identical to the mesh on the master boundary that is assigned to it. Otherwise, the field solution will not match on the boundaries. To match the meshes, you must manually refine the model s finite element mesh after defining matching boundaries. > To create identical meshes on master and slave boundaries: 1. Under Setup Solution Options, choose Manual Mesh to access the 2D Meshmaker. 2. Generate a finite element mesh using the Mesh/Make command. 3. Use the Mesh/Line Match command to identify the master and slave boundary lines where the mesh is to be matched. Maxwell Online Help System 392 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

428 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Assign/Source/Sheet Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign/Source Choose Assign/Source to define specific values for voltages, currents, and charges in your model. Two general types of sources are available: Solid Sheet Assigns a source to a closed geometric object. You can specify either the total current, charge or voltage, or a current or charge density. Unless otherwise specified, currents or charges are assumed to be distributed throughout the object. Voltage is assumed to be uniform across the entire object, but is only actually set on the edges. Assigns a source to a selected edge or edges. You can specify the total current, charge, or voltage on the surface, or the surface current or charge density. Unless otherwise specified, sources are assumed to be distributed uniformly on the selected edge. Different types of sources may be defined for each field solver. Note: Sources for eddy axial models external magnetic fields cannot be set using these commands. They must be defined using value boundaries. Maxwell Online Help System 393 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

429 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Assign/Source/Sheet Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign/Source/Solid Choose Assign/Source/Solid to assign an electromagnetic source to a selected object. This command is only available if a closed object (including the background) is selected. The following types of sources are available depending on the field solver selected: The total charge on an object (electrostatic models). The total current or current density in an object (magnetostatic and eddy current models). In eddy current models, you can specify whether the current source is stranded, solid, or in parallel; additionally, all currents are phasors. The total voltage on an object (electrostatic, DC conduction, and AC conduction models). All voltages are phasors in AC conduction models. > In general, to assign a solid source to an object: 1. Select the desired object(s) using the Edit/Select command. Note: For eddy current problems with parallel current sources where two or more conductors are connected in parallel, you must select more than one object to enable the parallel source button. 2. Choose Assign/Source/Solid. Fields for the source parameters appear. A name such as source1 is automatically assigned to the object you selected. 3. Enter the required information for the type of source you wish to set: Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Voltage Sources Transient Current Sources Thermal Defines charge sources for electrostatic models. Defines voltage sources for electrostatic, DC conduction, and AC conduction models. Defines current sources for magnetostatic models Defines current sources for eddy current models RMxprt only. Defines voltage sources on transient, timestepping models. RMxprt only. Defines current sources on transient, timestepping models. Define the thermal source. 4. Choose Assign to assign the source to the selected object or Cancel to cancel the source assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 394 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

430 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Solid Charge Sources Electrostatic Solid charge sources behave differently for conductors and dielectrics. Charges on Conductors (Floating Conductors) When you are defining a solid charge source on a conductor (that is, a floating conductor), fields such as the following ones appear: > To define the total charge on a conductor: 1. Select Floating Charge as the source type. 2. Enter the charge on the conductor in coulombs in the Value field. You may specify the charge using a math function. Note: Charge is distributed on the surface of a floating conductor, and arranges itself so that there is no electric field inside the conductor. If you attempt to define the total charge as a function of position, an error message appears. However, charges can be defined as constant functions (for instance, if you are performing a parametric analysis). 3. Choose Assign to assign the source or Cancel to cancel the assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 395 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

431 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Charges on Dielectrics When you are defining a solid charge source for a non-conducting object, fields such as the following ones appear: > To specify the charge on the object: 1. Select one of the following: 2. Enter the charge or charge density in coulombs in the Value field. You may specify the charge using a math function. Note: Total Density Specifies the total charge on the object. Specifies the charge density in the object. If a constant value is entered for the charge on the object, it is assumed to be uniformly distributed throughout a dielectric. All charges can be defined as constant functions (for instance, if you are performing a parametric analysis). The charge density can also be specified as a function of position. However, if you attempt to define the total charge as a function of position, an error message appears. 3. Choose Assign to assign the source or Cancel to cancel the assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 396 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

432 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Solid Voltage Sources Electrostatic, AC Conduction, DC Conduction When you are setting a voltage source, fields similar to the following ones appear: > To define a solid voltage source: 1. Choose Voltage as the source type. If a perfect conductor is selected as the voltage source, choose Perfect Voltage as the source type. This simply means that the voltage will be distributed evenly across the conductor and that the entire conductor is at the same potential. The source will have no resistance or power loss in AC conduction or DC conduction simulations. 2. Do one of the following: If you are setting voltages in an electrostatic or DC conduction model, enter the voltage on the selected object in the Voltage field. If you are setting voltages in an AC conduction model, enter the magnitude of the voltage in the Magnitude field, and its phase in the Phase field. Note: In electrostatic problems, no fields are computed inside conductors. Defining the voltage on a solid electrostatic voltage source as a function of position causes the surface potential to vary according to the function you defined. 3. Choose Assign to assign the source or Cancel to cancel the assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 397 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

433 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources More Boundary Manager Assign Menu Transient Voltage Sources Transient only When you are setting sources for a transient problem, the following fields appear: > To define a transient voltage source: 1. Select Voltage as the source. 2. Select one of the following source types: Solid Strand Assumes total current in the object, including both eddy currents and displacement currents. Assumes that current is carried on an infinite number of strands within the conductor. Eddy currents and displacement currents are neglected. 3. Optionally, choose Options to define the property options as either a Constant value or a Function. 4. Optionally, choose Functions to access the Boundary/Source Symbol Table and define any functional values for the voltage. 5. Enter the voltage in the Value field. 6. If you selected Strand, choose Winding and define the windings in the Winding Setup for Boundary name window that appears. Maxwell Online Help System 398 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

434 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu 7. Choose Assign to assign the source or Cancel to cancel the source assignment. Note: The magnitude and phase of the following types of sources cannot be specified as a function of position: Solid AC current sources. Parallel AC current sources. Stranded AC current sources, where the total current is specified. However, these current sources can be defined using constant functions (for instance, if you are performing a parametric analysis). The magnitude and phase of the current density in stranded transient current sources may be defined as functions of position. Maxwell Online Help System 399 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

435 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources More Boundary Manager Assign Menu Winding Setup Choose the Winding Setup for Boundary name window to define the winding parameters: > To define the windings: 1. Select an object from the object list to which you will assign a polarity. Optionally, you can use the Select menu to execute multiple selections. 2. Select one of the following polarities for the selected object: Positive Negative Function Defines positive polarity. Defines negative polarity. Defines a functional polarity. Choose Functions and use the Boundary/ Source Symbol Table to define the functions. 3. Choose Assign to assign the polarity to the object. 4. Enter the Initial Current. This is the current of the terminal, in amperes. 5. Enter the terminal Resistance and Inductance. 6. Optionally, select Capacitance to include the capacitance values in the solution and enter the value in the Capacitance field. 7. Optionally, select Y-Connect with other windings to force the selected winding to connect with other defined windings. 8. Enter the Total turns as seen from the terminal. This is the number of turns, Maxwell Online Help System 400 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

436 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu starting from the terminal. 9. Enter the Number of parallel branches. 10. Optionally, choose Options. The Winding Property Options window appears: a. Select which values are either constant or functions for the Terminal Resistance, Terminal End Leakage Inductance, and Capacitance. b. Choose OK to accept the definitions or Cancel to ignore the settings. The window closes. 11.Choose OK to accept the winding information or Cancel to cancel the action You return to the 2D Boundary/Source Manager window. Maxwell Online Help System 401 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

437 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Solid DC Current Sources Magnetostatic When you are defining a current source in a magnetostatic model, you can define either the total current or the current density in the conductor, using the following fields: > To specify the DC current flowing in an object: 1. Select one of the following: If you are setting a Perfect Current source, you may only specify the total current. 2. Enter the total current (in amperes) or the current density (in amperes per square meter) in the Value field. Note: Total Density Specifies the total current in the object. Specifies the current density in the object. The total current is assumed to be evenly distributed throughout the conductor identified as a current source. An error message appears if you attempt to define it as a function of position. However, you can define the total current as a constant function (for example, if you are doing parametric analysis). The current density may be defined as a function of position, representing a non-uniform current density in the object. 3. Choose Assign to assign the source or Cancel to cancel the source assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 402 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

438 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources More Boundary Manager Assign Menu Solid AC Current Sources Eddy Current When you are setting sources for an eddy current problem, the following fields appear: > To define an AC current source: 1. Select one of the following source types: Solid Stranded Parallel Specifies the total current in the object including eddy currents and displacement currents. Assumes that current is carried on strands within the conductor. Eddy currents and displacement currents are neglected. Specifies the total current carried in two or more conductors connected in parallel to a source including eddy currents and displacement currents. Available only if multiple conductors are selected. If you are assigning current to a perfect conductor (a Perfect Current source), you may only specify the total current. 2. If you selected Stranded, choose one of the following: Total Density Specifies the total source current carried in the conductor. Specifies the source current density in the conductor. Total is automatically selected for Solid and Parallel sources. 3. Enter the total current (in amperes) or the current density (in amperes per square meter) in the Value field. Maxwell Online Help System 403 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

439 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu 4. Enter the phase angle of the current (in degrees) in the Phase field. Note: The magnitude and phase of the following types of sources cannot be specified as a function of position: Solid AC current sources. Parallel AC current sources. Stranded AC current sources where the total current is specified. However, these current sources can be defined using constant functions (for instance, if you are performing a parametric analysis). The magnitude and phase of the current density in stranded AC current sources may be defined as function of position. 5. Choose Assign to assign the source or Cancel to cancel the source assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 404 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

440 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources More Boundary Manager Assign Menu Transient Current Sources Transient only When you are setting sources for a transient problem, you have the option of defining the source type and current type. > To define a transient current source: 1. Select Current as the source. 2. Optionally, select External Connection, then Edit/External Circuit to access Schematic Capture and modify the circuit model in that module. When you select External Connection, all entry fields associated with Current become inactive. 3. Select one of the following source types: Solid Strand Specifies the total current in the object, including eddy currents and displacement currents. If you select this, you must use the Total source current for the conductor. Assumes that current is carried on an infinite number of strands within the conductor. Eddy currents and displacement currents are neglected. 4. Select one of the following: Total Specifies the total source current carried in the conductor, in amps. Density Specifies the source current density in the conductor, in amps/m Optionally, choose Options to define the current source as either a Constant value or a Function. 6. Optionally, choose Functions to access the Boundary/Source Symbol Table and define any functional values for the voltage. 7. Enter the total current or the current density in the Value field. 8. If you selected Strand and Total, choose Winding and do the following in the Maxwell Online Help System 405 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

441 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Winding information window that appears: a. Select one of the following polarities for the object: Positive Negative Function b. Choose Assign to assign the polarity to the object. c. Enter the Total turns as seen from the terminal. d. Enter the Number of parallel branches. e. Choose OK to accept the winding definitions or Cancel to ignore them. 9. Choose Assign to assign the source or Cancel to cancel the source assignment. Solid Thermal Sources Thermal only. Defines positive polarity. Defines negative polarity. Defines a functional polarity. Choose Functions and use the Boundary/Source Symbol Table to define the functions. Choose Assign/Source/Solid to define the thermal settings for your problem. > To define the solid thermal source: 1. Select the object to which to assign the source. 2. Choose Assign/Source/Solid. New fields appear below the view window. 3. Select Heat Source. The Value field becomes active. 4. Select Total to define the total source or Density to define the source density. 5. Enter the Value of the selected thermal source and choose OK. Maxwell Online Help System 406 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

442 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign/Source/Sheet Choose Assign/Source/Sheet to assign an electromagnetic source to a selected edge or the surface of a selected object. Depending on which field solver you selected, the following types of sources may be assigned: A charge sheet (electrostatic). The total charge or charge density on the surface may be specified. A current sheet (magnetostatic, transient, and eddy current). The total current or current density on the surface may be specified. All currents are phasors in eddy current models. The voltage on an object or edge (electrostatic, DC conduction, and AC conduction). All voltages are phasors in AC conduction models. > In general, to assign a source to an object s surface or an edge: 1. Select the desired object or edge using one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Choose Assign/Source/Sheet. Fields for the source parameters appear. 3. Enter the required information for the type of source you wish to set: Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Defines charge sheets for electrostatic models. Defines current sheets for magnetostatic, eddy current, and transient models. Defines an edge as a voltage source for electrostatic, DC conduction, or AC conduction problems. Defines sheet sources for the objects in thermal models. 4. Choose Assign to assign the source to the selected edge or object, or Cancel to cancel the assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 407 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

443 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Charge Sheets Electrostatic If you are defining a charge sheet for an electrostatic problem, the following fields appear: > To define a charge sheet: 1. Select Floating Charge Sheet as the source type. 2. Enter the charge on the edge in coulombs in the Value field. You may define the charge using a math function (for example, if it is a function of position). 3. Choose Assign to assign the source or Cancel to cancel the assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 408 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

444 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Current Sheets Magnetostatic, Eddy Current, Transient Current sheets sources are defined differently in different models. The fields shown here are for defining current sheets in eddy current models: The fields shown here are for defining current sheets in magnetostatic models: More Maxwell Online Help System 409 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

445 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu > To specify the surface current on an edge (a current sheet): 1. Select one of the following: 2. Do one of the following: If you are defining a current sheet in a magnetostatic or transient model, enter the total current (in amperes) or the current density (in amperes per square meter) in the Value field. If you are defining a current sheet in an eddy current model, enter the magnitude of the current (in amperes) or the current density (in amperes per square meter) in the Magnitude field and its phase angle (in degrees) in the Phase field. Note: Total Density Specifies the total current on the edge. Specifies the current density on the edge. The total current is assumed to be evenly distributed across the selected edge, and thus cannot be specified as a function of position. However, the current density on an edge may be defined as a function of position. 3. Choose Assign to assign the source or Cancel to cancel the assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 410 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

446 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Edge Voltages Electrostatic, DC Conduction, AC Conduction When you are defining an edge as a voltage source, fields such as those shown below appear. The fields shown are for an AC conduction model. This command operates the same way for these solvers as the Assign/Source/Solid command, except that you can use it to assign voltages to edges as well as to closed objects. > To define an edge as a voltage source: 1. Select Voltage as the source type. 2. Do one of the following: If you are setting sources for a DC conduction or electrostatic model, enter the voltage on the selected edge in the Voltage field. If you are setting sources for an AC conduction model, enter both the Magnitude and Phase of the voltage on the selected edge. You may define the voltage or its phase as a function of position. 3. Choose Assign to assign the voltage source or Cancel to cancel the voltage source assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 411 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

447 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Solid Charge Sources Solid Voltage Sources Transient Voltage Sources Solid DC Current Sources Solid AC Current Sources Transient Current Sources Solid Thermal Sources Assign/Source/Sheet Charge Sheets Current Sheets Edge Voltages Thermal Sheet Sources Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Sheet Thermal Sources Thermal only. Choose Assign/Source/Solid to define the thermal settings for your problem. > To define the solid thermal source: 1. Select the object to which to assign the source. 2. Choose Assign/Source/Solid. New fields appear below the view window. 3. Select Heat Source Sheet. The Value field becomes active. 4. Select Total to define the total source or Density to define the source density. 5. Enter the Value of the selected thermal source and choose OK. The source is now defined. Maxwell Online Help System 412 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

448 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Assign/Source/Sheet Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources Boundary Manager Assign Menu Assign/End Connection Transient only Choose this command to assign an end connection to a group of solid objects. This causes all objects in the group to be connected electrically in parallel using a finite resistance and inductance between adjacent objects. End connections are primarily used in passive conductors (with no source current assigned) when modeling cylindrical squirrel cage induction motors. > To assign an end connection: 1. Select the object(s) to which to assign an end connection. There will be only one object if you have previously grouped the objects. 2. Choose Assign/End Connection. If you select an object to which a boundary or source has already been assigned, a message appears, warning you that the existing boundary or source will be incorporated into the new boundary. Do one of the following: Choose Yes to continue. Choose No to cancel the assignment. The warning message closes. New fields appear below the view window. 3. Optionally, select Passive end-connected conductor. a. Enter the End resistance between adjacent conductors. b. Enter the End inductance between adjacent conductors. 4. Enter a Name for the end connection. 5. Choose the Color of the connection from the color palette. 6. Choose Assign to assign the connection to the model or Cancel to cancel the assignment. Maxwell Online Help System 413 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

449 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Assign/Source/Sheet Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources General Procedure Options Functions Modifying a Function Deleting a Function Orientation Specifying Function Orientation Boundary Manager Assign Menu Functional Boundaries and Sources Functional boundaries and sources are used to do the following: Define the value of a boundary or source quantity (such as the voltage, magnetic vector potential, or charge density) using a mathematical relationship such as one relating its value to that of another quantity. Define the value of the voltage, current density, or charge density as a function of position. Note: The following cannot be defined as functions of position: In magnetostatic models, the total DC current flowing on an edge or through a conductor. In electrostatic models, the total charge on a floating conductor. In eddy current models, the magnitude and phase of the total AC current flowing on an edge or though a solid or parallel current source. If parametric analysis capability was purchased, identify which boundary or source quantities are to be varied during a parametric sweep. These variables are always set to constant values. Maxwell Online Help System 414 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

450 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Assign/Source/Sheet Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources General Procedure Options Functions Modifying a Function Deleting a Function Orientation Specifying Function Orientation Boundary Manager Assign Menu General Procedure > In general, to define a functional boundary or source: 1. Select the desired edge(s) or object(s) using one of the Edit/Select commands. 2. Assign the desired boundary condition or source using one of the Assign commands. 3. While defining the boundary or source, choose Options to identify which boundary or source quantities are constant, and which are functional. 4. Choose Functions to define math functions that describe the boundary s behavior. 5. Enter the appropriate function name as the value for the desired property. 6. If desired, choose Orientation to specify the function s alignment with the boundary or source s local coordinate system. This is useful when defining functions that act at an angle to the local coordinate system, or have an origin that is different from that of the local coordinate system. Options Choose Options to identify which field quantities on a boundary or source vary according to mathematical functions, and which are constant. A window appears listing the available fields. Constant Functional The field s value is constant over the boundary or source (the default). The field s value is given by a math function. Set the desired field to Constant or Functional, then choose OK. Maxwell Online Help System 415 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

451 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Assign/Source/Sheet Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources General Procedure Options Functions Modifying a Function Deleting a Function Orientation Specifying Function Orientation More Boundary Manager Assign Menu Functions Choose Functions to define mathematical functions that give the value of the potential, current density, charge density, and so forth. The following window appears: > In general, to define a function: 1. Enter the function name in the field to the left of the equals sign. 2. Enter the numeric value or mathematical expression for the function in the field to the right of the equals sign. Note: The pre-defined variables X, Y, PHI, and R (XY problems); R, Z, THETA, and RHO (RZ problems); or P, S, and T (transient problems) enable you to define boundary and source quantities as a function of their position in the geometry. These variables must be entered in capital letters. For more rules information on defining expressions and datasets, consult the online documentation on the Expression Evaluator. 3. Choose Add or press Return. The function is then listed in the following fields: Name Value Expression The name of the function. The numeric value of the function (if applicable). The function expression. 4. When you have finished adding functions, choose Done. You can now use the created functions to specify the value of the desired boundary or source quantities. Once defined, a function may be used with any boundaries or sources. Maxwell Online Help System 416 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

452 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Assign/Source/Sheet Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources General Procedure Options Functions Modifying a Function Deleting a Function Orientation Specifying Function Orientation More Boundary Manager Assign Menu Modifying a Function > To modify an existing function: 1. Select the function. 2. Change the desired variables, operators, intrinsic functions, and so forth. 3. Choose Update. The updated function is displayed. Optionally, you may choose Datasets to define a new expression before modifying or creating the function. Deleting a Function > To delete a function: 1. Highlight the desired function. 2. Choose Delete. The selected function is deleted. Orientation All functions that define the values of field quantities on boundaries or sources use the boundary or source s local coordinate system. The local coordinate system is used to evaluate field quantities that vary in magnitude or direction according to their position on the boundary or source. It also specifies the origin and orientation of boundary or source quantities. Initially, the boundary or source s local coordinate system is aligned with the geometric model s global coordinate system. To simplify defining field quantities that do not act in the direction of the global coordinate system, use the Orientation command to specify the following: The angle at which the x-axis of the boundary s local coordinate system lies in relation to the global x-axis. This lets you define field quantities on the boundary that act at an angle to the coordinate system. The origin of the boundary s local coordinate system, if different from that of the global coordinate system. This lets you define functions of position that do not have the same origin as the global coordinate system. For example, suppose that the voltage on the top edge of the object in the following figure varies according to the relationship V=2.5*X, with the voltage at Point A equal to zero. If you did not draw the geometric model so that the x-coordinate of Point A was zero, this Maxwell Online Help System 417 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

453 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Assign/Source/Sheet Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources General Procedure Options Functions Modifying a Function Deleting a Function Orientation Specifying Function Orientation Boundary Manager Assign Menu function would have to be defined as V=2.5*(X-A), where A is the x-coordinate of the point. In more complicated functions, taking this offset into account would make the function more difficult to define. To simplify the function, change its orientation so that it is evaluated with its origin at Point A. The x value of this point will then be equal to zero. V v Point A Voltage = 2.5*X New origin of source s local coordinate system u x y Edge voltage source Origin of model s coordinate system x Maxwell Online Help System 418 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

454 Assign/Source Assign/Source/Solid Assign/Source/Sheet Assign/End Connection Functional Boundaries and Sources General Procedure Options Functions Modifying a Function Deleting a Function Orientation Specifying Function Orientation Boundary Manager Assign Menu Specifying Function Orientation > To specify the orientation of a function on a boundary or source: 1. Define the function and assign it to the desired boundary or source. 2. Choose Orientation. The following window appears: 3. Select one of the following: Align with an object s orientation Align with a given direction Aligns the source or boundary s local coordinate system with the x-axis of the object s local coordinate system. Aligns the source or boundary s local coordinate system at an angle to the object s coordinate system. This option enables you to define a boundary property that acts at an angle to the local coordinate system. 4. If you selected Align with a given direction, enter the angle (in degrees) of the coordinate system in the Angle field. 5. Enter the coordinates of the new origin for the boundary s local coordinate system in the X and Y fields. By default, the origin is the center of the global coordinate system. 6. Choose OK to confirm the orientation or Cancel to cancel the orientation. Maxwell Online Help System 419 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

455 Boundary Manager Assign Menu Maxwell Online Help System 420 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

456 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Setup Executive Parameters Choose Setup Executive Parameters from the Executive Commands menu to request that one or more of the following quantities be computed during the solution: A capacitance, inductance, impedance, conductance, or admittance matrix. The net torque on an object or group of objects. The net force on an object or group of objects. The current flow across a line or set of lines. The magnetic or electric flux linkage across a line or set of lines. A post-processing macro, which enables you to perform computations using the postprocessing calculators during the solution process. The core loss on an object or group of objects. A menu of all available executive parameters appears when you select this command. Choose the parameter to compute and enter the appropriate information in the window that appears. A check box appears next to all parameters that have already been selected: Maxwell Online Help System 420 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

457 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Available Parameters Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands The Executive Parameters commands are as follows: Force Requests that the net force on the selected objects or group of objects be computed. Core Loss Requests that the core losses on the selected objects be computed. Torque Requests that the net torque on the selected objects or group of objects be computed. Torques are computed about an anchor point that you specify. Flux Lines Defines the flux lines in the problem. Post Processor Executes an existing post-processing macro. Macro Current Flow Requests that the current flow be computed across a line you specify. Matrix Requests that a capacitance, inductance, impedance, admittance, or conductance matrix be computed for the selected conductors in the model. Matrix/Flux (Magnetostatic, Eddy Current.) Defines any inductance matrix and flux linkage calculations. Select Matrix Defines the entries to use in the matrices. Entries Select Matrix/ (Magnetostatic, Eddy Current.) Defines the entries to use in the Flux Entries matrices, including flux entries. Either all or none of the flux linkage objects will be added to the matrix, based on your settings. Maxwell Online Help System 421 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

458 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Available Parameters Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Available Parameters Depending on the solver type selected, different executive parameters are available. Solver Available Executive Parameters Electrostatic Matrix (capacitance); Force; Torque (XY only). Magnetostatic Matrix (inductance); Force; Torque (XY only); Flux Linkage. Eddy Current Matrix (impedance); Force; Torque (XY only); Flux Linkage. AC Conduction Matrix (admittance); Current Flow. DC Conduction Matrix (conductance); Current Flow. Eddy Axial Current Flow. Transient None. Thermal None. Maxwell Online Help System 422 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

459 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Viewing the Force Solution Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Force Electrostatic, Magnetostatic, Eddy Current Choose Force from the Setup Executive Parameters menu to find the total force on an object or group of objects due to the distribution of the electric or magnetic field in the device.the system uses the principle of virtual work to compute force. The exact process for computing force depends on which field solver you selected for the model. Note: For cartesian models, the units are given in newtons per meter depth. For axisymmetric models, the units of force are given in newtons. When you choose Setup Executive Parameters/Force, the following window appears: More > To set up a force computation: 1. Select the objects (or groups of objects) for which force is to be computed. To select an object, click the left mouse button on its name or on the corresponding object in the geometric model. Alternatively, use the Select commands to select Maxwell Online Help System 423 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

460 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Viewing the Force Solution Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries More Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Note: conductors by name, by area, and so forth. 2. Choose one of the following under Include Selected Objects: Yes No The objects that you select should be able to move freely. If an object is physically attached to another object, you must select both to get a meaningful force calculation. If you choose more than one object, the objects are assumed to be rigidly connected the final result is the force acting on all specified objects. Includes the selected objects in the force computation. Removes the selected objects from the force computation. 3. When you finish, choose Exit. You are prompted to save your changes. Choose Yes to save the force setup and exit. Choose No to exit without saving. Choose Cancel to stay in the Force window. You return to the Executive Commands menu. If you saved the force setup, a check appears next to the Force command on the Setup Executive Parameters menu. Viewing the Force Solution If you selected Parameters from the Setup Solution menu, the simulator computes the force on the selected objects at the end of each adaptive field solution. To view the results of the force solutions, do one or both of the following: To display the force values computed after each pass (to see if force is converging to a stable value), choose Convergence from the Executive Commands menu. To view the final force solution, choose the Solutions/Force/Torque command from the Executive Commands menu. This lets you see the magnitude, direction, and the x- and y-components of the force. Maxwell Online Help System 424 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

461 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Computing Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Core Loss Eddy Current Choose Core Loss from the Setup Executive Parameters menu to find the total core loss on an object or group of objects due to the distribution of the electric or magnetic field in the device. When you choose Setup Executive Commands/Core Loss from the Executive Commands menu, the following window appears: Maxwell Online Help System 425 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

462 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Computing Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries More Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Computing Core Loss Core loss can be computed on any object in the model and is based on the type of core material used in the model. Either electrical sheet steel or power ferrites can be used. > To set up a core loss calculation: 1. Select the objects to include in the core loss calculation from the Objects list. 2. Select Compute Core Loss on Object. New fields below the view window become active. 3. Select Electrical steel or Power ferrite from the pull-down menu as the material type on which to base the core loss. The core loss for electrical steel is based on: 2 p = K h B max f+ K c ( B max f) 2 + K e ( B max f) 1.5 where: K h is the hysteresis coefficient. K c is the classical eddy coefficient. K e is the excess or anomalous eddy current coefficient due to magnetic domains. B max the maximum amplitude of the flux density. f is the solution frequency. The power ferrite core loss is based on: p C m f x y = B max where: C m is constant value determined by experiment. f x is the solution frequency. B y max is the maximum amplitude of the flux density. 4. For Electrical Steel, do the following: Enter the Hysteresis coefficient, K h, for the core. Enter the Classical Eddy coefficient, K c, for the core. Enter the Excess coefficient, K e, for the core. 5. For Power Ferrite, do the following: Enter the experimental constant in the C m field. Enter the Steinmetz x-exponent in the Steinmetz exponent, x field. Enter the Steinmetz y-exponent in the Steinmetz exponent, y field. Maxwell Online Help System 426 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

463 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Computing Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters 6. Select the Core Loss Unit from the pull-down menu. Depending on the manufacturer of the core materials, the loss coefficients and constants can have units of W/lb, W/kg, W/m 3, or kw/m Enter the Mass Density of the selected material type. This quantity is entered in kg/m 3. This is used for the core loss units of W/lb or W/kg. 8. Do one of the following to specify the solution frequency: Select Use solution frequency (the default) to use the frequency specified in the Solve Setup window as the solution frequency. Select Use object frequency and enter the Frequency for the object. Optionally, you may modify the units for the entered value using the pull-down menu to the right of the field. 9. Optionally, select View Curve to display the core loss curve. When you select this, the Bmin and Bmax fields become active, allowing you to enter new values. Bmin and Bmax define the minimum and maximum core loss values for the curve. Choose Refresh at any time to refresh the core loss plot with the new values. By default, View Model is selected, allowing you to observe the model in the view window. 10.Choose Assign to assign the core loss settings to the object or Revert to revert to the object s default values. When you assign the settings to the object, Yes appears in the Included list, and all fields below the view window become inactive. Note: For laminated cores made of electrical sheet steel, the conductivity of the core should be set to 0 in the Material Manager. This will correctly model the laminations and produce the correct EM loss value in the calculator. You should also set the conductivity to 0 for power ferrite cores. This will correctly model a solid ferrite core and produce the correct EM loss in the calculator. Maxwell Online Help System 427 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

464 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Specifying a Return Path for Current Specifying Signal and Ground Lines Viewing the Matrix Solution Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Matrix Electrostatic, Magnetostatic, DC Conduction, AC Conduction, Eddy Current Choose Matrix from the Setup Executive Parameters menu to request that one of the following matrices be computed during the solution process. For a detailed description of the physical meaning of these quantities as well as a description of how they are computed, consult the Technical Notes. Matrix Admittance (Y-matrix) Capacitance (C-matrix) Conductance (G-matrix) Impedance (Z-matrix) Inductance (L-matrix) Solver Type AC Conduction Electrostatic DC Conduction Eddy Current Magnetostatic Note: If parallel current sources are used, the impedance matrix will not be correct. A window similar to the following one appears when you select this command. All objects More Maxwell Online Help System 428 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

465 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Specifying a Return Path for Current Specifying Signal and Ground Lines Viewing the Matrix Solution Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters in the model are listed on the left side of the window: > To set up a matrix computation: 1. Select the conductors (or groups of conductors) to include in the matrix. 2. Choose Include in Matrix. 3. Do one of the following: If you are computing an inductance matrix (magnetostatic) or an impedance matrix (eddy current), identify the return path for current in the computation. If you are computing a capacitance matrix (electrostatic), a conductance matrix (DC conduction), or an admittance matrix (AC conduction), identify whether the conductors are Signal Lines or Grounds. 4. Choose Assign to include the selected conductors in the matrix computation. 5. When you finish selecting conductors for the matrix, choose Exit. You are prompted to save your changes. Choose Yes to save the matrix setup you ve just entered and exit. Choose No to exit without saving. Choose Cancel to stay in the Matrix window. If you saved the matrix setup, a check box appears next to the Matrix command on the Setup Executive Parameters menu. Maxwell Online Help System 429 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

466 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Specifying a Return Path for Current Specifying Signal and Ground Lines Viewing the Matrix Solution Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Specifying a Return Path for Current If you are setting up an inductance or impedance matrix computation, you must specify the return path for current in the device that s being modeled. All conductors that can be used as return paths are listed beneath Include in Matrix. By default, current in an inductance or impedance computation is considered to flow into the plane being modeled. It returns along an outside balloon, value (Dirichlet) or odd symmetry boundary as shown here. i return i source i return i return i return As an alternative, you can identify a conductor in the model to serve as a current return path. For instance, if current is to return along the ground plane in the microstrip model below, identify that object as the current return path. More i source i return Maxwell Online Help System 430 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

467 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Specifying a Return Path for Current Specifying Signal and Ground Lines Viewing the Matrix Solution Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters > To define the return path for current in the matrix computation, do one of the following: To use the default return path for current, choose Default. Note: If your model doesn t include an outside balloon, value or odd symmetry boundary, do not choose Default the inductance or impedance computation will fail. To identify a specific conductor as the current return path, highlight that conductor. During the general field solution, the currents in conductors are defined by the boundary conditions and sources specified under Setup Boundaries/Sources. However, during the matrix subsolutions, the currents in the conductors are defined by the matrix setup. During each subsolution, one ampere of current is allowed to flow through a single conductor a different conductor in each subsolution. No current flows through the other conductors. During all of the subsolutions, -1 ampere of current flows in the return path modeling the current that s returning from the matrix conductor. Conductors that are not included in the matrix or identified as a return path for current are treated as ordinary objects. Maxwell Online Help System 431 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

468 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Specifying a Return Path for Current Specifying Signal and Ground Lines Viewing the Matrix Solution Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Specifying Signal and Ground Lines If you are setting up a capacitance, admittance, or conductance matrix computation, you must identify which conductors in the matrix are signal-carrying conductors or are grounded conductors. Choose Signal Line to identify the selected conductors as signal lines that is, conductors to include in the matrix computation. At least one conductor must be identified as a Signal Line to set up a valid capacitance, admittance, or conductance matrix computation. Choose Ground to identify the selected conductor as a ground line that is, a conductor that is grounded during the matrix computation. Ground conductors are not included in the matrix, but their presence affects its solution. Only one conductor or group of conductors can be identified as a Ground. Note: You must identify all conductors to include in the matrix as Signal lines; however, you do not necessarily have to identify a Ground conductor. Select a ground conductor only if you wish to model the effect of a grounded object in the matrix. During the general field solution, the voltages on conductors identified as Signal Lines and Grounds are defined by the boundary conditions and sources specified under Setup Boundaries/Sources. However, during the matrix subsolutions, these conductors are treated differently. Maxwell Online Help System 432 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

469 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Specifying a Return Path for Current Specifying Signal and Ground Lines Viewing the Matrix Solution Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Viewing the Matrix Solution If you selected Solve for Parameters under Setup Solution parameters, Maxwell 2D solves for the desired matrix during the solution process. After all field solutions are complete, a capacitance, inductance, impedance, admittance, or conductance matrix will be computed for the selected conductors. > To view the capacitance, inductance, impedance, admittance, or conductance matrix: Choose Solutions/Matrix from the Executive Commands menu. Maxwell Online Help System 433 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

470 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Viewing the Torque Solution Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Torque Electrostatic, Magnetostatic, Eddy Current Choose Torque from the Setup Executive Parameters menu to compute the torque on an object (or group of objects) due to the force from the electric or magnetic field. Torques are computed about an anchor point that you specify. Depending on which field solver you selected for the model, torque is computed in one of several different ways. Torque is given in newton-meters per meter depth or in newtons. Note: Torque can only be computed for cartesian (XY) models. The following window appears when you select this command: More > To set up a torque calculation: 1. Select the objects (or groups of objects) for which torque is to be computed. Objects are selected in the same way as for the force computation. 2. Under Include Selected objects, choose Yes. This selects the objects for the Maxwell Online Help System 434 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

471 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Viewing the Torque Solution Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters torque computation. 3. Choose No to remove objects from the torque computation. 4. Choose the anchor point from which torques are computed (the point that the objects rotate around). By default, the anchor point is (0,0). To change the anchor point for the torque computation: a. Choose Set Anchor Point. b. Click the left mouse button on the desired point. (Alternately, enter the u and v- coordinates of the point in the U and V fields at the bottom of the window.) The anchor point is marked with an X in the display area. 5. When you finish, choose Exit. You are prompted to save your changes. Choose Yes to save the torque setup you ve just entered and exit. Choose No to exit without saving. Choose Cancel to stay in the Torque window. You return to the Executive Commands menu. If you saved the torque setup, a check appears next to the Torque command on the Setup Executive Parameters menu. Viewing the Torque Solution If you selected Parameters from the Setup Solution menu, the simulator computes the torque on the selected objects at the end of each adaptive field solution. To view the results of the torque solutions, do one or both of the following: To display the torque values computed after each pass, choose Convergence from the Executive Commands menu. This lets you see whether torque is converging to a stable value. To view the final torque solution, choose the Solutions/Force/Torque command from the Executive Commands menu. This lets you see the magnitude of the torque and the anchor point used in the torque computation. Maxwell Online Help System 435 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

472 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Viewing Information about Flux Lines Viewing the Flux Linkage Solution Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Flux Lines Electrostatic, Magnetostatic, Eddy Current Choose Setup Executive Parameters/Flux Lines to compute the electric or magnetic flux linkage across the specified lines. In cartesian (XY) models, the simulator solves for the flux that crosses perpendicular to the surface made by sweeping the flux line in the z direction. The flux in webers per meter of depth in the z direction is computed. In axisymmetric (RZ) models, the simulator solves for the total flux in webers that passes through the surface made by rotating the line 360 around the z-axis. A window similar to the following one appears when you choose this command: More > To define the lines over which flux linkage is to be computed: 1. Choose Add. 2. Click the left mouse button on the first point in the line. Alternatively, enter its coordinates in the U and V fields at the bottom of the screen. 3. Click the left mouse button on the second point in the line. Alternatively, enter its coordinates in the U and V fields. 4. Enter the Line Name. Maxwell Online Help System 436 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

473 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Viewing Information about Flux Lines Viewing the Flux Linkage Solution Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters 5. Select the Line Color. 6. Choose Enter to accept the line or Cancel to cancel the flux line. 7. When you finish, choose Exit. You are prompted to save your changes. Choose Yes to save the torque setup you ve just entered and exit. Choose No to exit without saving. Choose Cancel to stay in the Torque window. Repeat this procedure for each flux line to be added. Line names appear in the list box on the left side of the screen. Maxwell Online Help System 437 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

474 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Viewing Information about Flux Lines Viewing the Flux Linkage Solution Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Viewing Information about Flux Lines To view information about a flux line, select its name in the list box. The following appears: Line Name Line Color First Point Second Point Viewing the Flux Linkage Solution The name of the flux line. If desired, type in a new name and choose Enter. The color of the flux line. If desired, select a new color and choose Enter. The coordinates of the first point in the line. The coordinates of the second point in the line. If you selected Parameters from the Setup Solution menu, the simulator computes the flux linkage at the end of each adaptive field solution. To view the results of the flux linkage solutions, do one or both of the following: To display the flux linkage computed after each pass, choose Convergence from the Executive Commands window. This displays a single value for the flux linkage computed across all the lines you specified, letting you see whether the flux linkage solution is converging to a stable value. To view the final flux linkage solution, choose the Solutions/Flux Linkage command from the Executive Commands window. This lets you see the flux linkage across the individual lines you specified. The flux linkage calculated using the eddy current solver contains two values. The first one is the real component and the second is the imaginary component. Maxwell Online Help System 438 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

475 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Viewing the Current Flow Solution Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Current Flow Eddy Axial, DC Conduction, AC Conduction Choose Current Flow from the Setup Executive Parameters menu to compute the current flow across a line you specify. In cartesian (XY) models, the current flow is found by integrating the normal component of J along the surface made by sweeping the current flow line in the z direction. The current flow in amperes per meter of depth in the z direction is computed. In axisymmetric (RZ) models, the current flow is found by integrating the normal component of J across the surface made by rotating the line 360 around the z-axis. The total current flow in amperes through this surface is computed. The following window appears when you choose this command: The procedure for entering and viewing current flow lines is identical to that used for entering and viewing flux lines. Maxwell Online Help System 439 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

476 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Viewing the Current Flow Solution Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Viewing the Current Flow Solution If you selected Parameters from the Setup Solution menu, the simulator computes the current flow at the end of each adaptive field solution. To view the results of the current flow solutions, do one or both of the following: To display the current computed after each pass, choose Convergence from the Executive Commands menu. This displays a single value for the current computed across all the lines you specified, letting you see whether the current solution is converging to a stable value. To view the final current solution, choose the Solutions/Current Flow command from the Executive Commands menu. This lets you see the current across the individual lines you specified. Maxwell Online Help System 440 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

477 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Executing Macros Defining Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Post Processor Macros All Solvers except Transient Choose Post Processor Macros to execute a sequence of steps that have been previously defined and saved in a macro file. The following window appears: The Available Macros list displays all macros that have been defined and saved as the user s macro library for the project. The box labeled Selected Macros lists the macros that the user has selected for automatic Post Processor execution. Executing Macros > Do the following to execute post-processor macros during a solution: To add an available macro to the Selected Macros list, click on the desired entry in the Available Macros list to select it, and then select the Add button. The new entry moves from the Available Macros list to the Selected Macros list. To remove a macro from the Selected Macros list, select the entry that is to be removed and then select the Remove button. The entry moves from the Selected Macros list to the Available Macros list. Maxwell Online Help System 441 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

478 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Executing Macros Defining Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Defining Macros Macros are defined by having Maxwell 2D record all keystrokes and mouse clicks made while manually setting up a Post Processor calculation. (The procedure for defining Post Processor macros is described elsewhere.) You will find that a Post Processor calculation and its associated macro definition cannot be set up until at least one solution has been executed. If you plan to define macros, it is suggested that you run a non-adaptive solution first, define the macros, and then proceed with the adaptive solutions. Post Processor macros are especially useful when performing a parametric sweep. Executing macros during parametric sweeps enables you to solve for any quantity of interest transformer efficiency, energy density, hysteresis, loss, and so on that can be computed using the calculators. This lets you immediately compare the results of computations for the different values of the variables in the sweep. > To use Post Processor macros during a parametric sweep: 1. Generate a field solution for the nominal problem. (This does not have to be an adaptive solution unless you want to refine the mesh prior to performing a parametric sweep.) 2. Access the fields Post Processor and define the desired macros using the File/ Trans commands. To be displayed during a solution, the macro must store a value in a number register. 3. Select which macros are to be executed during the solution using the Setup Executive Parameters/Post Processor Macros command. During the parametric solution, the results of each Post Processing macro are displayed in their own column in the spreadsheet. Maxwell Online Help System 442 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

479 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Matrix/Flux When you wish to define an impedance matrix for the flux linkage, choose Setup Executive Parameters/Matrix/Flux to select the items to include in the matrix. > To define the matrix entries for the flux linkage: 1. Choose Setup Executive Parameters/Matrix/Flux. The Impedance Matrix and Flux Linkage Setup window appears, listing the objects in the model: 2. Select the object to include in the matrix. 3. Enter a Name for the matrix entry. 4. Select Include in matrix to add the entry to the matrix. This is the default setting. 5. Choose Assign. The object is added to the impedance matrix. 6. Repeat this procedure for each entry until you have completed the impedance matrix. 7. Choose Exit to exit the window and save the changes as you exit. Maxwell Online Help System 443 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

480 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Select Matrix/Flux Entries Choose Setup Executive Parameters/Select Matrix/Flux Entries to define the impedance matrix. The matrix entries are composed of those you defined with the Setup Executive Parameters/Matrix/Flux command. > To define the impedance matrix: 1. Choose Setup Executive Parameters/Select Matrix/Flux Entries. The Select Matrix and Flux Linkage Entries window appears: 2. Select an object from the Row entry list. 3. Select an object from the Column entry list. 4. Choose Add to add the matrix to the selection list. 5. Optionally, select Include Flux Linkage in Table to add the flux linkage calculation to the matrix table. 6. Once you have added all of the matrices to the list that you wish, choose OK to return to the Executive Commands menu. Maxwell Online Help System 444 Copyright Ansoft Corporation

481 Setup Executive Parameters Executive Parameters Commands Force Core Loss Matrix Torque Flux Lines Current Flow Post Processor Macros Matrix/Flux Select Matrix/Flux Entries Select Matrix Entries Removing Matrix Entries Tailoring a Parametric Problem Define Model Setup Materials Setup Boundaries/ Sources Maxwell 2D Setup Executive Parameters Select Matrix Entries If you have requested that capacitance, inductance, impedance, admittance, or conductance matrices be computed for selected conductors in the model, and have purchased the parametric analysis module, choose Setup Executive Parameters/Select Matrix Entries to display their parameters in the variable spreadsheet. These parameters will be used to define the matrix entries for a parametric sweep. > To define a matrix entry: 1. Choose Setup Executive Parameters/Select Matrix Entries. A window similar to the following one appears: 2. Select an object from the Row entry list. 3. Select an object from the Column entry list. 4. Choose Add to add the matrix to the selection list. 5. Once you have added all of the matrices to the list that you wish, choose OK to return to the Executive Commands menu. Maxwell Online Help System 445 Copyright Ansoft Corporation